I Digitized by the Internet Archive in 2008 with funding from IVIicrosoft Corporation http://www.archive.org/details/dictionaryofenglOOworcrich -— I NEAA^ KDITION, ^VITH SUPPLEMENT. DICTIONARY OP THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. BY JOSEPH E. WORCESTER, LL.D. WITH SUPPLEMENT CONTAINING OVER 12,500 NEW WORDS AND ENTRIES, AND A VOCABULARY OF SYNONYMES OF WORDS IN GENERAL USE. MULTA RENA8CENTUB QU^ JAM CECIDfiBE, CADENTQUE aVM NUNC SUNT IN HONORE VOCABULA, SI VOLET USU8 : QUEM PENES ARBITRIUM EST, ET JUS, ET NOBMA LOQUENDI. HOBACE. LONDON: FREDERICK WARNE & CO., Bedford Street, Strand. 1884. Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1859, by JOSEPH E. WORCESTER, In the Clerk's Office of the District Court of the District of Massachusetts. Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1881, by J. B. LIPPINCOTT & co- in the Office of the Librarian of Congress at Washington. !'• ■/ ;/ PREFACE A Dictionary of the English language, in order to be complete, must contain all the words of the language in their correct orthograpliy, with their pronunciation and etymology, and their definition, exemplified in their difFjrent n)panings by citations fn)m Writers belonging to different periads of English literature ; and such a Dictionary cannot be' brought into a small compass. An attempt has been made to render the work which is now ofiered to the public as complete as possible, without being too large aod t(X) expensive for common use. This Dictionary is formed on a plan similar to that of the "Universal and Critical Dictionary" of the author, published in 1S4G; but it is much larger and more comprehensive. The " Universal Dictionaiy " contains, in addition to the words found in Todd's edition of Johnson's Dictionary, nearly 27,000 words for which authorities are given. " In addition to these, this work con- tains about 19,000 words, which have been derived from a great variety of sources; — the total number being about 104,000. Authorities are given for almost all the words that are inserted. It has been an especial rule to give authorities for all such as are tech- nical, obsolete, antiquated, rare, provincial, local, colloquial, of recent introduction, or of doubtful propriety ; also for the obsolete, provincial, local, or questionable use or meaning of words ; and words, and the meaning of words, which are technical, obsolete, anti- quated, provincial, local, colloquial, or of recent introduction, are generally noted as such. A Dictionary that is designed to be a conqjlcte glossary of all English books which are now read, must contain many words which are obsolete, and many which arc unwor- thy of being countenanced. Many such are found in Johnson's Dictionary, especially in Todd's edition of it, and in the other principal English Dictionaries. The use of a considerable number of words which were obsolete fifty or a hundred years ago, has since been revived, and some which are marked as obsolete may doubtless have been used by some recent writers, and the use of others may probably be hereafter revived. Much care has been bestowed upon orthography ; and the design has been to give that which is in accordance with the best usage both in England and in the United States. With respect to orthography, the principal American authors diffbr little from the established English usage. The most noted difference relates to a few words ending in or or our, as favor, honor, or favour, honour. In this country it is the general practice to omit the tt ; though in f]ngland, in a small number of words, the most of which are dissyllables, it is commonly retained. (See Remarks on Orthography, page xxv.) In the preparation of this Dictionary, the subject of orthoepy has received much attention"; and with respect to words of various, doubtful, or disputed pronunciation, the different modes, with their respective authorities, are exhibited ; and the reader may here see in what manner these words are pronounced by all the most eminent English orthoepists. There is much diversity in tlie pronunciation of many of these words, both among professed orthocpists and among the best speakers of the language. It is not possible that any individual should know from personal observation what is the best usage with respect to all these words ; and no one, who is scrupulous about his pronunciation, will bo willing to place implicit reliance on any single orthoepist, but he will wish, in relation to doubtful matters, to know the different modes adopted by all who are entitled to be regarded as having much authority. The reader who is desirous of this sort of information may here find it condensed in a small space and convenient form, lid thus be spared the labor of searching for it in many volumes. In relation to many of the words about which orthocpists differ. It IS difficult to decide which mode is to be preferred ; and it is not to be supposed that that for which a prcfcrent o is hero indicaiCd' will, in all cases, be deemed the best; but when it is not, the reader will find the mode which he may prefer enclosed in brackets, and supported by its proper authority. In relation to a considerable number of these words, remarks arc extracted from orthoepists. 887 iv PREFACE. especially from "Waiker, all the notes in whose Dictionary, that are esteemed of much value, have been inserted. There are many words in this hook which are not to be found in any Pronouncing Dictionary, and it can hardly be expected that the correct pro- nunciation of all of them should be given. Most of the words of the English language are readily traced to the Teutonic, or Gothic languages, especially to the Anglo- Saxon ; or to the Graeco-Latin languages, especially the Latin through the French ; and in treating of the etymology of words, these two classes of languages are kept distinct. The derivation of nearly all the primitive words, as far as it has been ascertained, has been given ; with respect to disputed or uncertain etymologies, the authorities are generally specified ; but long discussions on doubtful matters have been avoided. Besides what may be regarded as strict etymons of English words derived from the Latin, the parallel words of several sister languages, of Latin origin, have been, in numerous instances, inserted ; and with regard to words of northern origin, parallel or cognate words of the different languages of the Teutonic or Gothic family have also been generally given. In relation to etymology, assistance has been derived from sources too numerous to be fully designated. With respect to the etymology of words from the Anglo-Saxon and other North-European languages. Dr. Bosworth's Dictionary of the Anglo-Saxon has been of great use ; and of the English Dictionaries, that of Dr. Richardson has afforded much more assistance than any other. The titles of the works of many other authors, which have furnished more or less aid, with the date of their publi- cation, are to be found in the Catalogues which follow the " History of English Lexicography." The definition of words is regarded as tne most important part of a Dictionary : and a word should be so defined as to exhibit the meaning, or the different meanings, in which it is used by good writers. Dr Richardson says, with respect to definition, " The great first principle upon which I have proceeded in the department of the Dictionary which embraces explanation, is that so clearly evolved and so incontrovertibly demonstrated in the ' Diversions of Purley ' ; namely, that a word has one meaning, and one only ; that from it all usages must spring and be derived ; and that in the etymology of each word must be found this single intrinsic meaning, and the cause of the application of those usages." And with respect to Johnson's Dictionary, he says, " It may seem harsh, but it is strictly true, that a great variety of instances might, with very little trouble, be collected of distinctions where no difference subsists." Though there may be found in Johnson's Dictionary many instances in which a distinction is made where there is little or no difference, yet the principle stated by Home Tooke, that " a word has one meaning, and one only," cannot be admitted without numerous exceptions. Take, for example, some very common words, as the verbs to hear, to break, to ffet, to ffive, to lay, to maket to rise, to take, to throw, to turn, and the nouns law, letter, line, post ; though the different senses in which these words are used, .may be, in some measure, in accordance with one original meaning of each, yet a single definition of each of the words would ^ afford but a very inadequate explanation. The original or etymological meaning of many words has become obselete, and they have assumed a new or more modern meaning ; many which retain their etymological meaning have other meanings annexed to them ; many have both a literal and a metaphorical meaning, and many both a common and a technical meaning, — all which need explanation. This Dictionary will be found to contain numerous technical terms relating to theology, law, medicine, military and naval affairs, to architecture, astronomy, botany, chemistry, entomology, geology, ichthyology, mathematics, mechanics, mineralogy, music, ornithology, paleontology, zoology, &c. A Dictionary of the Arts and Sciences cannot be complete without numerous diagrams ; and though it is not possible to make such a work as this, which is intended to be chiefly a Dictionary of the language, a complete technological Dictionary, yet the design has been to insert all such terms as the general reader is likely to meet with ; and many terms, which cannot be well explained without a pictorial representation, are illustrated by wood-cuts. How far it is proper or expedient to introduce tehnical terms into a dictionary of the language, it is difficult to determine. Some would .have them wholly excluded ; and there arc doubtless materials enough to make without them a large volume. Some such terms, how- ever, are found in all the principal English Dictionaries ; many words have both a common and a technical meaning ; and it is difficult to form such a rule as would be a proper guide for determining what words of this description shall be admitted, and what ones excluded. Many of the words which may be regarded as technical are among those with respect to which the general reader most often needs to have an explanation ; and a Dictionary which contained none of these terms would be regarded as very defective. ^sciences, and the terms relating to them, are subject to great and frequent changes ; and a Technological Die- PREFACE. V tionary, perfect as it could have been made fifty years since, would now be very imperfect. Ilcconrse has been had, in iheae matters, to recent and to the best authorities ; and use has been made of the Dictionaries of iJrande, Urc, Fairholt, Tomlinson, Baird, Falconer, Loudon, Dunglison, Bouvier, Burrill, Davis and Peck, Whishaw, Ilook, Eden, Kitto, the Penny Cyclopxdia, the English Cyclopasdia, and many other dictionaries of the different arts and sciences, encycloptsdias, and works on the various sciences, the titles of which are contained in the Catalogues of Dictionaries and Scientific Works. (See pages Ixiii. to Ixrii.) In this part of the Dictionary important assistance has been received from several gentlemen well versed in the different sciences. Citations from respectable authors to exemplify and illustrate the use and meaning of words have been given, as far as the limits of the work would permit. These citations, among which may be found many of the gems of English literature, are deemed a very valuable portion of the volume, and it is to be regretted that there was not room for more ; but the want of them has been, in a good measure, supplied by introducing detached phrases to illustrate the meaning of words, and by a notice of the tn which he had been for many years engaged. The work was republished in London by an unscrupulous publisher, with a garbled r.a I mutilated preface, and the false title of " A Universal Critical and Pronouncing Dictionary of th;) English Language, compiled from the materials of Noah Webster, LLD., by Joseph E. Worcester." Dr. Worcester, always disinclined to assail others or vimlicato Viil MEMOIR. himself, could not, however, allow so gross a literary fraud to pass unnoticed ; and he repel-'ed the charge involved in the titlepao^, in a pamphlet published in 1853, and republished, with additions, in 1855. In 1847, Dr. Worcester was threatened with a loss of the precious sense of sight. His eyes yielded to the straui of long and uninterrupted intellectual toil, and for two years they were entirely useless to him for all purposes of investigation and research. During this period, three operations for cataract were per- formed on the right eye, and two on the left, the last of which was happily successful. This trial, so severe to a man of his studious tastes and retired habits, whose whole life and energies were devoted to unambitious literary toil, was borne by him with that gentle patience which was not more the result of an equable temperament than of a deep-seated religious faith, and an entire submission to the will of God. In 1847, he published an enlarged and improved edition of his Comprehensive Dictionary. This was still further enlarged and improved in 1849; and in 1855 it appeared with the title, "A Pronouncing, Explanatory, and Synonymous Dictionary of the English Language." The most elaborate and important of Dr. Worcester's literary labors, that to which all his previous works in the department of lexicography had been more or less preparatory and introductory, was his " Dictionary of the English Language," originally pub- iished in 1860. In the preparation of this work, especially in the explanation of technical terms, the author was aided by many able assistants ; and, so far as he himself was concerned, it presented the ripe results of many years of patient and conscientious research, shaped by unerring judgment and uniform good taste. This is not the place to set forth the excellences of this work, still less to make any comparison between its claims and those of other productions of the same class ; it is enough to say that it was received by the public with a favor which more than met Dr. Worcester's modest expectations, and that the numerous expres. sions of approval which it called forth from men eminent in literature and philology, both in England and America, gave him the highest satisfaction which an author can enjoy, — the assurance that his labors had been appreciated by competent judges. From a Memoir of Dr. Worcester by Mr. Ezra Abbot of Cambridge, read before the American Academy, we transcribe a few sentences containing an estimate of his labors, which time will not fail to confirm : — "All the works of Dr. Worcester give evidence of sound judgment and good taste, combined with indefatigable industry, and a conscientious solicitude for accuracy in the statement of facts. The tendency of his mind was practical rather than speculative. As a lexicographer, he did not undertake to reform long-established anomalies in the English language : his aim was rather to preserve it from corruption ; and his works have certainly contributed much to that end. In respect both to orthography and pronunciation, he tooK great pains to ascertain the best usage ; and perhaps there is no lexicographer whose judgment respecting these matters in doubtful cases deserves higher consideration. In the mazy paths of etymology, if he cannot claim the merit of an original explorer, his good sense preserved him from the wild aberrations and extravagances into which many have been misled." Dr. Worcester was a member of the Massachusetts Historical Society, of the American Academy, and of the American Oriental Society ; and he was an Honorary Corresponding Member of the Royal Geographical Society of London. He received the degree of Doctor of Laws from Brown University, and also from Dartmouth College. Dr. Worcester's life, passed in unbroken literary toil, leaves few events for a biographer to record. Though his manners were reserved and his habits retiring, his affections were strong; and benevolence was an ever-active principle in his nature. Ha was grave in exterior, but neither cold nor hard in feeling. He was a stranger to the impulses of passion and the sting of ambi- tion. His life was tranquil, happy, and useful. A love of truth and a strong sense of duty were leading traits in his character. liittle known, except by name, to the general public, he was honored and loved by that small circle of relatives and friends who had constant opportunities of learning the warmth of his affections and the strength of his virtues. Dr. Worcester married, June 29, 1841, Amy Elizabeth, daughter of the Rev. Joseph McKean, D.D., late BoyLston Pro- fessor of Rhetoric and Oratory in Harvard University. He leaves a widow, but no children. G. S H. CONTENTS. PRINCIPLES OF PRONUNCIATION xi to xxiv Key to the Sounds op the Marked Letters .... xi Remarks on the Key *' Sounds of the Vowels xii Sounds of the Diphthongs ahd Triphthongs .... xr Sounds of the Consonants xvii Accent ^'^ Orthoepy and Orthoepists xxn ORTHOGRAPHY xxv to xxxiii Remarks on Orthography xxv Rules op Orthography xxvu Vocabulary op Words op Doubtful or Various Orthog- raphy xxviii ENGLISH GRAMMAR xxxiv to xli List op Words with the Proper Preposition annexed xI ORIGIN, FORMATION, AND ETYMOLOGY OF THE ENG- LISH LANGUAGE xl» to »»« The Lord's Prayer in Various Languages .... xlil Specimens of Early English xl'i ARCHAISMS, PROVINCIALISMS, AND AMERICANISMS . 1 to Hi HISTORY OF ENGLISH LEXICOGRAPHY liii to Wiil English Orthoepists I*" A CATALOGUE OF ENGLISH DICTIONARIES, OLOS- SARIES, ENCYCLOP-fiDIAS, Ac lix to Ixt A LIST OF THE PRINCIPAL SCIENTIFIC WORKS USED IN THE PREPARATION OF THIS DICTION- ARY '*^ ABBREVIATIONS AND SIGNS USED IN THIS DIC TiONARY •»*>" A DICTIONARY OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE 1 to 1696 APPENDIX. PRONUNCIATION OF GREEK AND LATIN PROPER NAMES 1701 to 1735 Preface 1701 Principal Works used in the Preparation of the Vocabulary op Greek and Latin Proper Names . 1702 Remarks 1703 Rules of Pronunciation 1704 Initial Vocabulary 1705 Terminational Vocabulary 1726 PRONUNCIATION OF SCRIPTURE PROPER NAMES 1737 to 1750 Preface 1737 Rules of Pronunciation 1738 Initial Vocabulary 1739 Terminational Vocabulabt 1747 PRONUNCIATION OF MODERN GEOGRAPHICAL NAMES 1751 to 1781 Remarks "^^ Pronunciation of Several European Languages . . 175J Modern Geographical Names 17W PRONUNCIATION OF THE NAMES OF DISTINGUISHED MEN OF MODERN TIMES 17M to 1768 ABBREVIATIONS USED IN WRITING AND PRINT- jjjQ 17«9 to 17TJ SIGNS USED IN WRITING AND PRINTING . . . 1773 to 177» A COLLECTION OF AVORDS, PHRASES, AND QUOTATIONS FROM THE GREEK, LATIN, FRENCH, ITALIAN, AND SPANISH LANGUAGES "77 to lT8e SUI^I^LEMElSrT. PREFACE 1789 ABBREVIATIONS AND SIGNS 1790 b VOCABULARY , SYNONYMES 1791 to 1969 1971 to 1990 Ox) PRINCIPLES OF PRONUNCIATION. KEY TO THE SOUNDS OF THE MARKED LETTERS. 1. A long 2. A short 3. A long before R 4. A Italian or grave .... 5. A inte)~mcdiate, between A and A G. A broad 7. A slight or obscure E long E shoH , . . . £ like A . . . . E short and obtuse jp slight or obscure VOWEL Examples FATE, AID, LAcE, PAFN, PLAYER. I. fAt, mAn, lAd, CARRY. 2. fAre, bAre, pAir, beAr. 3. far, father, farther, calm. 4. fAst, brAnch, grAsp, grAss. 5. fAll, hAul, wAlk, wArm. 6, ll\r, palace, courage, abbacy 1. 2, 3. 4. 5. 6. METE, SEAL, FEAR, KEEP. MfeT, MEN, SELL, FERRY. HEIR, THERE, WHERE. HER, HERD, FERN, FERVID. BRI(;R, FU^L, COLLEGE, CELERY. Mong PINE, FILE, FIND, MTlD, FFRE. I short pTn, fIll, mTss, mIrror. \ like long ¥-. MIEN, MACHINE, POLICE, MARInE. i short and obtuse SIR, FIR, BIRD, VIRTUE. \ slight or obscure ELIXJR, RUJN, RESPITE, ABILjTY. S. O long short 6 long and close . . . 6 broad, like broad A . 6 like short U . . . . Q slight or obscure . . U long D short U middle or obtuse .... U short and obtuse .... tj long arid close, like 6 in m6 VE y sliglit or obscure .... 1. Y long .... 2. Y shoH .... 3. Y short and obtuse 4. Y slight or obscure of and OY B6!L, TOtL, Bot, TOY. 6t! and OW B01)ND, TOVVn. NcivV. EW like long U FEW, NEW, DEW. Eramplet. NOTE, FOAL, TOW, sORE. Not, don, r>Dn, BORROW. m6ve, prAve, k66i), j«66n NOR, FORM, SORT, OIGHT. s6n, done, cAme, muxev. ACTQR, CQNFE8S, FEI.QNV, Pt.'RrQfia TUBE, TUNE, SUIT, FUMB, PURE. tCb, TON, IIUT, hCrry. BtyLL, pOlL, F /"'■> hurdle. There is little or no difference in the sounds of the vowels e, i, u, and y, when under this mark ; as, her, fir, fiir, myrrh ; but their proper short sounds are ^videly different from each other, when they are followed by the sound of r, or by other consonants ; as in merry, peril, mirror, hurry. - - See remarks on the sound of the letter R, page xviiL 10. Vowels marked with the dot underneath, thus, a, e, i, o, «, y, are found only in syllables which are not accented, and over which llie organs of speech pass slightly and hastily in i)ronouncing the words in which they are found. It is to be observed that this mark is em- ployed to indicate a slight stress of voice in uttering the ai)])ro])riate sound of the vowel, rather than to note any particular quality nj sound. If the syllables on which the primary and secondary accents fall, are uttered with a jjroper stress of voice, these comparatively indistinct syllables will naturally be pronounced right. In a majority of cases, this mark may be regarded as indicating an indistinct short sound of the vowel ; as in tenable, mental, travel, ]>eril, idol, forum, carry ; but in many cases it indicates a slight or unaccented long sound ; as in carbonate, stdphate, emerge, obey, ebony, follower, du- plicity, ediicate, regulate, congratidate. The letter w, m the last three words, is pronoimced like yu slightlj- articulated. The vowels with this mark have, in some situations, jjarticularly in the last syllabic cf words ending with r, no ])ercei)tible difference of sound ; as in friar, speaker, nadir, actor, s^dphiir, zephyr. As Mr. Smart justly re- marks, "the last syllables of robber, nadir, author, sulphur, and satyr, are quite undistinguishable in j)ronunciation." A, unaccented, at the end of a word, a])proachcs the Italian sound of a in father ; as in the words algebra, comma, idea ; and ah, final, partakes still more of the ItaUan sound, as in Jehovah, Messiah.* * With respect to the sound piven to the letter a in unaccented syllHhles, there is a t'reat diversity auioii).' ortlioeiiists. For example, to a in courage, t^heridaii, Walker, and Jones pive the short sound of t ; Jameson and Smart, the sound of long a; — to « in rfe/ienAe, Walker gives the sound of short a, Jameson and Smart, of long a: Sheridan and Jones, of short e, — to a in furnace, Sheridan and Walker give the sound of short t; Jones and Jameson, of short e, Smart, of long a. A at the end of words IS marked by Sheridan, Walker, Jones, Jameson, and various other ortho- epists with its short sound ; as in alrrebra, comma,^tdea. ; hut l.y Smart, it is marked with the Italian sound as an " unaccented vowel ;'" algebrd. — Walker says, " We cannot give it [a] any of its three open sounds without hurting the ear. Thus, in jironoiincing the words abound and diadem, ay-bound, ah-bound,aiu\ aw-bound; di ay de.m, diah-dem, and di-aw-dem, are ail improper; but giving the a the second or Italian sound, as ah-bound and di-ah-dem, seems the least so. For which reason, \ have, like Mr. Sheridan, adopted the sliort sound of this letter to mark the unac- cented a ; but if the unaccented a he final, it then seems to approach still nearer to the Italian a in the last syllable of pupa, and to the o in father ; as may be heard in the deliberate pronunciation of the words ii/ra, Africa, Delia," &c. For further illustration and explanation of the use of liiis mark ( . ), see the Tablo SOUNDS OF THE VOWELS. Xlll 11. The third sound of the letter a, marked thus d, is its long sound qualified by being followed by the letter r ; as in care, fare, pare. The diphthong ai, followed by r, has precisely the same sound, as in fair, pair ; so also, in some cases, has tiie diphthong ea, as in bear, pear. This sound of the letter a is the same as that of the letter e in heir, there, where. There is obviously a difference between the sound of a in these words, as they are pronounced by good speakers, and its sound in pain and fate. There is the same differ- ence between the sound of a in the word pair, and its sound in the word jiayer, one who pays ; also in tlie word prayer, a petition, and in the word prayer, one who prays. 12. Thefflh sound of a, marked thus h, is an intermediate sound of this letter, between its short sound, as in fat, man, and its Italian sound, as in far, /ad), wan (won), what (whut) ; also, scallop (scollop), chaps (chops). E. 13. The letter e has, in several words, the same sound as a in fare ; as in heir, there, where ; but were is properly pronounced Wr. In clerk and sergeant, it has, according to all the English orthoepists, the sound of a in dark and margin ; yet in this countrj- it is not imcommon to pronounce these words, more in accordance with their orthography, cliirk and strgeant. 14. When e precedes I or n in an unaccented final syllable, in some words it has an indistinct .* hort sound, and in some it is entire!)' sup> pressed. In most of the words ending in el, the e is sounded ; as, flannel, travel, vessel, &c. The following words are exceptions, and in these the sound of e before / is suppressed : drivel, grovel, hazel, mantel, navel, ousel, ravel, rivel, shekel, shovel, shrivel, snivel, weasel. In most of the words ending in en, the sound of e is suppressed ; as, harden, heaven, often, &c. The following words are exceptions : abdomen, acumen, aspen, bitumen, catechumen, cerumen, chicken, flamen, hymen, hyphen, kitchen, latten, legumen, linen, marten, mit- ten, mynchen, omen, patten, platen, pollen, regimen, siren, sloven, specimen, sudden, ticken, woollen, women. 15. The sound of the letter e is generally suppressed in the pret- erites of verbs, and in participles in ed, when the e is not preceded by d or t ; as, feared, praised, admired, tossed, suppressed, pronounced feard, praisd, admird, tost, supjrrest. But adjectives ending m ed, unless they are participles as well as adjectives, commonly preserve the sound of e before d, as in naked^ ragged, striped, wicked, wretched, &c. In the following words, beloved, blessed, cursed, learned, picked, and winged, the sound e before d is suppressed when the words are used as verbs or participles, and it is sounded when they are used as adjec- tives ; as, lie was much beloved ; he blessed the occasion ; he cursed the day ; he learned to read ; he picked his men ; he winged his flight : — A belov'ed son ; a bless! ed day ; a cursfed thing ; a learnfed man ; a picked point ; a wing'ed fowl. — Picked, however, used as a participial adjective, in the sense of selected, as ** picked men," is pro- nounced in one syllable. T. 16. The long sound of the letter i is heard not only in monosylla- bles ending with a mute e, as in file, time, &c., but also in the word pijit, and in the words child, mild, wild ; also in bind, blind, find, hind, kind, mind, rind, &c. 17. There is a class of words, mostly derived from the French and Italian languages, in which i retains the sound of long e ; as amber- gris, antique, unique, bombazine, Brazil, capivi, capuchin, caprice, chagrin, chevaux-de-frise, critiqtte,frize, gabardine, haberdine, quar- antine, ravine, routine, fascine, fatitfue, intrigue, invalid, machine, magazine, marine, palanquin, piqtie, police, recitaiire, talxmrine, tambourine, tontine, transmarine, ultramarine, verdigris. In th« word shire, i commonly has the same sound ; and some orthoepists also give it the same in oblige and oblique. 18. In words which terminate in He and ine^ with the accent on the penultimate syllable, the « in the final syllable is generally short ; as, fertile, hostile, adamantine, intestine, &c. The following are ex- ceptions : edile, exile, gentile, pentile, feline, ferine^ confine, and a few others. Also when the accent is on the antepenult, words ending in He generally have the i short ; a», juvenile, puerile, &c. ; but it is long in camomile, reconcile, eolipile. 19. With respect to words ending in ine, and hanng the accent on the antepenultimate, there is much 'mcertainty as to the quantity ol XIV PRINCIPLES OF PRONUNCIATION. the i ; and, in relation to a number of such words, there is much dis- agreement among orthoepists ; yet the general rule inclines to the long sound of i in the termination of this class of words. In the following words, t, in the last syllable, is generally pronounced long : adulterine, almandine, arinentine, asinine, hdluine, bizantine, brig- antine,cannabine, celandine, colubrine, columbine, concubine, counter- mine, crystalline, legatine, leonine, metalline, muscadine, porcupine, saccharine, saturnine, serpentine, turpentine, vespeiiine, vituline. — In the following words, i, in the last syllable, is short: discipline, feminine, genuine, heroine, hyaline, jessamiiie, libertine, masculine, medicine, nectarine, palatine. With respect to alkaline, aquiline, coralline, sapphirine, uterine, vij^erine, as well as some others, the orthoepists, as well as usage, are di\-ided. In the termination ine in a class of chemical words, the i is short ; bs, fluorine, iodine, nephe- line, &c. In the termination He, the i is sometimes short, as in respite, granite, favorite, infinite, &c. ; and sometimes long, as in expedite, appetite, satellite, 8:c. Li a class of gentile nouns, and appellatives formed from proper names, it is long ; as, Hivite,Wicliffite ; also, generally, in names of minerals ; as, augite, steatite, tremolite. In verbs which end in ise, the i is long ; as, advertise, exercise, &c. ; but dicertise, franchise, mortise, practise, and their compounds, are exceptions -, also, promise. 20. When i ends an initial syllable Avithout the accent, and the succeeding syllable begins with a consonant, the i is generally short or indistinct, as if written e ; as in civility, divine, f nance : but the exceptions to this rule are numerous, among Avhich are biquadrate, chirography, biography, divaricate, librarian, primeval, tribunal, vitality, and many others, in which the i is pronounced long. There is also a considerable number of words with regard to which there is a diversity, in relation to the pronunciation of the i, among orthoe- pists and in usage ; as, dilate, diverge, virago, &c. o. 21. There is a class of monosyllables ending in f, ft, ss, st, and tJi, in which o is marked with the short sound in most pronouncing dic- tionaries, though some orthoepists give it the sound of broad a, as in fall. Mr. Nares gives the sound of broad a to o in the following words (as some other orthoepists do in a part of them) : ofl", often, offer, coffee, scoff, aloft, loft, soft, cross, loss, toss, cost, frost, lost, tost, broth, cloth, froth, cough, and trough. To these some others might, with equal propriety, be added ; as, offspring, dross, gloss, moss, moth, wroth. Mr. Smart remarks, " that before ss, st, and th, the letter o is frequently sounded aw ; as in rnoss, gloss, &c., lost, cost, &c., broth, cloth, &c. This practice is analogous to the broad utterance which the letter a [short] is liable to receive before certain consonants [see A, No. 1 2 J ; and the same remarks will apply in the present case, as to the one referred to, namelj', that, though the broad sound is vulgar, there is an affectation in a palpable effort to avoid it in words where its use seems at one time to have been gen- eral. In such cases, a medium between the extremes is the practice nf the best speakers." The sound of o is somewhat prolonged also in gone and begone, and in some words ending in ng ; as, long, along, prong, song, strong, thong, throng, wrong. There are a few words in which o has the mark of the long sound In all the pronouncing dictionaries, although it is in these words, by many, if not by most speakers in this country, somewhat shortened. Thus, Ave hear the sound o, in the words coat, home, hope, spoke, stone, whole, wholly, and wholesome, pronounced with a sound a little shorter than its proper long sound, as heard in goat, note, dome, hole, sole, holy, and dolesome. 22. There are some words in which o has the same sound as u in btdl, or 00 in good ; namely, bosom, wolf, woman, Wolsey, Wolrey- hampton. It has the sound of short u in done, son, &c. ; and tlse sound of u as in hurt in word, work, worth, &c. 23. In many words ending in on, the sound of o is suppressed, as in bacon, pardon, weapon, reason, cotton, &c. U. 24. U, at the beginning of words, when long, has the sound yu, as in use. — With respect to the manner of designating the sound of the vowel u when it comes immediately after the accent, as in the words educate, nature, natural, &c., there is much diversity among ortho- epists. By Walker, the pronunciation of Educate is thus noted — ed'Ja-kut ; by Sheridan, Jones, Enfield, Fulton, and Jameson, thus — ed'u-kut ; and by Perry, Knowles, Smart, and Reid, thus — ed'u-kdt. Nature, by Walker, thus — na'chur ; by Sheridan and Jones, thus — na'chur ; by Pen-y, Enfield, and Reid, thus — nu'tur ; by Jameson and Knowles, thus — nCd'yilr ; by Smart, thus — na'ttir or na'cli'or. Natural, by Walker and Jones, thus — nut'chu-ral ; by Shei-idan, thus — 7idt' chur-al ; by Fulton, Enfield, and Jameson, thus — ndi'u- ral ; by Perry and Reid, thus — ndt'u-ral ; by Knowles, thus — ndt'yur-dl ; by Smart, thus — ndt'cho-rul. There is a pretty large class of words with respect to which there is a similar diversity in the manner in which the pronunciation of u and tu is noted by the different orthocpisli; but the difference is greater in appearance than in reality. The u thus situated may ])roperly be regarded as having the slight sound of long u ; and the sound may be noted by yu, slightly articulated. -— Walker remarks, with respect to the pronunciation of nature, " There is a vulgar pronunciation of this word as if written na'ter, AVhich cannot be too carefully avoided. Some critics have contended that it ought to be pronounced as if written nate-yure ; but this p.ronunciation comes so near to that here adopted Ind'chur'], as scarcely to be distinguishable from it." When u is preceded by r in the same syllable, it has the sound of 00 in fool, and it is thus marked, as in rule, trite. This sound is given to u thus situated, by Walker, Smart, and all the other priiicijwl English orthoepists. Smart also gives nearly the same sound to 7i when preceded, in the same syllable, by I or J, as in lute, ablution, conclude, June, jury, &c. He remarks, " To say tide, lu'cid, lu'natic, Avith the u as jjerfect as in cube, cu'bic, is northern, or laboriously pedantic in effect; and the practice of good society is Voot, Voffcid, I'oo'natic, &c., avoiding, at the same time, the vulgar extreme of loot, lo&cid, U&natic," &c. He uses the apostrophe ( ' ) here to denote " a slight semi-consonant sound betAveen e and y consonant, heard in the tran- sition from the consonant to the voAvel sound." — But it may be re- marked that all the other principal English orthoe])ists give the sound of long u in words in wliich u is preceded by I and j, as lute, lu'cid, Jury, &c. The difference betAveen the sound of u, in these cases, as indicated by Smart, and that of the other English orthoepists, is not very considerable ; and it would scarcely be distinguished in common speech. In busy and business, u has the somid of short i ; and in bury, the sound of short e. Y. 25. F, at the end of a Avord, preceded by a consonant, is commonly pronounced short and indistinct, like indistinct e ; as, jjolicy, palpably, lately, colony, &c. The exceptions are monosyllables ; as, by, cry, dry, fly, fry, sty, ply, try, wi-y, AvitJi their compounds, awry, hereby, whereby, &c. : also, verbs ending in fy ; as, fortify, magnify, testify, &c. : also, ally, apply, comply, imply, supply, multijjly, reply, occujjy, and prophesy ; in all Avhich it has the long sound. SOUNDS OF THE DIPHTHONGS AND TttlPHTHONGS. XV SOUNDS OF THE DIPHTHONGS AND TRIPHTHONGS. 26. A diphthong is the union of two vowels, jjronouncetl by a single impulse of the voice ; as, oi m voice, ou in sound. 27. A triphthong is the union of three vowels, pronounced by a Hiugle impulse of the voice ; as, ieu in adieu, iew in view. 28. A proper diphthong is one in whiclx both vowels are sounded ; as, oi in voice, ou in sound, ow in now. ea in ocean; eu " feud ; ew " jewel; ia " poniard ; ie " spaniel ; PROPER DIPIITUONGS. io in nation; oi " voice ; ou " sound; ow" now; oy " boy ; ua tn assuage; ue " desuetude ; ui " languid ; uo " quote. The diphthongs which begin with e, i, or w, namely, ea, eu, ew, ia, ie, io, ua, ue, ui, and ito, differ from the rest ; and they may, as Walker says, " not improperly be called semi-consonant diphthongs ; " being pronounced as if i/ consonant was substituted in place of e or i ; as, ocean (ose'yan), poniard (pon'yard), question (quest'yon) ; and as if to consonant were substituted in place of u ; as, assuage (as-swage'), languid (lan'gwid), &c. 20. An improper diphthong has only one of the vowels sounded; as, ea in heat, oa in coal. IMPROPER DIPHTHONGS- 8B or ae in Ca?sar; ea in beat; ie in friend; ai " pain; ee " seed; oa " boat; ao " gaol; ei " either; oe " oesophagus; au " haul; eo " people; oo " soon; aw " law; ey " they; ow " crow, ay " bay; M. 30. This is a Latin diphthong, and is always pronounced like e in Latin. In English, it is used only in words of Latin origin or for- mation ; as, aqua-vitce, minutice, oisthetics ; and it is commonly long, as in pcean, but sometimes short, as in Dcedalus. AI. 31. The usual sound of this diphthong is the same as long a ; as in pail, pain, pronounced like pale, pane. ITie foUowng are the l)rincipal exceptions. It has the sound of short e in said and saith, and in again and against ,- that of short a in jylaid and raillery ; that of long i in aisle ; and, in a final unaccented syllable, it has the oliscure soimd of the indistinct short i, as in fountain, mountain, curtain, &c. AO. 32. This diphthong occurs only in the word gaol, pronounced, as well as very often written, ^'ai7. AU. 33. The common sound of this diphthong is the same as that of broad a, or ate, — caul and haid being jjronounced exactly like call and hall. But when these letters are followed by 7t and another con- sonant, the sound is changed, in a number of words, to that of the Itahan a in far and farther ; as, by most of the orthoepists, in the following words : aunt, craunch, daunt, flaunt, gaunt, gauntlet, haunch, haunt, jaunt, jaundice, laugh, launch, laundress, laundrg, maund, paunch, saunter, staunch. Some orthoejnsts pronounce a ])art of these words with the sound of broad a, as most of them do the word vaunt, and many of them, the word taunt. In the word draught, tliis diphthong has, according to some orthoepists, the soimd of a in far, and according to some, the short sound of a in fat ; in gavge^ the sound of long a (as in page) ; m hautboy, the sound of long o ; and in cauliflower, laudununt, and laurel, it w, l)y Home ortluH-pixUt, pronounced with the sound of sliort o, and by others willi the souiui of broad a ; as, col'ijiower or a'luUiJiower, &c. AW. 34. Tliis diphthong has the sound of broad a, — bawl and ball being pronounced exactly alike. AY. 35. This diphthong has the soimd of long a, as in pay, hay, kv. ; except in quay, which is jjronounced kc. It has the sound of short e in says ; and in Sunday, Monday, &c., the last s) liable is pronounced as if written Sunda, Monda, or Sundy, Mondy, &c EA. 36. The regular sound of this diphthong is that of long e, as in beat, hear, pronounced like beet, Jiere ; but there are many words in which it has the sound of short e ; as, head, dead, ready, &c. In some words it has the sound of short and obtuse e, as in earn, Iteard, pearl, &c. In a few words it has the sound of long a ; as in break, steak, gi'eat, bear, bearer, forbear, forswear , pear, swear, tear, wear. In some words it has the sound of a in far ,• as in heart, heaiien, hearty, fiearth, hearken ; and, when unaccented, it has only an obfcure sound, as in vengeance, sergeant. The proper diphthong ea is found in a ver)* few words ; as, ocean, cetacean, testacean. EAU. 37. This triphthong is used only in words derived from the French. In beauty it has the sound of long u ,- but its regular sound is that of long 0, as in beau, bureau, Jlambeau, &c. EE. 38. This diphthong is almost always j)ronounced liktf long e ; the principal excei)tions are been and breeches, pronounced bJn and britches. The poetical contractions e'er and ne'er, for ever and never, are pro- nounced as if written air and nair. EI. 39. This diphthong has most commonly the sound either of long a or of long e. It has the sound of long a, as in deign, eight, f ■ feint, freight, fieinous, inveigh, neigh, neighbor, reindeer, a/.-k;. veil, vein, weigh, weight, heir, their, &c. It has the sound of long e in ceil, ceiling, conceit, conceive, deceit, deceive, mceigle, jterceire, receipt, receive, seize, seizin, seignior, seigniory, seine ; commciiil) also in either, neither, and leisure. It has the sound of long i m height, Iteighten, and sleight ; of short e in heifer and nonjMtreil ; and, in an unaccented sj liable, an indistinct sound of i, as in foreign, foreigner, forfeit, forfeiture, sovereign, sovereignty, surfeit EO. 40. This diphthong is pronmmocd like long o in yeoman and yeo- manry, and like long c in people ; like short e in jeopard, jeojnirdy, leopard, feoffee, feoffer, feoffment ; like broad o (as in nor) in yeorgic ; like long u in fcod,fendal, frodury (which are now commonly writ- ten feud, feudal, and feudary) ; and, when Mnaccentrd, it has the indistinct soimd of m, or o, as in bludgeon, curmudgeon, dudgcttn, dungeon, gudgeon, habergeon, luncheon, puncheon, tniHchcnn, .wrgeon, sturgeon, a<-utcheon, escutcheon, and the imlislinct sound of i or o, as in pigeon, widgeon. XVI PRINCIPLES OF PRONUNCIATION. EU. 41. This dij)h thong is always sounded like long m, as in feud, deuce. EW. 42. This diphthong is almost always sounded like long m, or exi, as in few, hew, new ; but if r precedes it, it takes the sound of oo, or of u in itde, as in brew, crew, drew. In the words shew and strew (written also show and strow), this diphthong has the sound of long 0, as it also has in the verb to sew, and commonly also in the word sewer, a drain. EY. 43. Tills dii)h thong has the sound of long a, as in hey, dey, grey, hey, prey, they, whey, convey, obey, purvey, survey, eyre, eyry. In key and ley, it has the sound of long e ; and, when unaccented, it has the slight sound of e, as in galley, valley, &c. lA. 44. This dijjhthong, in the terminations ial, ian, and iard, often forms but one syllable, the i being sounded like consonant y ; as. Christian, filial, poniard, pronounced as if written Christ' y an, fil'yal, pan' yard. In some words it has the obscure sound of indistinct short 1, as in carriage, marriage, parliament. IE, 10, lEU, lEW. 45. The regular sound of the di])h thong ie is that of long e, as in chief, fief, field, fiend, grenadier, grief, grieve, lief, liege, mien, thief, &c. It has the sound of long i in die, hie, lie, pie, vie, &c. ; and the sound of short e in friend. — The diphthong io occurs in many words in the termination ion. When i, in this termination, is preceded by a liquid, ion is pronounced like yun, as miWion, minion. The termi- nations sion and tion are ])ronounced like shu7i, as \ersion, nation ; but when the t is preceded by s or x, ton is pronounced yun, as questiow, mixtjon. The triphthong ieu is found only in a few words, which are derived from the French, as adieu, lieu, purlieu ; and it has the sound of long u. — The triphthong iew occurs only in view and interview. OA. 46. The regular sound of this diphthong is that of long o, as in boat, coat, coal, foal, loaf, moat, &c. ; but in broad, abroad, and groat, it has the sound of broad a. CE. 47. This dijjhthong is derived fi-om the Latin ; and it is retained in but very few words used in English. It is found in assafcetida, where it is pronounced like short e; and in oedema, oesophagus, anloeci, also in foetus (often written /dw*), in which it has the sound of long e. CEU. 48. This triphthong is foimd only in the word manoeuvre, and it has the sound of oo in moon, or of m in nde. 01, OY. 49. The sound of these diphthongs is the same ; and it is noted in this Dictionarj-, as it is in that of Walker and in various other i)ro- nouncing dictionaries, by the combined sound of broad o (as ui nor) and short i or y, as boil, boy. do. 50. The regular sound of this dij)hthong is heard in moon, food, stoop ; and it is the same as that of single o in move, prove. 51. This diphthong has a shorter sound (the same as the sound of u in bidl, or of single o in wolf) in the words ending in oolc, as book, brook, cook, crook, fiook, look, rook, stook, took ; also in foot, good, kood, stood, wood, wool, and their compounds. Walker says, that "foot, good, hood, stood, understood, withstood, wood, and wool, are the oidy words Avhere this diphthong has this middle sound.'' But the rest of the words above enumerated are pronounced with the same sound of this diphthong by other orthoepists, as they are also in common usage. Smart says that the pronunciation assigned by Walker to book (book) " is a decided prorinciaUsm." 52. This diphthong has the sound of long o in door, floor, and brooch ; and of short u in blood and flood. ou. 53. This is the most irregular diphthong in the language. Its most common or regular sound is that in which both letters are heard, as in bound, sound, cloud, loud, our, shout, south, &c. 54. This diphthong has the sound of short u in country, cousin, couple, accouple, double, trouble, southern, cotirage, encourage, flotirish, nourish, nourishment, enough, chough, rough, tough, touch, touchy, young, youngster, &c. It has the sound of o in move, or oo in moon, in accoidre, aggroup, group, croup, bouge, amour, paramour, bouse, bousy, capouch, cartouch, rouge, soup, surtout, tour, contour, detour, tourney, tournament, through, uncotdh, yoti, your, youth, and also in various other words derived from the French. It has the sound of long in court, accourt, courtier, course, concourse, recourse, dis- course, source, resource, fotir, fourth, pour, though, although, dough, mould, moult, mourn, shoidder, smoulder, poult, poultice, poidtry, soul. It has the sound of broad a, as in ball, or o, as in 7ior, in bought, brought, fought, ought, nought, sought, besought, thought, wrought. It has the sound of m in bull, or of oo in good, in could, should, would. It has the sound of short o in hough ; also (or, according to some orthoepists, of broad a), in cough and trough, rhyming with ofi^ and scofl". ow. 55. The regular sound of this diphthong, the same as the regular sound of ou, is heard in how, now, down, town, tower, &c. It has the sound of long o in below, bestow, blow, crow, flow, flown, grow, grovm, growth, glow, know, known, owe, own, owner, show, snotc, sown, strow, throw, thrown ; also in the following words, in some of their senses, bow, low, lower, mow, shower, sow. 56. When this diphthong forms an unaccented syllable, it has the slight sound of long o, as in borrow, follow, follower, UA. 57. When both of the letters of this diphthong are sounded, they have the power of wa, as in equal, language, persuade, suavity. In some words the u is silent, as in guard, guardian, gua^'antee, piquant ; and in victuals and victtialling, both the lettei's are silent. UE. 58. When these letters are united in a diphthong, and are both soimded, they have the power of we, as in consuetude, desuetude, mansuetude, conquest. In some words the « is silent, as in guerdon, guess, guest. When this di])hthong is final, the e is in many words silent, as in due, hue, pursue, value, &c. ; and in some words both letters are silent, as in league, fatigue, harangue, tongue, plague, vague, fugue, brogue, antique, oblique, decalogue, demagogue, dia- logue, &c. — In the termination ague, the o is short when preceded by g or I ; as demagogue, dialogue ; excejjt collogue : but when any other consonant precedes o, it is long ; as, brogue, rogue, vogue, prorogue. UI. 59. These letters, when they are united in a diphthong, and both are sounded, have the ])ower of wi, as in anguish, languid, van- quish. In some words the u is silent, as in guide^ guile, build, guinea ; and in others the i is silent, as in jtdce, pursuit, fruit, &c. SOUNDS OF THE CONSONANTS. xvii SOUNDS OF THE CONSONANTa eO. The consonants are divided into mutes and semi-vowds. The mutes cannot be sounded at all without the aid of a vowel. They are b, d, k, p, t, and c and ^r hard. 61. The semi-vowels have an imperfect sound of themselves. They are/, I, m, n, r, s, v, x, z, and c and g soft. 62. The four semi-vowels, I, m, n, and r, are also called liquids, because they readily unite with other consonants, flowing, as it were, into their sounds. 63. The following consonants are styled dentals, namely, d,J, s, t, z, and g soft, being pronounced chiefly by the aid of the teeth ; d, g, j, k, I, n, and q are called palatals, from the use made of the palate in pronouncing them ; b, p, f, v, and m are called labials, being pro- nounced chiefly by the lips ; m, n, and the digraph ng, are called nasals, being sounded through the nose ; and k, q, and c and g hard, are called gutturals, being sounded by the throat. B. 64. B, preceded by m in the same syllable, is generally silent ; as, larnb, limb, comb, dumb, &c. ; but succumb is an exception. It is silent also before t in the same syllable, as in debt, doubt, redoubt, &c. C. 65. This letter is hard, and sounds like k, before a, o, and « : and it is soft, and sounds like s, before e, i, and y ; except in sceptic and scirrhus and their derivatives, in which it is hard, like k. — In the words indict, indicter, indictable, and indictm,ent, c is silent. 68. When c comes after the accent, and is followed by ea, ia, to, or eous, it takes, like s and t, under the same circumstances, the sound of sh ; as, ocean, social, tenacious, cetaceous. In the words discern, sacrifice, and suffice, and in several words derived from them, and also in the word sice, c has the sound of z. CH. 67. The regular English sound of this digraph is the same as that of tch, or tsh ; as in c//air, child, rich, church. In words from the French, the digraph ch has the sound of sh, as in chaise, cha- grin. When it follows I or n, as in belch, bench, Walker and Jame- son designate its sound by sh ; but Sheridan, Perry, Jones, Smart, &c., give it the same sound as it has in rich. 63. In words derived from the ancient languages, ch is generally hard like A; ; as in alchemy, anarch, anarchy, anchor, anchoret, cachexy, catechism, chalcography, chalybeate, chameleon, chamomile, chaos, character, chasm, chdy, chemistry, chimera, chirography, chiromancy, choler, chord, chorography, chorus, chyle, chyme, coch- leary, conch, distich, echinus, echo, epoch, eunuch, hemistich, hie- rarch, hierarchy, machinal, machination, mechanic, mechanism, mon- arch, monarchical, orchestra, orchestre, pentateuch, scheme, schesis, scholar, school, stomach, stomachic, &c. The exceptions are charity, chart, and charter. Ch is hard in all words in which it is followed by i or r ; as, chlorosis. Christian, &c, 69. When arch, signifjing chief, begins a word fit)m the Greek language, and is followed by a vowel, it is pronounced ark ; as in archangd, architect, archive, archipelago, archetype, archiepiscopal, archidiaconal, architrave, archaism, archaeology ; but when arch is prefixed to an English word, it is pronounced so as to rh)-me with march; as, archbishop, archduke, arch-fiend. In drachm, schism, and yacht, ch is silent D. 70. The termination ed, assumed by the preterite and partici|)le, m some words takes the sound of d, added to the preceding syllable ; as, healed, sealed, pronounced heald, seald ; and in some it takes the sound of t, added in the same manner ; as, distressed, mixed, pro- nounced distrest, mixt. Some words, which, when used as participles, are pronounced in one syllable, are, when used as adjectives, pro- nounced in two ; as, learned, blessed, winged. (See No. 16.) P. 71. This letter has always the same soimd, except in the preposi- tion of, in which it has the somid of v. G. 72. O, like c, has two sounds, one hard, and the other soft. It is hard before a, o, and u. The only exception is gaol, which is com- monly written, as well as pronounced, j'ai'Z. O followed by n at the beginning of a word is silent ; as, gnarl, gnash, gnat, gnaw, gnomon, gnomomcs. It is also silent when followed by n at the end of a word ; as, arraign, assign, benign, campaign, champaign, condign, deign, design, ensign, eipugn, feign, foreign, impregn, impugn, malign, oppugn, reign, resign^ sovereign. 73. O before e, i, and y, is sometimes hard and sometimes soft. It is generally soft before words derived from the Greek, Latin, and French, and hard before words fit)m the Saxon ; and these last, being much the smaller number of the words of this sort, may be regarded as exceptions. 74. It is hard before e in gear, geek, geese, gdd, gdding, gelt, get, gewgaw, shagged, snagged, cragged, ragged, scragged, dogged, rug- ged, dagger, stagger, swagger, trigger, dogger,' pettifogger, tiger, anger, eager, auger, finger, linger, conger, longer, stronger, younger, longest, strongest, youngest ; before t, in gibber, gibberish, gibbous, gibcat, giddy, gift, gig, giggle, giggler, gild, gill, gimlet, gimp, gird, girdle, girl, girt, girth, gizzard, begin, give, forgive, biggin, piggin, noggin, druggist, waggish, hoggish, sluggish, rigging, digging, &c. ; before y in boggy, cloggy, craggy, foggy, dreggy, jaggy, knaggy, i^^ggy^ q»a99y> ^(^^ggy^ shaggy, snaggy, swaggy, tviggy. 75. The g in longer (the comparative of long), stronger, younger, longest, strongest, and youngest must articulate the e; and these words are pronounced as if written with gg. Thus longer, the com- parative of long, is pronounced long'ger ; and longer, one who Imigs, long'er. — For some remarks on the sound of ^ as connected with n, see No. 82. GH. 76. In this digraph, at the beginning of a word, the * is silent, as in ghost, ghastly, gherkin ; in burgh, h is silent at the end of the word ; at the end of words, both letters are commonly silent, as in high, nigh, sigh, thigh, neigh, ^reigh, inveigh, sleigh, bongh, dough, though, although, plough, furlough, through, thorough, borough. In some words this digraph has the sound of/, as in enough, rough, tough, trough, cough, chough, laugh, laughter ; in some, the sound of k, as in hough, shough, lough. In dough and slough it is sometimes silent, and sometimes has the sound of/. This combination of letters, ough, at the end of trords, has no less XVIU PRINCIPLES OF PRONUNCIATION. than seven different sounds, which are exhibited in the following lines, extracted from Notes and Queries, Vol. IV. : — " 'Tis not an easy task to slww How ough sound ; since, though An Irish lough and Englisli slough. And cough and hiccough, all allow. Differ as mucli as tough and through. There seenis no reason why they do." GIIT. 77. In this termination, the letters gh are always silent ; aiS,Jigld, right, height, &c. ; except in draught, which is pronounced, and in some of its senses usually written, draft. H. 78 This letter is a note of aspiration, and it is silent at the begin- ning of a number of words ; as, heir, heiress, honor, honesty, honor- able, hostler, hour, &c. In hospital, humble, humor, humorous, humor some, herb, ha-bage, &c., according to some orthoepists, it is silent, and according to others, it is sounded. It is always sUent after r ; as in rheum, rhetoric, rhapsody, &c. J, K. 79. J has the same sound as soft g. K has the same soimd as c liard ; and it is always silent before n ; as in knee, kneel, know, &c. 80. L is silent in many words ; as in calf, half, chalk, talk, balm, calm, would, could, should, &c. M. 81. M always presen'es its sound, except in accompt, accomptant, and comptroller, pronounced, and also more commonly written, ac- count, accountant, and controller. N. 82. iVhas two sounds, one simple and pure, as in man, not; the other compound and mixed, or nasal, called also by Walker its " ring- ing sound ; " which is heard in king, angle, thank, concord, banquet, anxious. This sound is given to n in many words, when this letter precedes k, c or g hard, qu, or x. It is accurately expressed as it is written, when g follows n at the end of a word, as king, hang ; but in other cases the sound of g is interposed between the n and the succeeding letter ; as, angle (ang'gle), thank (thangk), concord (cong'- cord), banquet (bang'quet). In many words in which a syllable ending with g hard is followed by another syllable, the sound of ^ is given to the two syllables ; as, stronger (strong'ger), (see No. 75), anger (ang'ger), finger (fing'ger). But in bringei; hanger, ringer, singer, slinger, springer, and stringer, g is sounded only in the first syllable. The following is a Ust of most of the principal words in which, according to the best English orthoepists, the letter n has this mixed or ringing sound: anchor, anger, angle, anguish, angular, ankle, anxious, bank, banquet, blank, blanket, brink, bungle, cancrine, canker, clangor, concord, concourse, conger, congress, crank, clank, clink, dangle, dank, drunk, English,finger, flank, function, fungous, gangrene, gingle, hank, hanker, hunger, ink, jangle, jingle, language, languish, languor, lank, linger, link, mangle, mingle, miyik, monger, mongrel, monkey, pink, rancor, rank, rankle, sanguine, shingle, single, singular, sink, sprinkle, sunk, tangle, tank, thank, think, uncle, unguent, vanquish, wink, wrinkle, Yankee, zinc. It may be hardly necessary to respell most of the words of this class in order to give their prrnunciation, as, in their common orthog- raphy, they are naturally pronounced correctly, with the appropriate sound of the g. 83. iV^ is mute when it ends a syllable and is preceded by Z or ?w ; as in kiln, hymn, limn, column, autumn, solemn, condemn, contemn, &c. P. 84. P is silent before s and t at the beginning of words ; as in psalm, psalter, ptisan. PH. 85. This digraph genwally has the sound of/, as in physic, philosojjhy, &c. In nephew (according to all the principal English orthoepists) and in Stephen, it has the sound of v ; and in triphthong, naphtha, &c., the h is silent. Q. 86. Q is always followed by u, and the digraph qu has commonly the sound of kw, as in queen, quill, quart ; but, in many words, mostly derived from the French, it has the sound of k, as in coquet, etiquette, masqua-ade, mosque, liquor, &c. R. 87. The letter r has a jarring or trilling effect on the tongue, and is never silent. It has a peculiai- influence both on the long and on the short sound of the vowels. It has the effect, under certain cir- cumstances, to change the short sound of a, as in man, into its Italian sound, as in far, and the short sound of o, as in not, into its broad sound, like broad a, as in rior ; and it has a corresponding effect on the short sound of the other vowels. (See page x.) When r is pre- ceded by a long vowel, it has sometimes the effect of blending the syllables. Thus the monosyllables hire, lore, more, roar, sore, and flour are pronounced precisely like the dissyllables higher, lower, mower, rower, sowei; and flower. These latter words, and also bower, cower, dower, power, toicer, and some others, are regarded as dissyl- lables in prose, but are all commonly pronounced as monosjjlables in poetry. 88. There is a difference of opinion among orthoepists respecting the letter r. Johnson says that " it has one constant sound in Eng- lish " ; and the same view of it is taken by Kenrick, Sheridan, Perrj-, Jones, Jameson, and Knowles. Walker, on the contrary, says, " There is a distinction in the sound of this letter scarcely ever noticed by any of our writers on the subject, which is, in my opinion, of no small importance ; and that is the rough and the smooth r." The following is the ^iew given by Smart : " i? is a decided consonant when it begins a syllable with or without another consonant, as in ray, pray ; and also when it ends a syllable, if it should be so cir- cumstanced that, ending one, it also begins the next, as in arid, tarry, peril, berry, spirit, florid, hurry. Here the r has the same effect on the pre%ious Towel that any other consonant would have ; that is to say, it stops, or renders the vowel essentially short. But, under other circumstances, final r is not a decided consonant ; and there- fore the syDables ar, er, ir, or, ur are not coincident, as to the vowel sound in each, ■with at, et, it, ot, ut; neither do the vowel sounds in fare, mere, ire, ore, ure, poor, our, quite identify- with those in fate, mete, ide, ode, cube, pool, owl." 89. The rtgular or genuine sound of s is its sharp, sibilant, or hissing sound, like c soft, as in son, this. It has also a flat or soft sound (called V)y some its vocal sound), the same as that of the letter z, as in tcise, his. 90. S has always its sharp, hissing sound at the beginning of words, as son, safe ; also at the end of words when they terminate in as, except the words as, has, was, whereas, and the plural of nouns ending in ea, as sea?, pleas ; in all words ending in ss, as less, express ; in all words ending in is, except the monosyllables is and his ; in all words ending in us, and ous, as genius, famous ; in all words, Mhen it is preceded, in the same syllable, by either of the mutes k, p, t, or by f, as locks, hats, caps, muffs. In the prefix Dis, s, in some cases, has its flat, soft, or vocal soimd. (?f most of these words, there is a considerable diversity, yet it is doubt- Jess true that the pronunciation intended to be ex^jressed differs, in reality, much less than it would seem to do ; and that, in numerous instances, these orthoepists agreed much l)etter in their practice than in their mode of indicating it. 141. There is an obnous difference in the quantity and in the stress of voice with which the last syllable of the words deliberate and moderate are pronoimced, when verbs and when adjectives. All these orthoepists mark the a long in the last syllable of these words when used as verbs ; Jameson and Smart also mark it long when they are adjectives ; Walker shortens the a in the adjective moder- ate ; Sheridan changes the a in both of the words, when adjectives, into short e. But there seems to be no advantage in changing the letter in such cases. It is but sb'ghtly pronounced, and has not the distinct sound of either short c, or short or long a ; and, with respect to most of the instances in which the vowels in this Dictionary have a dot placed under them, they are so slightly pronounced, that to mark them with a distinct sound, either long or short, would tend rather to mislead than to assist in pronouncing them. If the syllables on which the primary and secondary accents fall, are correctly pro- nounced, the comparatively indistinct syllables will naturally be pro- nounced right. 142. With respect to words variously pronounced, Walker says, " The only method of knowmg the extent of custom, in these cases, seems to be an inspection of those dictionaries which professedly treat of pronunciation. We have now so many works of this kind, that the general current of custom, with respect to the sound of words, may be collected from them with almost as much certainty as the general sense of words from Johnson. An exhibition of the opinions of orthoej)ists about the sovmd of words always apjjeared to me a very rational method of determining what is called custom. This method I have adopted." The method thus countenanced by Wulker has been carried out in this Dictionary much more thoroughly than he had the means of doing it, inasmuch as the greater part of Jones, a-bll'y-ly fiVer-cdzh de-llb'er-ate de-llb'er-et ed'u-kate fe'tshure im-i)C'tsh'u-iis In'ter-est in'ter-est In'ty-mate In'ty-met mod'der-ate mod'der-et nat'tshu-riil na'tshur 6-be'dy-ent ver'tshu-iis Jmrneson, a-bll'c-te fiv'er-aje de-llb'er-ate de-llb'er-ate ed'u-kate fete'ycr Im-pct'ii-us In'ter-est In'ter-est In'te-mate In'te-mate mod'der-ate mod'der-ate nat'u-ral nate'yur o-be'de-ent vir'tu-iis a-hil'lt-e iix'er-lj de-llb'er-it' de-Ub'er-it' t'd'u-kat' fet'yur Im-pct'u-iis In'ter-est In'ter-est In'Um-aif In'tlm-ct mod' C'T-aif mod'er-et nat'yur-al nat'yur o-l)ed'yent vCVtu-us ft-birs-ti &v'er-i|e d^Wir-ite dc-llt/er-ate ed'u-kate fct'cfa'oor Iro-pef u-ua In'tere* in'tei^«it In'tc-mit in'te-mat m(xFer-at m«Hi'er-at nat'ch'oo-ral na'ch'oor o-be'de-ent ver'ch'oo-ua the works which are made use of, as the principal authorities, have been published since his time. With respect to many of these vari- ously pronounced words, it is difficult to decide what method is to be preferred ; and it is not to l)e suj)j)osed that the mode for which the compiler has indicated a preference will, in all cases, he esteemed the best ; but when it is not, the mode which the reader may deem preferable will be found included within the brackets, and supported by its proper authority. 143. Two modes of pronouncing a word are, in many instances, given, besides the forms included within the brackets ; and alterna- tives of this sort would have been presented in other cases, if different modes had not been cited from resi)ectable authorities. The com- piler has not intended, in any case, to give his oMm sanction to a form which is not supported either by usage, the authority of ortho- ej)ists, or analogy. He has, however, in some instances, in defer- ence to the weight of authorities, given the preference to a mode, which, in the exercise of his own judgment, independent of the au- thorities, he would not have preferred ; for it would be unreaaonable for him to make a conformity to his ovni taste, or to the result of his own limited observation, a law to those who may differ from him, and )et perhaj)s agree with the more common usage. But, though it has not been his design to make innovations, or to encourage pro- vincial or American peculiarities, yet he has not always given the preference to the mode of j)ronunciation which is supported by the greatest weight of authorities citetl ; and, where orthoejiists are di\ided, he has generally been inclined to countenance that mode which is most conformable to analogy or to ortliography. 144. In giving the authorities for pronunciation in this Dictionary, neither the respclling nor the notation of the orthoepists cited has generally been cxhibitetl, as it was neces.sar>- to reduce them all to one system. Their preci.se difference is not always presented with exactness; yet the ca-ses of failure are not imjxjrtant. The different eilitions of the authors u.sed a.s authorities differ in various instances ; and it is sometimes imjxjssiblc to a.sccrtain whether the intention of the writer has not l)een frustrated by an error of the press. 145. The English authorities most frequently citetl in this volume are Sheridan, Walker, Perrj , Jones, Enfield, Fulton and Knight, Jame- XXJV PRINCIPLES OF PRONUNCIATION. son, Knowles, Smart, Reid, Craig, and Wright, all of whom are authors of Pronouncing Dictionaries. In addition to these, various other English lexicographers and orthoepists are frequently brought forward, as Bailey, Johnson, Kenrick, Ash, Barclay, Entick, Scott, Ogil^ie, Boag, Clarke, Nares, and several others, besides the distinguished American lexicographer, Dr. Webster. The edition of Webster's Dictionary made use of is that of 1841, which is the latest that was published during the life of the author. 148. The different EngUsh orthoepists, who are made use of as authorities, are entitled to very different degrees of respect. There is no one of them who has obtained a higher and more widely extended reputation than Walker; and no one appears to have bestowed longer and more patient attention in studying the analogies of the language, and in ascertaining the best usage. But there has been considerable change since his time ; and some who have suc- ceeded him have corrected some of his mistakes, and made improve^ ments on his system ; and they may, in many cases, be considered better guides as to the present usage than Walker. 147. Of the successors of Walker, Mr. Smart appears to have given the most careful and discriminating attention to the subject ; and he may therefore be regarded as the best single authority for present usage. ORTHOGRAPHY. REMARKS ON ORTHOGRAPHY. Before the invention of the art of printing, little attention was paid to the mode of spelung words either in the Anglo-Saxpn or the English language ; and the orthography of most of the words being AvhoUy unsettled, every writer, having no guide but his own ear, was at liberty to follow his own fancy or judgment. In the writings of the Anglo-Saxons and the early English authors, almost all the words are spelt in more than one way; and for a long time ^bsequent to the invention of the art of printing, the orthography of the EngHsh language remained in a very unsettled state. As an illus- tration of this unsettled state nearly a century after this invention, it may be mentioned that in the translation of the New Testament by Tyndale, who was distinguished for talents and learning, the pronoun it is spelt in no less than eight different ways, as follows : it, itt, yt, ytty hit, hitt, hyt, hytt ; and in some cases four or five of these different modes are to be found in the same chapter. The orthography of the language has been undergoing continual changes from the time of its first formation to the present day, although for a century or upwards it may be regarded as having assumed a comparatively settled form. If we look into books printed in the reign of Queen Anne, we meet with many words having an orthography different from that which is now in use. K we carrj' our observation back as far as the reign of Queen Elizabeth, we find the difference in orthography greatly increased ; and when, in our retrospective examination, we reach the age of Chaucer and Wickliffe, we find many words, which, though they are words now actually in use, are so disguised in their orthographical form, and are of so odd and uncouth an appearance, that they can hardly be recognized. The early productions of English literature which are still much read, such as the works of Bacon, Hooker, Shakespeare, and the com- mon version of the Bible, appear now in an orthography very different from that in which they were at first jjrinted. The first four verses of the thirty-second chapter of Deuteronomy, in the first edition of the common version of the Bible, printed in 1611, stand thus: "Giue eare, O yee heauens, and I will speake ; and heare, O earth, the words of my molith. My doctrine shall drop as the raine ; my speach shall distill as the deaw, as the smal raine vpon the tender herbe, and as showres vpon the grasse. Because I wil publish the Name of the Lord ; ascribe yee greatnesse vnto our God. He is the rocke, his worke is perfect : for all his wayes are ludgement • A God of trueth, and without iniquity, iust and right is he." In these few lines, which may be taken as a specimen of the whole, there are twenty-seven instances in which the words appear in an orthography different from that in which they are now printed. It is not uncommon to find the same word spelt in more ways than one on the same page, as is oft«n the case with works even of the most distinguished writers, printed in the early ages of English hterature. It is incumbent on a lexicographer, in adjusting the orthogra])hy of the language, to have regard to etymology, analogy, and the best usage of his time ; and if we examine the early English dictionaries, we shall find that the orthography is conformed to the general usage of the age in which they were published. This unsettled state of orthography has been regarded as a reproach to the language. It is an evil, however, which is unavoidable, and to which liAing languages generally are more or less subject. It has arisen from the want of d some fixed standard, not varying like usage ; but ituch a standard It is in vain to seek. Some ingenious men have attempted to introduce a uniformity, and establish an invariable standard ; but these aUempU have been attended with little success. Dr. Johnson says, in the Preface to his Dictionary, " In adjuKting the orthography, which has been to this time unsettled and fortuitoun, I found it necessary to distinguish those irregularities that are inherent in our tongue, and perhaj)s coeval with it, from others which the igno- rance or negligence of later writers has produced. Ever)- language has its anomalies, which, though inconvenient, and in themselves once unnecessar)', must be tolerated among the imperfections of human things, and which required only to he registered, that they may no* be increased, and ascertained, that they may not be confoimded ; but every language has likewise its improprieties and absurdities, which it is the duty of the lexicographer to correct and proscribe." The Dictionary of Johnson was first published in 1755, a little more than one hundred years since ; and in reference to it, Mr. Xarex, in liis "Elements of Orthoepy," published in 1784, remarks, "The EngHsh Dictionary appeared ; and, as the weight of truth and reason is irresistible, its authority has nearly fixed the external form of our language ; and from its decisions few appeals have yet lieen made.** It will be readily admitted, that no other work ever had so great an influence on the English language as this ; yet it is not possible that the work of any man, or any body of men, should so fix the external form of the language as to put a stop to further alterations. Johnson justly says, " No dictionary of a linng language ever can be jjerfect, since, while it is hastening to publication, some words are budding, and some are falhng away." And he also remarks, " ITie orthography which I recommend is still controvertible." It is undoubtedly true, that there never was so great an influx of new words into the English language during any centurj-, from the time of its first formation to the time of the first publication of Johnson's Dictionar}-, as there has been during the centurj- that has elapsed since that event. Various other changes have taken pLice in the language. Some words then obsolete have been revived, some then in use have now become obso- lete, and many have changed their orthography. In adjusting the orthography of this Dictionar)', much care has been taken ; in doing it, attention has been paid to etymologj-, analog)-, and usage ; and in cases in which good usage is dirided, etjinolog)' and analogy have been consulted in deciding disputable jwints. But no innovation has been made with respect to those cases in which usage is invariable and settled. Two of the most noted diversities, with r^ard to orthc^raphy, are found in the two classes of words ending in ic or loA-, and in or or our ; as, music, public, or musick, publick ; favor, honor, or favour, honour. Johnson, in accordance with the general, though not invari- able, usage of his age, wrote these words with the k or the m. The use of the k in the foi-mer of these two classes of words was hid aside by many writers before the time of Johnson ; and it is omitted m Martm's Dictionar)-, the first edition of which was published in 1749. Martin says, in his Preface, " In this respect [orthograph) ] our diction- aries most certainly want reformation ; for they all retain the old »Tiy of writing technical words with the redundant final k after e, as logick, rhetorick, mu*ick, &a, which later writers have justly discarded, and Cxxv) XXVI ORTHOGRAPHY. more neatly write logic, rTietoric, music, &c. ; and accordingly they here stand in that form in this Dictionary." In a review of Johnson's Dictionary given in the " Monthly Review," in 1755, the year in which the work was published, it is said, " Among these alterations [in orthography"] may be reckoned the restoration of the k to many words from which modern writers have generally banished it ; particularly in the terms of science, such as conic, elliptic, optic, sudorijic, and many more of that sort ; to all which Mr. Johnson adds a final k." — And Dr. Ash, in the Preface to his Dictionary, published in 1775, says, "The final k, after c, in words derived from the learned languages, though carefully retained by Johnson and other writers, has been omitted, in conformity with modern custom and the originals." In the class of words refei-red to, the k is still retained in the re- cent editions of Johnson's Dictionary ; also in the Dictionaries of Sheridan, Walker, Jameson, Richardson (his larger Dictionary), and some others ; but in most of the English dictionaries which have been published since the first publication of that of Johnson, it is omitted ; and Walker, although he retains it in his Dictionary, condemns the use of it, and observes, that " the omission of it is too general to be counteracted even by the authority of Johnson." The general usage is now so strongly in favor of its omission, that there is no longer any good reason for retaining it in the dictionaries. It is, however, retained in monosyllables ; as, stick, brick, lock, S:c. ; and in some dissyllables ; as, hillock, hemlock, &c. The verbs to frolic, to mimic, to physic, to traffic, and to bivouac, are written without the final k in the jiresent tense ; but on assuming another syllable, in forming the past tense and participles, the k must be used in order to keep the c hard ; as, trafficked, trafficking. The question with respect to the insertion or the omission of the letter u in such words disfavor, honor, or favour, honour, — is attended with much more difficulty. Most of the words of this class are originally from the Latin, and are regarded £is coming into the English through the French, having the termination, in that language, of eur ; as, fa- veur, honneur ; and this is the reason assigned by Johnson for retaining the u. But he is far from being consistent in applying the principle ; for, with respect to the class of words which have the termination or m Latin, and eur in French, he gives many of them with the u, and many of them without it. The following words are found in Johnson's Dictionary with the u in the last syllable : — The following words are found m Johnson's Dictionary without the u in the last syllable : — ambassadotir emperour interiour saviour anteriour endeavour labour splendour arbour errour misbehaviour successour ardour favour misdemeanour succour armour fervour neighbour superiour behaviour flavour odour tabour candour fulgour oratour tenour clamour governour ostentatour terrour clangour harbour ])arlour tremour cognisour honour possessour tumour colour horrour rancour valour demeanour humour rigour vapour dishonour inferiour rumour ^^gour dolour intercessour savour warriour actor doctor languor professor antecessor editor Ipntor protector assessor elector lictor rector auditor equator Lquor sculptor author executor manor sectator captor expositor mediator sector censor exterior mirror senator collector factor motor senior conductor * gladiator pastor stupor confessor inquisitor posterior tailor creditor inspector preceptor torpor director junior predecessor tutor The same principle will apply to the orthography of the last syllable of most of the words in the two lists ; and the inconsistency will be obvious by merely comparing the words anteriour and interiour (in the former list), which are written by Johnson with the u, with posterior and exterior (in the latter), which are written wthout it. In some of the recent abridgments of Johnson's Dictionary, the u is omitted in a part of the words in which he inserted it. Some of the English dictionaries which have been published since the first publi- cation of Johnson's, scrupulously follow him in retaining the u ; yet they do not insert it in the words in which he omitted it. Several of the English dictionaries omit it in all these words, except most of the dissyllables in the former of the preceding lists, and the following words, which are not derived from the Latin ; behaviour, demeanour, endeavour, enamour, and the derivatives of the words from the Latin, as disfavor, favorable, honorable, S:c. If Me turn from the dictionaries to inquire what is the general usage of those who write the language, we shall find it in a very unsettled state. In the United States, it is the prevailing, though not the universal usage, to omit the u in all words of this class; but "in England," says Mr. Smart (1836), "such is not the practice of the day, although some years ago there was a great tendency towards it. The following, indeed, are inclined to the Latin termination, and some of them so decidedly, that to write them with our would incur the opinion of great singularity, if not of fault : error, emperor, governor, warrior, sxiperior, horror, tremor, dolor, tumor, tenor, clangor, fulgor, savor." To these he might have added a number of others with equal propriety ; yet in England it is the prevailing practice to retain the u in most of the dissyllables in the former of the two lists, and also in such of the other words as are not derived from the Latin. A very few writers have retaiiied the u in the above enumerated words which are not of Latin origin, and omitted it in all the others. The eye is offended at seeing a word spelt in a manner to which it is unaccustomed ; and the eyes of most readers would now be offended at seeing emperor, inferior, orator, possessor, successor, and error written with the u ; and those of many are offended by seeing favor, honor, and especially savior written without it. It is difficult to fix the limit for a partial omission ; and the rule which entirely excludes the u from this class of Mords, and which is in accordance with the prevailing usage in the United States, if not the most imexceptionable, is the most convenient RULES OF ORTHOGRAPHY. xxvu RULES OF ORTHOGRAPHY. 1. Verbs of one syllable, ending with a single consonant, preceded l)y a single vowel (as plan), and verbs of two or more syllables, ending in the same manner, and having the accent on the last syllable (as regret), double the final consonant of the verb on assuming an additional syllable ; as, plan, planned ; regret, regretted ; — but if a diphthong precedes the last consonant (as in join), or the accent is not on the last syllable (as in suffer), the consonant is not doubled; as, join, Joined; suffer, suffered. There is an exception to the last clause of the preceding rule, with respect to most of the verbs ending in the letter I, which, on assuming an additional syllable, are allowed, by general usage, to double the I, though the accent is not on the last syllable ; as, travel, travelling, travelled, traveller; libel, libelling, libelled, libeller, libellous. But the derivatives of parallel are written without doubling the final I ; as, paralleled, unparalleled. — The nouns petal, peril, novel, and viol, on assuming an additional syllable, do not double the I ; as, petalous, perilous, novelist, violist. The following list comprises the verbs ending in I, which, though they have not the accent on the last syllable, yet commonly double the final / : — apparel dishevel handsel model rival bevel drivel hatchel panel rowel bowel duel imperil parcel shovel cancel embowel jewel pencil shrivel carol enamel kennel peril snivel cavil empanel label pistol tassel channel equal level pommel trammel chisel gambol Hbel quarrel travel counsel gravel marshal ravel tumiel cudgel grovel marvel revel miravel The derivatives of these verbs are spelt, in the Dictionaries of Perry and Webster, with a single I ; and this mode is also more or less favored by the lexicographers Ash and "Walker; and although it better accords with the analogy of the language, yet the prevailing usage is to double the I. 2. Some words, having a secondary accent on the last syllable, double the last letter on Eissuming an additional syllable. The verb to kidnap always doubles the p on assuming an additional syllable ; as, kidnap, kidnapped, kidnapping, kidnapper ; — also the following words ; compromit, compromitted ; carburet, carburetted ; sulphvret, sulphuretted ; — also various compound words; as, half-wit, half- witted ; hare-lip, hare-lipped, &c. 3. The verb to bias commonly doubles the s on assuming an additional syllable ; as. Massing, biassed, biasser ; as also the verb to worship, in like manner, commonly doubles the p ; as, worship, worshipping, worshipped, worshipper. 4. There is some diversity in usage with respect to several other verbs ending in p, which, although the accent is not on the last sylla- ble, are sometimes allowed to double the last consonant, when another syllable is added. But the more correct and regular mode is to write them without doubUng the final consonant ; as, gallop, galloping. — The derivatives of a few words ending in t are sometimes erroneously written with the t doubled ; as, benefitted, instead of benefited ; corn- baited, instead of combated. 6. Most of the words in the English language which end in ise, and almost all which end in ize, are verbs; and with regard to a number of these verbs there is a diversity in the English dictionaries. as well as in common usage, in relation to this termination, ihe «amo verbs sometimes ending in ize and sometimes in i>«. \Niih regard to this termination, the following rule is generally, though not uivari- ably, ob8er^•ed : — Verbs derived from Greek verbs ending in «;w, and otben formed after the same analog)-, have the termination ize; ait, agonize, characterize ; — but words derived from the French prendre, have the termination ise ; as, apprine, surprise, enterprise. The following list com])rises most of the English verbs which are generally written with the termination ise : — adrise advertise affranchise apprise chastise circumcise comprise compromise demise despise devise disfranchise disguise divertise emprise enfranchise enteq)rise exercise exorcise franchise merchandise minprise premise re\ise 8upcr^•Lse surmise surprise In relation to the following words, catechise or catechize, erUiciae or criticize, patronise or patronize, recognise or recognize, the diction- aries and usage arc dirided, though the most of the dictionaries give the termination ise to these verbs. — There are other words with regard to which there is a want of uniformity in usage ; as, cicili€e, disseize, epitomize, patronize, &c. 6. There are a few verbs which are derived from nouns ending in th hard or sharp, as in thin, and which have e added to th, making the sound of tli soft or vocal, as in this. Such are the following : from bath, bathe ; from breath, breathe ; from cloth, clothe ; from loath, loathe ; from sheath, sheathe ; from sooth, soothe ; from ttcath, swathe ; from wreath, wreathe and inwrealhe ; but the following vorljs are commonly written without a final c, viz., to bequeath, to mouth. and to smooth. — See SooTIlE. 7. Verbs ending in ic change the le into y, on adding ing; as, die, dying ; lie, lying ; tie, tying ; vie, vying. 8. Verbs ending with a single e omit the e when ing is added ; a-s place, placing ; relate, relating. The following words are exceptions : dye (to color), dyeing ; hoe, hoeing ; shoe, shoeing : — and wlien ing is added to the verlw singe, swinge, and tinge, the e is jjropcrly retained, as, singeing, stcingeiug, and tingeing, in order to distinguish these participles from singing, swinging, and tinging. 9. All verbs ending in y, preceded by a consonant, retain the y on adding ing; as, spy, spying; deny, denying; — but when ed is added, the y is changed into i ; as, spy, spied ; deny, denied ; and when * is added, y is changed into ie ; as, spy, spies ; daty, denies. 10. Verbs ending in y preceded by another vowel, on adding ing, ed, or *, do not change y into t ; as, delay, delaying, delayrti, delays. The following words are exceptions : lay, laid ; pay, paid ; say, said ; stay, stayed or staid^ 11. The greater part of verbal nouns end in «r, as from advertise, advertiser ; but many of them end in or, as from imitate, imitator ; from instruct, instructor ; and some are seen in both forms «» visitor, visiter. — The verbal nouns from beg and lie are irregularly formed beggar and liar. From peddle the regular verl»l noun would l»e peddler ; but the noun is commonly written pedler, and sometimes pedlar. — See Pedler. 12. There is a class of words, ending in ^e, as ctHlrs, mdrCt &&, XXVIU ORTHOGRAPHY. which are by some ■written center, meter, &c. ; but the former mode is sui)2Jorted by the prevailing usage. 13. There is a numerous class of English adjectives ending in able or ible, amounting to nearly a thousand, more than three fourths of which end in able. — A part of these adjectives are derived from Latin adjectives ending in abilis or ibilis ; a few of them are adopted from the French ; and many of them are of English growth ; and these are chiefly derived from verbs, as from allow, allowable, ft*om move, movable, sometimes fi-om nouns, as fi'om action, actionable, from peace, peaceable. 14. With respect to the orthography of these adjectives which are of English origin, it is difficult to give any general nde ; and in some cases it is diificult to determine whether they should end in able or ible ; and in a few cases usage is more or less variable ; as, addible or addable, conversable or conversible, refemble or referable. 15. Latin adjectives ending in abilis are derived from Latin verbs of the first conjugation; as, mutabilis, itom niuio, mutare ; and from adjectives with this termination in Latin, are formed Enghsh adjectives ending in able; as, mtitable. — Latin adjectives ending in ibilis are derived from verbs of the second, third, or fourth conjugation ; as, docibilis, from doceo, docere ; leyibilis, from leyo, legere ; audibilis from audio, audire ; and from adjectives with this termination in Latin, are formed English adjectives ending in ible ; as, docible, legible, atuiible. 16. Derivative adjectives ending in able are written without an e before a ; as blamable, movable, not blatneable, moveable ; except those of which the primitive word ends in ce or ge ; in such the e is retained to soften the preceding consonant ; as, peaceable, changeable. 17. Compound words, formed by prefixing a word or a syllable to a monosyllable ending in all, commonly retain the double I ; as, appall, befall, bethrall, downfall, forestall, fuzzball, headstall, install, inthrall, laystall, miscall, overfall, recall, saveall, thumbstall, water- fall, windfall ; but some of these words are very often, if not more commonly, seen with a single I ; as, appal, befal, bethral, inthral, &c. — Withal, therewithal, and wherewithal end with a single I. 18. A class of other compound words commonly retain the final double I which is found in the simple words ; as, bridewell, downhill, uphill, molehill, watermill, windmill, handmill. — With respect to foretel, enrol, and unrol, or foretell, enroll, and unroll, the authoiities and usage are divided, 19. Nouns of the singular number ending in ey form their plural by adding s only to the singular ; as, attorney, attorneys ; money, moneys ; valley, valleys. These plurals are often erroneously written attomies, monies, and vallies. 20. Nouns ending in o, preceded by another vowel, form their plural by tlie addition of s ; as, cameo, cameos ; folio, folios ; but if the final o is preceded by a consonant, the plural is commonly formed by adding es ; as, cargo, cargoes. The following nouns, however, canto, cento, grotto. Junto, portico, rotundo, salvo, solo, tyro, duo- decimo, octavo, quarto, and some others, commonly have their ];liiral formed by the addition of s only to the singular ; as, canto, cantos. Yet, with respect to the plural of some of these words, usage is not uniform ; as the plural of quarto, for example, is sometimes seen M'ritten quartos, and sometimes quartoes. 21. There is a class of words which have, in their derivation, a twofold origin, from the Latin and French languages, and are indifier- ently written with the first sjllable en or in, the former being derived from the French, and the latter from the Latin. With respect to some of these, it is difficult to deteimine which ibrm is best supported by usage ; as, for example, inquire or enquire, insure or ensure. A few of this class of words are ibund in the following Vocabulary, and others are noticed in the Dictionary. 22. There is a small class of words ending \nped, or pede (L. pes, foot) ; as, biped, centiped, milleped, midtiped, palmiped, plumiped, quadruped, soliped, and a few others. Of these words, biped and quadruped are always written without the final e, but with respect to the others, the dictionaries and usage are divided ; and although it has heretofore been the more common mode to write most of these words with a final e, yet there seems to be no good reason why tiioy should not all be conformed to the same rule. — See ^Iillepeu, and Soliped. 23. There is a class of chemical terms many of which signify that which contains the essence of the kind, as an extract, and which are variously written with the termination ine or in ; as, asparagine, chlorine, olivine, or asparagin, chlorin, olivin ; but the prevailing usage, with respect to most of these words, favors the use of the final e ; as, asparagine, chlorine ; but tannin is written without a final e. 24. The following words are generally written without an e after g; abridgment, acknowledgment, &i\^ judgment ; though many write them with it, — abridgement, acknowledgement, and judgement, — as Johnson and other lexicographers spell lodgement. — See Judg- ment, 25. In some cases, words are so variously affected by etymology, analogy, and general usage, that it is diificult to determine what orthography is best supported ; as, for examjjle, connection or con- nexion, despatch or dispatch, hinderance or hindrance, jail or gaol, preterite or pjveierit, recognizance or recognisance, shew or show, sceptic or skeptic, thrash or thresh, and various others. VOCABULARY OF WORDS OF DOUBTFUL OR VARIOUS ORTHOGRAPHY, The following Vocabulary contains only a few of the words which belong to the several classes referred to in the preceding remarks ; but, with the exception of these classes, it comprises nearly all the English words with regard to which a diversity of orthography is now often met with. The orthography in the left-hand column is deemed to be well authorized, and in most cases preferable ; but with respect to the authority of that in the right-hand column, there is a great diversity. In some cases it is nearly or quite as well authorized as that on the left hand, and in some it has but a very feeble support. Both orthograj)hies of some of the words are right, the words being differ- ently sjjelt when used in different senses ; as, draught or draft, forte or fort, subtle or subtile, abetter or abettor, canvass or canvas, caliber or calibre, caster or castor, controller or comptroller, Demesne \ Demean Embed, or Embedded, or Imbed Imbedded Exsanguious Exsect Complete Compleat Demarcation Demarkation Embezzle Imbezzle Exsiccate Concordat Concordate Democrat Democrate Embezzlement Imbezzlement Exsiccation Confectionery Confectionary Denizen Denison Emblazon Imblazon Exsiccative Confidant, n. Confident Dependant, n. Dependent Embody Embolden Imbody Imbolden Exsuccous Congeal able Congelable Dependence Dependance Extrinsical Connection Connexion Dependent, a. Dependant Emborder Imborder Exudation Connective Connexive Deposit Deposite Embosk Imbosk . Exude Consecrator Consecrater Desert, n. Desart Embosom, or Imbosom Eyry Contemporary Cotemporary Desolater Desolator Emboss Imboss Contra-dance Country-dance Despatch, or Dispatch Embowel Imbowel Contributory Contributary Dessert, n. Desert Embower Imbower Control ( Controul ( Comptrol Deteeter Detector Embrasure Embrazure Detorsion Detortion Empale Impale Controllable Controulable Detractor Detracter C Empannel Faeces Controller Comptroller Develop Develope Empanel, or ■< Impanel Fagot Conversable Conversible Development Developement C. Impannel Fairy Fakir Cony Coney Devest, or Divest Empoison Impoison Cony-burrow Coney-borough Dexterous Dextrous Empoverish, or Impoverish Falchion Coomb, 4 bushs Comb Diadrom Diadrome Empower Impower Falcon Copier Copyer Diaeresis Dieresis Empress Emperess Fantasy Coping ^ Copping ( Caping Diarrhoea Diarrhea Encage, or Incage Farther, or Dike, or Dyke Euc6nia Encaenia Farthest, or Copse Coppice Dime Disme Encr.ant Inchant Farthingale Coquette, n. Coquet Diocese Diocess Enchase Inchase Fattener Coranach 5 Coronach ( Coranich Disburden Disburthen Encircle Incircle Fearn aught Discount Discompt Enclose, or Inclose Fecal Corbel Corbeil Disfranchise DiHTranchise Enclosure Inclosure Felly Cordovan Cord wain Disfranchisement Dirtranchisement Encroach Incroach Felon Corpse Corse Dishabille Deshabille Encumber Incumber Felspar Correlative Corelative Disinthrall ( Disenthrall ( Disinthral Encumbrance Incumbrance Ferrule, or Cosey Cosy, Cozey Encyclopaedia Encyclopedia Feud Cot " Cott Disk, or Disc Endamage Indamage Feudal Cotillon Cotilion Dispatch, or Despatch Endear Indear Feudality Counsellor, and Councillor Disseize Disseise Endict ; see Indict Feudatory Courant Corant, Couranto Disseizin Disseisin Endite ; see Indite V'cuillcmorte Courtesan Courtezan Disseizor Disseisor Endorse ; see Indorse Fie Courtesy Curtesy Dissolvable Dissolvible Endow Indow Filanders Co\-in Covine Distention Distension Endue, or Indue Filbert Covinous Covenous Distil Distill Enfeeble Infeeble Filigrane Filigree Cozen Cosen Distrainor Distrainer Enfeoff Infeoff Cozenage Cosenage Diversely Diversly Enfranchise Infranchise Craunch Cranch Divest, or Devest Engender Ingender Fillibeg Cra\vfish Crayfish Docket Doquet Engorge Ingorge Filly Creak, v. Creek Doctress Doctoress Engrain Ingrain Finery, a forge Crier Cryer Dodecahedron Dodecaedron Enhance Inhance Firman Croslct Crosslet Doggerel Doggrel Enigma -(Enigma Crowd Croud Domicile Domicil Enjoin In join Fizgig Crowfoot Crow's-foot Doomsday-book Domesday-book Enlard Inlard Flageolet Cruet Crewet Dory, Doree Dorey Enlarge Inlarge Fleam Crumb Crum Dote Doat Enlighten Inlighten Flier Crusade Croisade Doubloon Doublon Enlist Inlist Flotage Cruse, critet Cruise Dowry Dowery Enlumine Inlumine Flotsam Crystal Chrystal Downfall Downfal Enquire, or Inquire Flour, meal Cucurbit Cucurbite Drachm, or Dram Enquiry, or Inquiry Fleur-de-lis Cue Queue Dragoman 5 Drogoman / Druggerman Enroll Enrol, Inrol Flugelman Cuerpo Querpo Enrolment Inrolment Cuish Cuisse Draught, or Draft Enshrine Inshrine Fluke Cuneiform C uniform Dreadnaught Dreadnought Ensnare, or Insnare Fluoride Cupel Cuppcl, Coppel Driblet Dribblet Ensure, or Insure Foetus Curb Kerb Drier Drver Entail Intail Forestall Curb-stone Kerb-stone Drought Drouth Entangle Intangle Foretell Curtain Courtine Dryly Drily Enterprise Enterprize Forray Cutlass Cutlas Dryness Driness Enthrone Inthrone Forte, strong side Cyclopaedia Cyclopedia Duchess Dutchess Enthymeme Enthymem Fosse Cyst Cist Duchy Dutchy Entice Intice Foundery, or Cysted Cisted Dulncse Dullness Entire Intire Franc, coin Czar Tzar, Tsar Dungeon Donjon Entirety Entierty Frenetic Dunghill Dunghil 1 Entitle Intitle, Intitule Frenzy Duress Duresse Entomb Intomb Frieze D. Dye, color Die Entrance, v. Intrance Frigate Dyeing, coloring Dying | Entrap Intrap Frit Entreat Intreat Frizzle Dactyl Dactyle Envelop, v. Envelope Frowzy Daily Dayly E. 1 Envelopment Envelopement Frumentaceous Daisied Damaskeen, v. Dazied Damaskin Eolipile Epaulet JEolipile Epaulette Frumenty ; Damson Damascene Eavesdropper Evesdropper | Epigraph Epigraphe Frustum Dandruff Dandriff Eccentric Excentric | Equerry Equery Fuel Danegelt Dangelt Echelon Echellon | Equiangular Equangular Fulfil Daub Dawb Economics (Economics | Equivoke Equivoque Fulfilment Dawdle Dandle Ecstasjf Ecstacy, Extasy | Era JEra. Fulness Doarn Dem Ecstatic Extatic 1 Eremite Heremite Furlough Debarkation Debarcation Ecumenical CEcumenical ' Escalade Scalade Further, or Shallot, Shalote Escritoir Scrutoire Scutcheon Estafet ^Esthetics Estopple, Estopel ^Etiology Exacter Expence Exanguious Exect Exiccate Exiccation Exiccative Exuccous Extrinsecal Exsudation Exsude JErie F. Feces Faggot Faery Faquir, Faqneer Faulchion Faulcon Phantasy Further Furthest Fardingale Fatner Fearnought Faecal Felloe Fellon Feldspar Ferule Feod Feodal Feodality Feodatory Fueillemorte Felanders Filberd C Filligrane < Filagree CFilligree Filibeg, Philibeg Filley Finary 5 Firmaun ( Phirman Fishgig Flagelet Phleme, Flem Flyer Floatage Floatsam Flower Flower-de-luce C Flugleman \ Fugclman Flook, Flowk Fluorid Fetus Forestal Foretel Foray ! Fort Foss Foundry Frank Phrenetic Phrensy Frize Frigat Fritt Frizle Frouzy Frumentacious Furmenty ' Furmety Frustrum Fewel Fulfill Fulfillment Fullness Furlow Farther WORDS OF DOUBTFUL OR VARIOUS ORTHOGRAPHY. XX3I1 Furthest, or Farthest Fiisre Fusil Fiisilccr Fusilier Fuze, n., or Fuse G. (iabardine Giliot Gallipot Galo^ie Gamut Gani^ue, in ore Gantlet Gaol, or Garish Garreteer Gaujje, or Ganger Gault Gauntlet, glove Gayety Gayly Gazelle Gear Gelatine Gclly ; see Genet Gerfalcon Germ Ghastly Ghibc'llipc Ghyll, rachie Gibberish Gibe Giglot Gimlet Gimmal Ginj^le ; see Girisole Girth, or Glair Clave Glazier Glcde Dloar Clnze Glue Gluey Gnarled Gneiss Good-by Gore Gourmand, or Gormandize Governante Graft Grandam Granddaughter Granite Grasshopper Gray, or Grecze, a step Grenade Grenadier Greyhound Gri.fin, Griffon Grizzled Grocer Grogram Grotesque Groundsill Group Guarantee, or Guild, or Guilder, or Guillotine Gulf Gunwale Gurnet Gypsy Gyre Gyve Gaberdine Galliot Galipot Goloche Gammut Gang Gantelope Jail Gairish Garretteer Gafje Ga','cr Gait, Golt Gantlet Gaiety Giily Gazel Gecr Gelatin Jelly Ginnet, Jennet \ Gyrfalcon, ( Jerfakon Germe Gastly Gibelline Gill Gebcrish Gybe, Jibe Gi-lct Gimblet Jymold Jnigle Girasol Girt Glaire Glaive Glasier Glead Glour Glose Glew Gluy, Glewy Knarled Gneis Good-bye Goar Gormand Gourmandize Governant Graff Gran am Grandaughter Gran it Grashopper Grey C Greece < Grice C Grise Granade Granadier Grayhound Gryphon Grisled Grosser ( Grogoram ( Grop;ran Grotcsk Groimdsel Groupe Guaranty Gild Gilder Guillotin Gulph Gunnel Gournet Gypsey, Gipsey Gire Give • II. Haggard Haggess Hagard UaggU Ila-ha Hake Halberd Hale, healthy Halibut Halyards Halloo HamC, or Handicraftsman Handiwork Hards Harebell Harebrained Harem Harrier Harslet Hatchcl, Hackle Haul, to draff Haum Haunch Haust, cough Hautboy Havoc Hawser Hizel Headache Hearse Heartache Height Heighten Heinous Hemistich Hemorrhoids Hcptamerede Hcrpetology Hexahedron Hibernate Hibernation Hiccough, or Hinderance, or Hip, V. Hip, n. Hippocras Hodge-podge Hoiden Holiday, or Hollo, Halloo Holster Hominy 5 Homonyme, or Hone Honeyed Hoop, or Haw-haw Haick Halbert Hail Holibut Halliards Hollo, Holloa Haum Handcraftsman Handywork Hurds Hairbell Hairbrained Haram Harier Haslet Hetchel, Heckle Hale Halm, Hawm Hanch Hoast Hoboy Havock Halser Hazle Headach Hcrse Heartach Hight Highten Hainous Hemistick Emeroids Heptameride Erpctology Hexardron Hybornate Hybernation Hickup Hindrance Hyp Hep Hippocrass Hotch-potch Hoyden Holvday Holloa, Hollow Holdster Homony Hommony Homonym Hoane Honied Whoop Hooping-cough.orWhooping-cough Hoot Horde Horehound Hornblende Hostler Household Housewife Howlet Hub Hurrah Hydrangea Uypothenuse Icicle Illness Imbank; gee Imbittcr Imbody, or Imborder Imbosom Imbound Imbox Imbrue Impair Impanel Imparlance Impassion Implead Iir.posthume Impoverish, or Incage Incase Inclasp Incloister Inclose, or Inclosure, or Incondensable Whoot Hord Hoarhound Hornblend Ostler Houshold Huswife Houlet Hob Hurra Hydrangia Hypotenuse I. Isicle Ilness Embank Embitter Embody Emborder Embosom Emboimd Embox Embrue Empair Empanel Emparlance Empassion Eniplrad Imposfume Empoverish Encage Encase Enclasp Encloister F^ndose Enclosure Incondensible Increase IncruHt Indefeasible Indelible Indict Indictment Indite Inditer Indocile ludorsable Indorse Indorsement Indorser Indue, or Inferrible Inflection Infold Infoliate Ingraft Ingraftment Ingrain Ingulf Innuendo Inquire, or Inquirer, or Inquiry, or Insnare, or Install, or Instalment Instil Instructor Insurance Insure ' Insurer Intenable, or Interlace Interplead Interpleader Inthrall Intrinsical Intrust Intwine Inure Inurement Invalid, n. Inveigle Inventor In wheel Inwrap, or In wreathe Isle Jackal Jacobin Jag Jagghery Jail, or Jailer, or Jalap Jamb, n. Janizary Janty Jasmine Jaunt Jelly Jenneting Jettce, Jetty Jewellery, or Jiffy Jingle Jointress Jole, or Jonquille J udgment Julep Junket, or Just, N. Justle, or EncreaM Encrust Indefcihible Indeleble Endict Endictment Endite Enditer Indocil Eiulorsable P^ndorse Endorsement Endorser Endue Inferable Inflexion Enfold En foliate Ingraff, Engraft Engruftment Engrain Engulf Inuendo Enquire Enquirer Enquiry Ensnare Instal Installment Instill Instructer Ensurance Ensure Ensurer Intenible Enterlace Enterplcad Enterplcader Inthral, Enthrall Intrinsecal Entrust Entwine Enure Enuremcnt Invalide Enveigle In venter Enwhcel Enwrap Enwreath He J. Jackall Jacobine Jagg Jagary Gaol Gaoler Jalop Jam, Jaum Janissary Jaunty Jessamine Jant Gelly ( Geniting ( Junratmg Jetta, Jutty Jewelry Giffy Gingle Jointuress Jowl Jonquil Judgement Julap Juncate Joust Jostle K. Kale K am sin Kayle Keelhaul Keelson Keg, or Kerseymere, or Khan Knapsack Kail, Cail Khamsin Keel Keelhale Kelson CajT Cassimrre Kan, Kann Snapsack Knarled, or Knell Gnarled Koel Mapgoty Maim, or Maize Malcadniinistra- tion, or Malccontent Malefeasance Malepractice Maltreat Malkin Mall Malanders Mameluke Mandarin Mandatary Mandrel, ond Manifestable Manikin Maniruvre Mantle, or Mark Marque, hcetue Marquee Marquis, or Marshal Marten, or Martingale Mask Maslin, Meslin Mastic Matins Mattress Meagre Mediaeval Meliorate, or Menagerie Merchandise Mere, a pool Metre, and Mew Mewl Mileage Milleped L. Lackey Liicquer Lair Lunibdoidal Lance Landscape Landsman Lantern Lanyard launch Laundress Laureate Lavender Lea, a plain Leach, or Leaven Ledger Lettuce Liceniie Lickerish Licorice Lief Lilac Lily Linguiform Liniment, and Lintstock Litharge Llama, animal Loadstar I^ad>tone Loath, a. Loathe, r. Lode, a rein Lodgement Lower Luff Luke Lustring, or Lye, /rout a*he» Laquejr Lacker La re Lamdoidal Launce I^ndskip I>andnian Lanthnrn Laniard Lanch Landress I^ureat I^tendar I^e, Lex, Lay Leech, Letdi Lcven Ix-ger lattice Licence Liquorish Liquorice Lieve, Leef I.ilach Lilly Linguefomi Liiiiiment Linstock Litherage Lama lodestar Lodestone Loth Lot he Load Lodgment Lour Loof I^uke Lutestring Lie, Ley M. Mageotty Ma^ne^l, Maihem Ma'iz Malndministratioit MaUontent Malfeasance Malpractice M.iUtreat Maukin Maul Mallendera Mamaluke Mandarine Mandatory Mandril Mani^'estible Mannikin Maneurer Mantel Marc Mark Mnrkee Marouess I Marstiall ' Mareschal Martin Martingal Masque Mastlin, MisHn Mastirh Mattins Matress, Mattrus MeaRcr Medieval Ameliorate Mensgery Merchandise Meer Meter Meaw Meawl Milage Millepede xxxu WORDS OF DOUBTFUL OR VARIOUS ORTHOGRAPHY. Millrea Miscall Misle, Mizzle Misspell Misspend Misy Mistletoe Mitre Mizzen Moccason Mocha-stone Modillion Molasses Moneyed Mongrel Monodrame Mood, or Moresque Morion Mortgageor Mosque Mosquito Musquito Mould Moult Mulch MuUin Multiped Mummery Murdor Murderous Murky Miirrhine Muscle, and Musket Mustache Myth Millree, Millreis Miscal Mistle Mispell Mispend Missy 5 Misletoe I Misseltoe Miter Mizen 5 Moccasin I Moggason Mocho-stone Modillon JMelasses Molosses Monied Mungrel Monodram Mode Moresk Murrion Mortgagor Mosk 'Moscheto Moschetto Mosquetoe Mosquetto Muscheto Muschetto Musketo Musqueto Musquetoe Musquitto Mold Molt Mulsh Mullein Multipede Mommery Murther Murtherous Mirky Myrrhine Mussel Musquet Moustache Mythe N. Nankeen Nankin Naught Nought Negotiate Negociate Net, a., clear Neat Nib Neb Nobless Noblesse Nombles Numbles Novitiate Noviciate Nozle Nozzle, Nosle Nuisance Nusance 0. Oblique Octahedron fficonomics ; Oecumenical Offence Offuscate Olio Omer Opaque Orach Orison Osier Osmazome Osprey Ottar Outrageous Oxidate Oxidation Oxide Oxidize Oyes Pacha facket Painim Oblike Octaedron Economics Ecumenical Offense Obfuscate Oglio Homer Opake Orache Oraison Ozier Ozmazome O spray Otto Outragious Oxydate Oxydation Oxyde, Oxyd Oxydize Oyez P. Pasha, Bashaw Paquet Paynim Palanquin Palette Palmiped Pandore, or Panel Pansy Pantagraph } Pantograph \ Pappoose Parallelopiped Paralyze Parcenary Parol, a. Paroquet Parral Parsnip Partisan Patin Patrol Paver Pawl Pedler Pedlery Peep Penance Penniless Pentahedral Pentahedron Pentile Peony Perch Persimmon Persistence Pewit Phantasm Phantom Phenomenon Phial, or Philibeg ; see Philter Phlegm Phoenix Phthisic Picked, or Picket, and Picturesque Pie Piebald Pimento Pincers Placard Plain, and Plane-sailing Plaster Plat, or Plethora Pleurisy Pliers Plough Ploughman Ploughshare Plumber Plumiped Pluviameter Poise Poltroon Polyanthus Polyhedral Polyhedron Pomade Pommel Pontoon, and Pony Porpoise Portray Portress Postilion Potato Pottage Practise, r. Praemunire Premise Pretence Preterite, or Pretor Prison-base Probate Profane Protector Prothonotaryship Prunello Pumpkin \ Puny, and Pupillary Palankeen Pallet Palmipede Bandore Pannel Pancy Penta graph Papoos, Papoose Parallelepiped Paralyse Parcenery Parole Parrakeet Parrel Parsnep Partizan Patine Patroll, Patrole Pavier, Pavior Paul Peddler, Pedlar Peddlery Piep Pennance Pennyless Pentaedral Pentaedron Pantile Piony Pearch Persimon Persistance Pewet Fantasm Fantom Phaenomenon Vial Fillibeg Philtre Flegm Phenix Tisic Piked Piquet Picturesk Pye Pyebald Pimenta Pinchers Placart Plane Plain-sailing Plaister Plot Plethory Plurisv Flyers" Plow Plowman Plowshare Plunimer Plumipede Pluviometer Poize Poltron Polyanthos Polyedral Polyedron Pommade Pummel Ponton Poney Porpus, Porpess Pourtray Porteress Postillion Potatoe Potage Practice Premunire Premiss Pretense Preterit Pra>tor Prison-bars Probat Prophane Protecter Prothonotariship Prunella Pompion Pumpion Puisne Pupilary Purblind Purlin Purr Purslain Pursy Putrefy Pygmean Pygmy Pyx Quarantine Quartet Quatercousin Quay, a mole Quinsy Quintain Qtiintal Quitter Quoit Raccoon Raillery Ransom Rarefy Raspberry Ratafia Rattan Raven, prey Raze Razure Real, coin Rear Rearmouse Rearward Recall Recognizable Recognizance Recognize, or Recognizee Recognizor Recompense Reconnoitre Redoubt Redoubtable Reenforcement Referable ) Referrible ) Reflection Reflective Reglet Reindeer Reinstall, or Relic Renard, or Rennet, or Replier Reposit Resin, or Resistance Respite Restiff, or Restiffness Retch, to vomit Reverie, or Reversible Rhomb, and Ribbon Rider Rinse Risk Riveted Bobbin Rodomontade Roquelaure Route, course Rummage Runnet, or Rye Poreblind Purline Pur Purslane Pussy Putrify Pigmean Pigmy Fix Q. Quarantain Carentane Quartett Catercousin Key Quinsey Quinzy . Squinancy Qiiintin Kental, Kentle Quittor Colt R. Racoon, Rackoon Rallery Ransome Rarify Ra sherry Ratifia, Ratafee Ratan Ravin Rase Rasure Rial, Ryal Rere Reremouse Rere ward Recal Recognisable Recognisance Recognise Recognisee Recognisor Recompence Reconnoiter Redout Redflutable Reinforcement Referible Reflexion Reflexive Riglet ( Raindeer I Ranedeer Reinstal Relique Reynard Runnet Rcplyer Reposite Rosin Resistence Rcspit Restive k Rcstifness ( Restiveness Reach Revery Reversable Rhumb r Riband I Riban I Ribband { Ribin Ryder Rince Risque Rivetted Robin Rhodomontade Roquelo Rout Homage Rennet Rie 8. Sabianism, or Sag, or Sale Sainfoin Salic Saltcellar Sandarach Sandiver Sanitary Sarcenet Sat Satchel Satinet Savin Saviour, or Scalade Scallop Scath Scenery Sceptic Sceptical Scepticism Schist Schistose Scholium Schorl Sciagraphy, or Sciomachy, or Scion Scirrhosity Scirrhous Scirrhus Scissors Sconce Scotfree Scow Screen Scrofula Scymitar ; see Scythe Seamstress Sear Scarce Secretaryship Seethe Seignior Seine, a net Seizin Sellenders Selvage Sentinel Sentry Sequin Sergeant, or Sergeantry, or Sess, or Sesspool, or Sevennight Shad Shard Shark, or Shawm Sheathe, v. Sheer, pure Sheik _ Shemitic, or Sherbet Sherry Shorling Show Showbread Shrillness Shroud Shuttlecock Shyly Shyness Sienite Silicious, or Sill Sillabub Simar Siphon Siren Sirloin, or Sirocco Sabaism Swag Saik Saintfoin Salique Saltseller Sandarac Sandever Sanatory Sarsenet Sate Sachel Satinett Savine, Sabine Savior Escalade, Scalado Scollop Scathe Scenary Skeptic Skeptical Skepticism Shist Shistose Scholion Shorl Sciography Sciamachy Cion Skirrhosity Skirrhous ( Schirrhus ( Skirrhus C Cissors < Cizars C Scissars Skonce Shot free Skow Skreen Scrophula Cimeter Sithe, Sythe 5 Sempstress ( Semstress Sere Sarse Secretariship Seeth Signior, Signor Sein, Seen Seisin Sellanders Selvedge Centinel Sentery, Gentry C Cecchin < Chequin (_ Zechin Serjeant Serjeantry Cess Cesspool Sennight Chad Sherd Shirk Shalm Sheath Shear Sheikh, Sheick Semitic Scherbet Sherris Shoreling Shew Shewbread Shrilness Shrowd Shittlecock Shily Shiness Syenite Siliceous Cill Syllabub C'himere, Cymar Syphon Syren Surloin Scirocco WORDS OF DOUBTFUL OR VARIOUS ORTHOGRAPHY. XKXllI i I Sirup Sit, to incubate Site Sizar Size, ghu Skate Skein Skeptic ; «e« Skilful Skulk Skull Slabber Slake, to quench Sleight, n. Sley, « reed Sluice Slyly Slyness Smallness Smirk Smooth, V. Soap Socage Socle Solan Solder, or Soldier Soliped Solitaire Solvable Somerset Summerset Sonneteer Soothe, V. Sorrel Souse Spa Spicknel Spinach Spinel Splice Sponge Spongy Spright Sprightful Spunk Spurt, or Stable Staddle Stanch Stationery, n. Steadfast Steelyard Sterile Stillness Stockade Strait, n. Strap, or Strengthener Strew Stupefy Sty Style Subtile, thin Subtle, sly Subtract Subtraction Suit Suitor Sulky, n.^ Sulphuremd Syrup, Sirop Sumach Sumac, Shumac Touchy, or Set Suretyship Surlom, or Siiretiship Tourmaline Scite Sirloin Trance Sizer Surname Simaine Tranquillity Cize, Cise Surprise Surprize Triiiujuiltizc Scate Surreptitious Subrcptitious Transferable Skain Survivor Survivcr Transfcrrcnce Sceptic SkiUful Survivorship Survivership Treadle Swag, or Swale Sag Treenail Sculk Swcalc Trellis Scull Sward Sord Trcntals Slobber Swath, n. Swarth Trestle Slack Sweepstakes Sweepstake Trevet, or Slight Swipple Swiple Trousers Slay, Slaie Swop, or Swap Truckle-bed, or Sluce, Sluse Sycamore 5 Sicamore ( Sycamine Tumbrel, and Slily Turkey Sliness Sylvan Silvan Turkois Smalness Synonyme, or Synonym Smerk Syphilis Siphilis Turnip Smoothe Systematize Systemize Turnsole Sope Soccage Sokle, Zocle T. Tutenag Twecdle Soland, Solund Twibil Soder Tabard Taberd Tymbal Souldier Taffety Taffeta, Taffata Tyro Solipede Taffrail Tafferel Solitoir Taillage Tallage Solvible Talc, a stone Talk, Talck Somersault • Tallness Talncss Sumniersault Talmud Thalmud Sonnetteer Tambour Tambor Umbles Sooth C Tambarin Unbias Sorel Tambourine < Tambourin Unbiassed Sowse C Tamborin Unbigoted Spaw Spigncl Tarpauling S Tarpawling I Tarpaulin Unroll Until Spinage Spinelle, Spinell Tartan Tartane Tassel Tossel Splise Tawny Tawney Spunge Tease Teaze Spungy Teazle, Teasel Tassel, Tazel Sprite Tenable Tenible Vaivode Spriteful Terrier Tarrier Vales, motley Sponk Tether Tedder Valise Spirt Tetrastich Tetrastick Vantbrace Stabile Theodolite Theodolet Vat, a vessel Stadle Thraldom Thralldom Vaudevil Staunch Thrash, or Thresh Vavasor Stationary Threshold Threshhold Stedfast Throe, apana Thyine, toood Throw Veil, cover StiUyard Steril Thine Vender, or Thyme Thime Veneer Stilness Ticking, or Ticken Venomous Stoccade Tidbit Titbit Verdigris Streight Tie Tye Strop Tier, a row Tire Vermilion Strengthner Tierce Terce Straw", Strow Tiger Tyger Tmkal Vermin Stupify Tincal Verst Stye Stile Tint Teint Vertebre, or Tiny Tyny Vervain Subtle Tippler Tipler Vial, or Subtile Tithe Tythe Vice, a screw Substract Toilet Toilette Vicious Substraction Toll, to allure Tole Villain, and Suite Tollbooth Tolbooth Villanous Suiter Ton, or Tun Villany Sulkcy Tonnage Tunnage Visitatorial Sulphureted Tormentor Tormenter Visitor Techy Tourmalin Transe Tranquility Tranquilizc Transferriblc Transference Treddle Trenail, Trunnel Trellice Trigintals Trcsscl, Trusael Trivet, Trevit Trowscrs Trundle-bed Tumbril Turky 5 Turquoia I Turquoise Turnep Turn sol < Tutanag I Tutcnague Twiddle, Twidle Twibill Timbal Tiro U. Humbles Unbiass Unbiased Unbigotted UnroY Untill V. Waiwode Vails Vallisc Vanbrass Fat Vaudeville I Vavasour ' Valvasor Vail Vendor Fineer Venemous 1 Verdigrise • Verdiffrease I Vermillion ' Virmilion Vemiine Bcrst, Werst Vertebra Vervane Phial Vise Vitious Villein, Villan Villainous Villainy Visitonal Visiter ViMf VitiAto Vizier Volcano Vizor Viciiite Vizir, Vikier Vulcano W. Wagon, or Waif Waive, to defer Wale Walrus Warranter, and War-whoop Waul Wear, e. Wear, n. Weasand WeUh Whang Whelk Whippletree Whippoorwill Whiskey Whitleathcr Whoop Whooping-cough Widgeon Wilful Windlass \ Wintry Wiry Witch-elm With, n. Withal Wizard Woe Woful Wondrous Woodbine Wood chuck Woollen Wreathe, r. Wreck Wriggle WainM Walft Waw Wc«l WalntM Warrantor War-hoop Wawl Ware Weir, WLer Wesand, WexaB4 Welch Wang Wclk Whiffletree WhippowiB Whisky Whilffeatlier Hoop Hooping-cougk Wiaecm Willful Windlace Windlas Winter/ Wlery Wccch-elm Withe Withall Wizzaid, Wisarl Wo Woeful Wondcrous Woodbind Woodchvk Woolen Wreath Wrack Higgle Yawl Yftu! Yearn Ycm Yeast Ycst Yelk, or Yolk Yerk Yark Yew Eugh z. . (ZaiRr Zafire ^ZafTar CZatfer Zechin ; tee Zinc Sequin Zink Zymologj Zumologj ENGLISH GRAMMAR. Ix this Dictionary care has been taken to give all the irregular grammatical forms of words. All the verbs of the language which are often met wth, Avhether regular or irregular, are conjugated ; the pliu-al forms of in-egular nouns are exhibited ; and occasional obser- vations are made in relation to the gi*ammatical construction and use of words. It is not deemed expedient to give here any general system or outline of grammar ; but the design is merely to furnish, on various \a\ncs of practical grammar, some notices and remarks, which could not properly be introduced into the body of the Dictionary and which may facilitate the use of the work. The parts of speech in the English language are commonly reckoned nine, or, if the participle is considered a distinct part of s])eech, ten ; namely, the Article, Noun, Pronoun, Adjective, Verb, Participle, Adverb, Conjunction, Preposition, and Interjection. — The parts of speech which are not declinable, \i'/.., the article, adverb, conjunction, preposition, and interjection are called particles. THE ARTICLE. The article is a v, ord prefixed to nouns to point them out, or to limit their signification. The articles ai*e a, or an, and the; as, a book, an apple, the man. — For the use of the articles, see A, An, and The, in the Dictionarj'. THE NOUN. A noun, or substantive, is the name of any thing that exists, or of which we have any idea. Proper nouns are the names of indiAiduals, whether persons or things ; as, Alexander, America, London. Com- mon nouns are the names of genera or classes. EngHsh common nouns are the appellatives or substantives of the English language, or are such as are contained in dictionaries of the language. English nouns are mostly formed by affixing to the radical parts of words the terminations an, ance, ant, ar, ard, art, ary, eer, ent, er, ier, ist, ive, or, stei', ate, ee, ite, acy, age, ancy, ence, ency, head, hood, ion, ity, ism, ment, mony, ness, on, ry, ship, t, th, tude, ty, ure, y, dom, cule, tie, el, il, et, in, ine, kin, let, ling, ock, tde. Nouns have three cases, nominative, possessive, and objective; three genders, mascidine, feminine, and neuter ; and two 'numbers, singular and plural. The plural number is generally formed by adding s to the singular ; as hook, books ; dove, doves. But if the singular ends in s, ss, sh, ch soft, or X, the plural is formed by the addition of es ; as, rebus, reuses ; mass, masses ; lash, lashes ; church, churches ; fox, foxes. If the singular ends in ch hard, the plural is formed by adding s only ; as, monarch, monarchs. If the singular ends in o, preceded by another vowel, the plural is formed by the addition of s ; as, folio, folios; cameo, cameos; bamboo, bamboos: embryo, embryos; but if the final o is preceded by a consonant, the plural is commonly formed by adding es ; as, cargo, cargoes ; hero, heroes. The following nouns, however, canto, cento, grotto, junto, portico, rotundo, salvo, solo, tyro, and some others derived from foreign languages, and hardly Anglicized, as albino, domino, &c., commonly have their plural formed by the addition of s only to the smgular ; as, canto, cantos. But there are some respecting which usage is not uniform ; as, duodecimo, octavo, quarto, &c. There is a cIeiss of nouns, forming the names of various arts and sciences, which havt. a plural termination in ics, but have no singular termination; as, ethics, mathematics, mechanics, metaphysics, mne- monics, politics, &c. All nouns of this class are generally considered by grammarians as properly plural ; though we sometimes see them, or some of them, joined to verbs in the singular number by respectable writers. (See Mathematics.) Nouns of the singular number ending in y preceded by a consonant, form their plurals by changing y into ics ; as, lady, ladies ; body, bodies ; but those ending in y preceded by a vowel, form their plurals regularly, by the addition of s only to the singular ; as, valley, val- leys ; attorney, attorneys, &c. These plurals are sometimes errone- ously written vallies, attornies, &c. There is a class of nouns ending mf ovfe, viz., beef, calf, elf, half, knife, leaf, life, loaf, self, sheaf, shelf, tvife, wolf, which form their plurals by changing f, or fe, into ves ; as, beeves, calves, &c. The word wharf, according to the prevailing American usage, is conformed to this class, baring for its plural wharves; though, accorduig to English usage, the plural is wharfs. — Staff commonly has staves in the plural ; but other nouns ending in ff', and also in /, except those above enumerated, form their plurals regulariy, by addiii| s to the singular; as, m%iff, muffs; proof , proof s, &c. There is a considerable number of words derived from the Greek and Latin languages, which are often used in English, and are more or less Anglicized, and of which the Greek and Latin jjlurals are sometimes used, and sometimes plurals formed according to the analogy of the English language. Of this class are encomium, mem- orandum, medium, radius, dogma, of which the Latin plurals are encomia, memoranda, media, radii, dogmata ; the EngHsh, encomi- ums, memorandums, mediums, radiuses, dogmas. The two plurals are generally given, in this Dictionary, under such words as admit the use of both. There are some words which have the plural form, but which are used in both the singular and the plural number, or respecting the number of which there is a want of agreement among grammarians. Of this class are ahns, bellows, gallows, means, news, and pains. (See these words in the Dictionary.) ( xxxiv ) r THE NOUN, THE PRONOUN, THE ADJECTIVE, THE VERB. XJijr Nouns formed by the addition of fid (from the adjective full) to another word, ns mouthful, spoonful, are regarded as indivisible com- poundK, and form their plui-als in a regular manner by the addition of #; as, mouthftds, spoonfuls. But some compound nouns, which have the parts of which they are compounded connected by hyphein, have the plural termination affixed to the ftmt jmrt ; u», aitie-Je-camp, aides-de-camp ; cousin-yerman, couninit-german ; court-viartialy courts-martial ; father-in-late, fathers-in-law. THE PRONOUN. The different kinds of pronouns are specified in the notice of the word Pronoun, hi the Dictionary, where they are also severally enumerated and noticed, tionary.) (See Pronoun, and Mine, in the Die- THE ADJECTIVE An adjective is a word added to a noun to express its quality, or limit its meaning ; as, a good man ; a green field ; thi-ee ap- ples. A great part of the adjectives of the English language are formed by affixing to the radical parts of words the terminations ac, eU, an, ar, anj, en, ic, teal, id. He, ine, ory, ate, ful, ose, ous, some, y, ish, like, ly, ive, able, ible, ublc, less. Most adjectives have two variations from the simple or positive fomi of the word, called degrees of comparison, namely, the com- parative and superlative. In words of one syllable the comparative is commonly formed by adding r or er to the positive ; as, icise, wiser ; soft, softer ; and the superlative, by adding st or est ; as, wise, trisest ; soft, soflett. Adjectives of more than one syllable are commonly compared by prefixing more and most to the jiositive ; as, useful, moi e uvcful, most useful — The termination ish, annexed to the ])ositive, denotes a diminution of the quality ; as, black, blackish. Several adjectives form their degrees of comparis* n in an irregular manner. These are good, bad, little, many, much, near, laiCf and old. (See these words in the Dictionary.) THE VERB. A verb is a part of speech which signifies to be, to do, or to suffer ; or it is a word by means of which something is affirmed respecting some person or tiling ; as, I am ; you hear ; he is instructed. The person or thing respecting which any thing is affirmed, is called the subject. A verb in the infinitive mode is not comiected with any subject, and no affirmation can be made by it. Verbs are divided into active or transitive, and neuter or intransitive. In this Dictionary, as well as in most other modem English diction- aries, verbs to which v. a. is annexed are active, or transitive, verbs ; and those to which v. n. is annexed are neuter, or intransitive, verbs. An active, or transitive, verb expresses an action passing from an agent or actor to some object acted upon ; and it requires the addition of an object to complete the sense ; as, " The master teaches the fnpil," or " The master teaches him." Here ptipil and him denote objects acted upon, and are in the objective case, governed by the active or transitive verb teach. A neuter, or intransitive, veib expresses being or state of being ; and it does not require the addition of an object to comjjlete the sense; as, "He is;" "The sun sAinc*." — There is a class of verbs which are generally ranked among neuter verbs, and which denote action confined to the subject, without any object acted upon; as, " I run ; " " He walks." These are, by some grammarians, styled adive-intransitive verbs, in distinction from active-transitive verbs. A passive verb is formed by associating the perfect participle of an active verb with some tense of the verb to be ; and it implies an object acted upon, and an agent by which it is acted upon ; as, " Caesar was slain by Brutus " A regular verb is one which forms its im])erfect tense and i)erfect participle by adding d or ed to the present ; as, lote, loted ; eaXL called. An irregidar verb is one which does not form its imj)erfect teme and perfect participle by adding d or ed to the present ; as, preaent write, imperfect wrote, perfect jiarticiple written. All the verbs of the English language, which are often used, whether regular or irregular, are carefully conjugated, where they sewrally occur, in this Dictionarj-. It is, therefore, not deemed necessarj- to insert here a table of irregular verbs. Auxiliary verbs, called also helping verbs, are those by means of which English verbs are principally conjugated. They are do, bey have, must, may, can, shall, will, with their inflections. Mighty could, .should, and would, which are regarded as the im|x?rfcct or past tenses of mat/, can, shall, and will, commonly imply past time ; yet they are sometimes used in the conditional present and future tenaes. Many verlis are formed by affixing, to the radical parta of w(»d;b ate, en,fy, ish, ise, ize, THE CONJUGATION OF VERBS. The conjugation of a verb is the regular combination and arrange* ment of its several numbers, jicrsons, moods, and tenses. Grammarians differ much with respect to the number of rdoea, moods, and tenses in the English lan^ruage. According to some grammarians there is but one voice, the active, two moods, the in- dicative and the infinitive, and two tenses, the present and jiast or preterite ; accortling to others, there are two \-oice8, the actiw and passive, four moods, and six tenses ; as in the following conjugations XXXVl ENGLISH GRAMMAR. The auxiliary and the active verb To Have is conjugated in the foUovdng manner : — TO HAVE. Indicative Mood. PRESENT TEKSE. Singular. PhiraL \st Person, I have. 1. "We hare. 2d Per»on, Thou hast. 2. Ye or you hare. Sd Person, He, she, or it, hath 3. They hare, or has. lUPEEFECT TERSE Singulca: 1. I had. 2. Thouhadst. 3. He,&c.had. Plural. 1. We had. 2. Ye or you had. 3. They had. PERFECT TENSE. Singular. 1. I haTe had. 9. Thou hast had. 3. He has had. Singular. 1. I had had. 2. Thou hadst had. 3. He had had. Plural. 1. We have had. 2. Ye or you have had. 3. They have had. PltUPEKFECT TENSE. Plural. 1. We had had. 2. Ye or you had had. 3. They had had. FIRST FUTURE TENSE. Singular. 1. I shall or will have. 2. Thou shalt or wit have- 3. He shull or will have. Phiral, 1. We shall or will have. 2. Ye or you shall or will have. 3. They shall or will have. SECOND FUTURE TENSE. Singular. 1. I shall have had. 2. ITiou >vilt have had. 3. He will have had. Plural, 1. We shall have had. 2. Ye or you will have had. 3. They will have had. Imperative Mood. Singular. Plural. 1. Let me have. 1. Let us have. 2. Have thou, or do thou have. 2. Have ye, or do ye or you have. 3. Let him have. 3. Let them have. Potential Mood. Mayst and mightst were formerly, and they are still by some, written mayest and mightest. The second persons singular couldst, shotildst, and woiddst, were formerly written couldest, shouldest, and wotddest. Though might, could, should, and would are preterite and past tenses, they are frequently employed to denote the present time. Their use to denote both past and present time may be illustrated as follows : — He should have done this yesterday ; and he might or he could have done it, if he would. — He should do it, and he might or he could do it to-day, if he woidd. May, though of the present tense, is also sometimes used to denote the future ; as, He may come, and probably mil come, to-morrow. PRE 3E N T TENSE, Singular. 1. I may or can have. 2. Thou mayst or canst have. 3. He may or can have. Plural. 1. We may or can have. 2. Ye or you may or can have. 3. They may or can have. IMPERFECT TENSE. Singular. Plural. 1. I might, could, would, or should 1. We might, could, would, or have. should have. 2. Thou mightst, couldst, wouldst, 2. Ye or you might, could, would, or shouldst have. or should have. 3. He might, could, would, or 3. They might, could, would, or should have. should have. PERFECT TENSE. Singular. Plural. 1. I may or can have had. 1. We may or can have had. 2. Thou mayst or canst have had. 2. Ye or you may or can have had. 3. He may or can have had. 3. They may or can have had. PLUPERFECT TENSE. Singular. Plural. 1. I might, could, would, or should 1. We might, coiild, would, or have had. should have had. 2. Thou mightst, couldst, wouldst, 2. Ye or you might, could, would, or shouldst have had. or should have had. 3. He might, could, would, or 3. They might, could, would, or should have had. should have had. Subjunctive Mood. PRESENT TENSE. Singular. 1. If I have. 2. If thou have. 3. If he have. Plural. 1. If we have. 2. If ye or you have. 3. If they have. It is very common to vary the terminations of verbs in the subjunc- tive mood in the same manner as in the indicative ; as, " If thou hast, if he has," instead of "If thou have, if he have." — "If thou lovest, if he loves;" instead of "If thou love, if he love." So also, " If I am, if thou art, if he is ; if we are," &c., " If I was, if thou wast, if he was ; " instead of " K I be," &c. The remaining tenses of the subjunctive mood are, in general, similar to the correspondent tenses of the indicative mood. ■♦ Lifinitive Mood. Present, To have. Perfect, To have had. Participles. Present or Active, Having. Perfect or Passive, Had. Compound Perfect, Having had. The auxiliary and the neuter verb To Be is conjugated as follows .• — ■ TO BE. Indicative Mood. PRESENT TE NSE. Singular. 1. I am. 2. Thou art. 3. He, she, or it is. Plural. 1. We are. 2. Ye or you are. 3. They are. IMPERFECT TENSE. Singular. Plural. 1. I was. 1. We were. 2. Thou wast. 2. Ye or you were. 3. He was. 3. They were. PERFECT TENSE. Singular. Plural. 1. I have been. 1. We have been. 2. Thou hast been. 2. Ye or you have been. 3. He hath or has been. 3. They have been. CONJUGATION OF VERBS. XXX vu »LUFSBrBOT TEN8B. Singular. 1. I had been. 2. Thou hadst been, t. He had been. P/uro/. 1. We had been. 2. Ye or you had been. 3. They had been. FIRST FUTURE TENSE. Singular. 1 . I shall or will be. 2. Thou shall or wilt be. 3. He shall or will be. PluraL 1. "We shall or will be. 2. Ye or you shall or will be. 3. They shall or will be. SECOND FUTURE TENSE Singular. 1, I shall have been. 2. Thou wilt have been. 8. He will have been. Plural. 1. We shall have been. 2. Ye or you will have been. 3. They will have been. Imperative Mood. Singular. 1. Let me be. 2. Be thou, or do thou be. 8. Let him be. Plural. 1. Let us be. 2. Be ye or you, or do ye or you be. 3. Let them be. Singular, 1 . I may or can be. 2. Thou mayst or canst be It He may or can be. Potential Mood. - PRESENT TENSE. Plural. 1. We may or can be. 2. Ye or you may or can be. 3. They may or can be. IMPERFECT TENSE. Singular. Plural. 1. I might, could, would, or should 1. We might, could, would, or be. should be. 2. Thou mightst, couldst, wouldst, 2. Ye or you might, could, would, or or shouldst be. should be. 3. He might, could, would, or 3. They might, could, would, or should be. should be. PERFECT TENSE. Singular. Plural. 1. I may or can have been. 1. We may or can have been. 2. Thou mayst or canst have been. 2. Ye or you may or can have been. 3. He may or can have been. 3. They may or can have been. PLUPERFECT TENSE. Singular. Plural. 1. 1 might, could, would, or should 1. We might, could, would, or should have been. have been. 2. Thou mightst, couldst, wouldst, 2. Ye or you might, eould, would, or or shrfuldst have been. should have been. 3. He might, could, would, or should 3. They might, could, would, or have been. should have been. Subjunctive Mood. PRESENT TENSE. 1. If I be. 2. If thou be. a If he be. Singular. Plural. 1. If we be. 2. If ye or you be. 8. If they be. IMPERFECT TENSE. Singular. Plural. 1. If I were. 1. If we were. 2. If thou wert. 2. If ye or you were. 3. If he were. 8. If they were. The remaining tenses of this mood arc, in general, similar to the correspondent tenses of the indicative mood. Infinitive Mood. Present, To be. Perfect, To hare be«a. Particiflet. Present, Being. Perfect, Been. Compound Perfect, Having been. CONJUGATION OF REGULAB VERBS. ACTIVK. A regular active verb is conjugated in the following manner : — TO LOVE. Indicative Mood. PRESENT TBH8B. PhmL 1. We love. 2. Ye or you lore. Singular. I love. Thou lovest. He, she, or it loves or loveth. 3. They love. IMPERFECT TEN8B. Plural 1. We loved. 2. Ye or you loved. 3. They loved- PERFECT TENSE. Plura*. 1. We have loved. 2. Ye or you have loved. 3. They have loved. PLUPBRFBCT TENSE. Singular. PluraL 1. We had loved. 2. Ye or you had loved. 3. They had loved. FIRST FUTURE TENSE. Singular. PluraL I shall or will love. 1. We shall or will love. Thou shalt or wilt love. 2. Ye or you shall or will lov*. He shall or will love. 3. They shall or will love. SECOND FUTURE TBIfSB. Singular. PluraL I shall have loved. 1. We shall have loved. Thou wilt have loved. 2. Ye or you will have loved. He will have loved. 3. They will have loved. Singular. I loved. Thou lovedst. He loved. Singular. I have loved. Thou hast loved. He hath or has loved. I had loved. Thou hadst loved. He had loved. Imperative Mood. Singular. PluraL 1. Let me love. 1. Let us love. 2. Love thou, or do thou love. 2. Lore ye or you, or do ye 1ot«. 3. Let him love. 3. Let them love> Potential Mood, PRB8BNT TBNSB. 1. We may or can love. 2. Ye or you may or can love 3. They may or can love. Singular. I may or can love. Thou mayst or canst love. He may or can love. IMFBRFBCT TBN8B. Singular. PhtraL I might, could, would, or should 1. We might, could, wo&ld, ar love. should love. Thou mightst, couldst, wouldst, 2, Ye or you might, could, would, or shouldst love. or should love. He might, could, would, or should 3. Thry might, could, would, or love. should love. XXXVIJI ENGLISH GRAMMAR. PERFECT TENSE. Singular, Plural. 1. I may or can have loved. 1. We may or can have loved. ■L Thou may st or canst have loved. 2. Ye or you may or can have loved. i. He may or can have loved. 3. They may or can have loved. PLUPERFECT TENSE. Singular. Plural. 1. I might, could, would, or should 1. We might, could, would, or should have loved. have loved. 2. Thou mightst, couldst, wouldst, 2. Ye or you might, could, would, or or shouldst have loved. should have loved. 3. He might, could, would, or should 3. They might, could, would, or have loved. should have loved. Subjunctive Mood. PRESENT TENSE. Singular, 1. If I love. 2. If thou love. 3. If he love. Plu^ral. 1. If we love. 2. If ye or you love. 3. If they love. The remahiing tenses of this mood are, in general, similar to the correspondent tenses of the indicative mood. Infinitive Mood. Presmt, To love. Perfect, To have loved. Participles. Present, Loving. Perfect, Loved. Compound Perfect, Having loved. PASSIVE. Verbs passive are called regular when they form their perfect participle by the addition of d or ed to the verb ; as, from the verb to love is formed the jjassive, / am loved, I was loved, I shall he loved, &c. A passive verb is conjugated by adding the ))erfect participle to the auxiUary verb to he, through all its changes of number, person, mood, and tense, in the following manner : — TO BE LOVED. Indicative Mood. PRESENT TENSE. Singular, 1. I am loved. 2. Thou art loved. 3. He is loved. Singular. 1. I was loved. 2. Thou wast loved. 3. He was loved. Plural. 1. We are loved. 2. Ye or you are loved. 3. They are loved. IMPERFECT TENSE. Plural. 1. We were loved. 2. Ye or you were loved. 3. They were loved. PERFECT TENSE Singular. 1. I have been loved. 2. Thou hast been loved. 3. He has or hath been loved. Plural. 1. We have been loved. 2. Ye or you have been loved. 3. They have been loved. PLUPERFECT TENSE. Singular. 1. I had been loved. 2. Thou hadst been loved 3. He had been loved. Plural. 1. We had been loved. 2. Ye or you had been loved. 3 They had been ioved. FIRST FUTURE TENSE. Singular. Plural. 1. I shall or will be loved. 1. We shall or will be loved. 2. Thou Shalt or wilt be loved. 2. Ye or you shall or will be loved 3. He shall or will be loved. 3. They shall or will be loved. SECOND FUTURE TENSE. Singular. Plural. 1. I shall have been loved. 1. We shall have been loved. 2. Thou wilt have been loved. 2. Ye or you will have been loved. 3. He will have been loved. 3. They wiU have been loved. Imperative Mood. Singular. Plural. 1. Let me be loved. 1. Let us be loved. 2. Be thou loved, or do thou be 2. Be ye or you loved, or dc ye be loved. loved. 3. Let him be loved. , 3. Let them be loved. Potential Mood. PRESENT TENSE. Singular. Plural. 1. I may or can be loved. 1. We may or can be loved. 2. Thou mayst or canst be loved. 2. Ye or you may or can be loved. 3. He may or can be loved. 3. They may or can be loved. IMPERFECT TENSE. Singular. * Plural. 1. I might, could, would, or should 1. We might, could, would, or should be loved. be loved. 2. Thou mightst, couldst, wouldst, 2. Ye or you might, could, would, or shouldst be loved. or should be loved. 3. He might, could, would, or should 3. They might, could, would, or be loved. should be loved. PERFECT TENSE. Singular. Plural. • 1. I may or can have been loved. 1. We may or can have been loved. 2. Thou mayst or canst have been 2. Ye or you may or can have been loved. loved. 3. He may or can have been loved. 3. They may or can have been loved- PLUPERFECT TENSE. Singular. Plural. 1. I might, could, would, or should 1. We might, could, would, or should have been loved have been loved. 2. Thou mightst, couldst, wouldst, 2. Ye or you might, could, would, or or shouldst have been loved. should have been loved. 3. He might, could, would, or should 3. They might, could, would, or have been loved. should have been loved. Subjunctive Mood. PRESENT TENSE. Singular. 1. If I be loved. 2. If thou be loved. 3. If he be loved. Singular. 1. If I were loved. 2. If thou wert loved. 3. If he were loved. Plural. 1. If we be loved. 2. If ye or you be loved. 3. If they be loved. IMPERFECT TENSE. Plural. 1. If we were loved. 2. If ye or you were loved. 3. If they were loved. The remaining tenses of this mood are, in general, similar to the correspondent tenses of the indicative mood. Infinitive Mood. Present, To be loved. Perfect, To have been loved. Participles, Present, Being loved. Perfect, Been loved. Compound Perfect, Having been loved. THE PARTICIPLE.— THE INTEIUECTION. THE PARTICIPLE. XX2aZ The participle ^19,, by some grammarians, considered as a distinct part of speech, and by others it is regarded only as a fonn of the verb. It is derived from the verb, and partakes of the signification and properties of the verb. It is an adjective form of the verb, and, hke an adjective, belongs to a noun ; and it signifies doing, being, or suffering, without affirming any thing. It becomes a noun by pre- fixing to it the definite article the. — There are three participles : the present, ending in iiig, as moving ; the ])erfect, past, or passive, endhig (if the verb is regular) in ed, as moved ; and the compound perfect, as having moved. The particijjle in ing, though properly and generally active, is some- times used in a jjassive sense ; as, " Forty and six years was this temple in building." John ii. 20. — " Wliile the ark was a preparing. 1 Peter iii. 20. — " The nation had cried out loudly against the crime while it was committing." Bolingbroke. — " My Lives are reprinting." Johnson. — Dr. Johnson, in the Grammar prefixed to his Dictionarj', remarks, with resi)ect to this use of the present participle, " There is a manner of using the active participle which gives it a passive signifi- cation ; as, ' The Grammar is now pnnting ; ' ' The brass is forging.'' This, in my opinion, is a vicious expression, probably corrupted from a ])lirase more pure, but now somewhat obsolete : * The book is o printing ; ' ' The brass is a forging ; ' a being jtroperly at, and printing and forging verbal nouns, signifyuig action, according to the analogy of this language." Although Johnson thus censured this use of the participle in ing, yet he afterwards made use of it himself in the instance above cited. Within a few years, as a substitute for both of the above forms, a neologism has been introduced, by which the present poMsire parti- ciple is substituted, m such cases a& the above, for the iiorticiplc in ing ; and in the above eximples, instead of *♦ in buHdiug," " a prc- pating," " was committing," and " are repritUitig," Uie modem innovators would say, •• in being built," " being prepart-d," " traa being committed," " are being reprinted." Thin new form ba« I ccn used by some respectable writers, as in the following instances : " For those who are being educated in our seminaries." Ii. Southey. — "It voas being uttered." Coleridge. — "The foundation was being laid." Brit. Critic. — The Eclectic Reriew remarks, "That a need of this phrase, or an equivalent one, is felt, is sufficiently proved by the extent to which it is used by educated persons and resjiectable writers." This phrase, styled by Abp. Whately " uncouth English," has been censured by various grammarians and critics. — "It [leivpuhoi] signifies properly, though in uncouth English, one who is being beaten." Abp. Whately. — " The bridge is being built, and other phrases of the like kind, have pained the eye." D. Ilooth. — "The phrase ' is being built,' and others of similar kind, have been, for a few years back, insinuating themselves into our language ; still they are not English." M. Harrison's Rise, I*rogress, atul Presaii Structure of the English Language. — " ' ITie house is being built.* — This mode of expression is becoming quite common. It is liable, however, to several important objections. It appears formal and pedantic. — It has not, so far as I know, the support of any res|)ccta- ble gi-ammarian. — The easy and natural expression is, ' The house is buUding:" Prof. J. W. Gibbt. THE ADVERB. An adverb is a word added to a verb, an adjective, and sometimes i very correctly." A great many ad^•erb8 are formed from adjecti^-es to another adverb, to exjjress some quaUty or circumstance respecting by the addition of ly, or by changing « to y ; as, wise, wisely ; nobUt it ; as, " He writes well ; " " A truly excellent scholar ; " " He speaks ' nobly. THE CONJUNCTION. The conjunction is a part of speech, or a particle, which connects 1 copulative and disjunctive; but there are other divisions gix-en by H'ords and sentences together ; consisting princi])ally of two sorts, I many grammarians, as adversative, causal, illative, &c. THE INTERJEC^nON. An interjectiott is a word used to express some aHection or emotion of the mind. EiVGLISH GRAMMAE. THE PREPOSITION. Prepositions show the relations between words, and are generally placed before nouns and pronouns in the objective case. There are many nouns, adjectives, verbs, and participles, which are followed by their appropriate prepositions; and there are instances in which it is a matter of some difficulty to determine what preposition is most suitable to be used. A LIST OF WORDS WITH THE PROPER PREPOSITION ANNEXED. A. Abandoned to. Abate of. Abhorrence of. Abhorrent to, from. Abide in, at, iaith, by. Abominable to. Abound in, tmth. Abridge of, from. Ahsent fivm. Abstain from. Abstinence from. Abut on, upon. Accede to. Acceptable to. Access to. Accessory to. Accommodate to. with. Accompanied by, with. Accord, *. «. vritk ; v. a. to. Accordance with. According to. Account of, for, to. Accountable to a person ;for a thing. Accuse of, by. Acquaint wit?t. Acquaintance toith. Acquiesce iiu Acquit of. Adapted^o. Add to. Address to. Adequate to. Adhere to. Adjacent to. Adfoum to, at, for. Adjudge to. Adjust to. Admonish of, by, aaainst. Admission (access) to ; (en- trance) into. Admit of Advantage over, of. Advise of, to. Advocate ^or. Affection /or. Affinity to, loith, between. Agree tenth a person ; to things proposed ; upon things or conditions. Agreeable to. Aim at. Alienate yVow. Allude to. Alteration in. Ambitious of to. Amenable to. Analogous to. Analogy to, between. Angry vnth a person; ai a thing. Annex to, Animadvert on, upon. Answer /br, to. Antecedent to. Antipathy to, against. Anxious about. Apologize /or. Apology /or. Appeal to. Appertain to. Applicable to. Apply «o. Apprehensive of. Appropriate to. Approve of. Argue wifh, against. Array with, in. Arrive at. Ask cf a person; for or after a person or thing. Aspire to. Assent to. Assimilate to. Associate tpith. Assure of. Astonished at. Atone for. Attached to. Attain to. Attend to. Attentive to. Averse to, from. Aversion to, from. B. Ballot /or. Banish /rom. Bare of. Bargam ybr. Bear up, upon, with^ Beguile of. Believe i?i, on. Belong to. Bereave of Bestow on, upon. Betray to a person; into a thing. Betroth to. Bigoted to. Bind to, in, up, Ujj^ 'Bla.me for. Blush at. Boast of. Border on, t^ton. Brag of. C. Call on, upon, at, for ; — on a person ; at a house. Capable of. Care for, to. Careful of, for. Careless of, about. Carp at. Catch at, up. Caution aaainst. Certify of Change /or, vnth. Charge on or against a per- son ; with a thing. Clear of Coalesce with. Coincide with. Commune with. Commit to. Communicate to, with. Compare to, in respect to quality ; with, by way of illustration. Compelled to. Compliance with. Comply with. Composed of. Concede to. Conceive of. Concerned a<,_/br. Concur vnth, in, on, to. Condemn to. Condescend to. Conduce to. Confer on, upon. Confide in. Conform to. Conformable to. Conformity to. Congenial to, with. Congratulate on, upon. Connect with. Conscious of. Consecrate to. Consent to. Consign to. Consist of, in, vnth. Consistent with. Consonant to. Consult with. Contend with, against. Contest loith. Contiguous to. Contrast with. Contrary to. Conversant in, with, about. Convert to, into. Convict of. Convince of. Copy from, after. Correspond to, with. Correspondence to, with. Correspondent to. Covenant with, for. Cure of. D. Dash against, upon. Deal in, by, with. Debar of, from. Decide on, upon. Defend agaiiist,from. Deficiency of. Deficient in. Defraud of. Demand of. Denoimce against a person ; on a thing. Depend on, upon. Dependent on, upon. Deprive of. Derogate /rom. Derogation /rom, to. Derogatory to. Descendedyrom. Deserving of. Desirous of. Desist from. Despair of. Despoil of. Destined to. Destitute of. Detach from. Detract /row. Deviate"_/"row. Devolve on, upon. Devote to. Dictate to. Die of 3i disease ; by the sword or famine ; for another. Differ with a person in opin- ion ; from a person or thing m some quality. Di fferent from. Difficulty in. Diminish from. Diminution of. Disabledyrowi. Disagree with, to. Disagreeable to. Disappointed of a thing not obtained; in a thing ob- tained. Disapprove of. Discourage yrom. Discouragement to. Disengaged/roTW. Disgusted at, with. DisUke to. Dismission /ro/w. Disparagement to. Dispense with. Dispose of, to, for. Dispossess of. Dispute with. Disqualify /or, /row. Dissatisfied with. Dissent from. Distinct from. Distinguish/rowi, between. Distrustful of. Divested of. Divide between two ; among many. Dote on. Doubt of, about. Dwell in, at, on. E. Eager in, for, after. Embark in, for. Embellished iotYA. Emerge from. Employ in, on, upon, about. Emulous of Enamoured of. Encounter with. Encouragement to. Encroach on, upon. Endeared to. Endeavor after. Endowed with. Endued with. Engage in, with, for. Enjoin on, upon. Enter on, upon, into. Entrance on, upon, into. Envious of, at. Equal to, with. Equivalent to. Espouse to. Estimated at. Estranged from. Exception from, to, against. Excluded from. Exclusive of. Expelled/ro>n. Expert in, at. Exposed to. Expressive of. F. Fall under, on, upon, from. Familiar to, with. Fawn on, upon. Fearful of. Feed on, upon. Fight with, against, for. Filled with. Fond of. Fondness /or. Foreign to, from. Founded on or upon a basis ; in truth. Free from. Friendly to. Frightened at. Frown at, upon. Fruitful in, of. Full of. Furnished with. G. Give to. Glad of, at. Glance at, upon. Glow with. Grapple with. Grateful to a person ; for favor. Greedy of, after. Grieve at, for. Guard against. Guilty of. H. Hanker after. Happen to, on. Healed of Hinder from. Hiss at. Hold in, of, on. I. Ignorant of. Immersion in. Impatient at, for, of. Impenetrable by, to. Impervious to. Impose 071, upon. Inaccessible to. Incapable of. Incentive to. Incorporate into, with^ Inconsistent with. Inculcate on, upon. Independent of on. Indirferent to. Indulge with, in. Indulgent to. Influence over, vnth, on. Inform of, about, concerning. Initiate into, in. Initiation into. Inquire of, after, for, about. Inroad m^o. Insensible to, of. Inseparable from. Insinuate into. Insist on, upon. Inspection into, over. Instruct in. Insult orer. Intent oti, upon. Interfere with. Intermeddle with. Intervene between. Intimate with. Introduce into, in. Intrude on, upon, into. Inured to. THE PREPOSITION. Xll Invested tciih. ^ Irritated against or 6y a per- ) sun ; at ox by a, thing. , Jealous of. Jeer at. Juin with, to. K. Knock at, on. Known to. L Laden with. Land at. Laugh at. Lean on, upon, against. Level with. Liberal to, of. Liken to. Live in, at, with, on, upon. Loaded with. Long for, after. Lord ocer. M. Made of. Marry Vo^tctVA. Meddle with. Mediate between. Meditate on, upon. Meet, v., with. Militate aijainst. Mingle with. Minister to. Mistrustful of. Mix with. N. Necessary to, for. Need of. Neglectful of. Negotiate with. Obedient to. Object to, againat. Observant of Observation" of. Obtrude on, upon. Obvious to. Ottend againat. Offensive to. Offer to. Operate on. Opposite to. Overwhelmed with, by. P. Parcel ottt. Parlej[ with. Part /row, with. Partake of. Partial to. Partiality to, for. Participate in, of. Patient with, of, under. Pay, /or. Peculiar to. Penet.ate into. Pers\ivere in. Per'ain to. Pi'.ch upon, on. P'.ay on, upon, with. Vleasant to. Pleased with. Plunge into. Possessed of. Pounce on, upon. Pour on, upon, into. Pray for, with. Predisposed to. Prefer to, before, above. Preferable io. Preference to, over, above, before. Prefix to. Prejudice against. Prejudicial to. Prepare for. Preserve from. Preside over. Press 071, upon. Presume on, upon. Pretend to. Prevail on, upon, with fto persuade), over, againtl (to overcome). Prevent from. Previous to. Prey on, upon. Prior to. Productive of. Profit Ay. Profitable to. Prone to. Pronounce against a person ; on a thing. Propose to. Protect others from, our- selves against. Protest against. Proud of. Provide with, for, against. Purge of, from. Pursuance of. Pursuant to. Q. Quarrel with. Quarter on, upon. Questioned on, upon, by. R. Rail at. Reckon on, upon, with. Recline on, upon. Reconcile to, with. Recover from. Reduce to, under. Refer to. Reflect 071, upon. Refrain from. Regard for, to, ReioiceW, in. Relate to. Release from. Relieve from. Relish for, of. Rely on, upon. Remain in, at. Remark on, upon. Remit to. Remonstrate tenth a person ] against a thing. Remove from. Repent ing assumed substantially its present form, as ex- hibited in the works of Sidney, Spenser, Hooker, Shakesi)eare, Ra- leigh, and Bacon. But the writings of several of the reformers previ- ous to the reign of Elizabeth, as Tyndale (the translator of the New Testament), Cranmer, Latimer, &c., attracted much attention. The works of Sir Thomas More, as Ben Jonson tells us, " were considered as models of pure and elegant style ; " and according to Mr. Hallam, his " History of Richard HI. is the first example of good English language ; pure and perspicuous, well chosen, without vulgarisms or pedantry." The following statement respecting the changes which took place in the language spoken by the inhabitants of England is given by Mr. Craik. — The first century after the conquest, during the reigns of William I., William II., Henry L, and Stephen, may be called the infancy of English ; the second centurj-, during the reigns of Henry n., Richard I., John, and Henry HI., the childhood ; the third century, during the reigns of Edward I., Edward II., and Edward IH., the boyhood ; and from that period (1377) to the l)eginning of the reign of Elizabeth (1558), the youth ; — then commenced the manhood. Mr. Hippisley, in his " Chapters on Early English Literature," says : " Although neither the origin nor subsequent progress of English can be assigned to any specified dates, yet, for the sake of perspicuity, we may (as in the case of general histor)') establish arbitrary and conventional divisions. Thus we say, generally speaking, that about 1150 may be dated the decline of pure Saxon; about 1250 the commencement of English; and that the century between these two dates was occupied by a kind of Semi-Saxon language." After the Norman conquest, the Saxon laws were continued in force, and were translated into Norman-French. " The proceedings," as stated by Blackstone (Commentaries, Book IH. chap. 21), " were all written, as indeed all public proceedings were, in Norman or law French, and even the arguments of the counsel and the decisions of the court were in the same bariwroas dialect. This continued till the reign of Edward HI., who, having employed his arms successfully in subduing the croien of France, thought it unbecoming the dignity of the >ictors to use any longer the language of a x-anquished country. By a statute, therefore, passed in the 36th year of his reign [1362J, it was enacted, that, for the future, all pleas should be pleaded, shown, defended, answered, debated, and judged, in the English tongue, but be entered and enrolled in Latin." This is the date of the tri- umph of the English language over the French in the English courU of law. " The Saxon power," Dr. Bosworth remarits, " ceased when William the Conqueror ascended the throne, but not the language ; for Anglo- Saxon, after rejecting or changing many of its inflections, continued to be sjwken by the old inliabitants till the time of Henrj- HL, A. D. 125a What was written after this period has generally so great xlvi ORIGIN, FORMATION, AND ETYMOLOGY a resemblance to our present language, that it may evidentlj' be called English." In the fourteenth century flourished Sir John Mandeoille [ob. 1372], the traveller, whose Travels, which ajjpeared in 1356, formed the first English work in prose; John Wickliffe, the reformer [ob. 1384], Avho, with the aid of some of his followers, translated the Bible into English, though the whole translation, including both Testaments, was not printed till 1850 ; and Geoffrey Chaucer [ob. 1400], the great early English poet, author of many works in poetry and prose, (the most celebrated of which are the " Canterbury Tales,") who exerted a greater influence on the early state of the language than any other writer, and who introduced many words from the French. " But though [Edinburgh Review, vol. cxii.] the importations from the French are large, relative to the like element of such writers as Mandeville and Wickliffe, they are not such as defraud his works of the praise of Spenser's celebrated eulogy, that in them is to be found ' the well of English undefiled.' " But the times, long after the age of Chaucer, continued barbarous, and, till after the invention of printing and the revival of learning, few writers of any distinction appeared to cultivate and improve the language, or to enrich it with valuable works. — In 1471, the art of printing was introduced into England by WiUiam Caxton, who was one of the most considerable writers in the language between the time of Chaucer and the Reformation. SPECIMENS OF EARLY ENGLISH. A Proclamation of Henry III. to the people of Huntingdonshire, A. D. 1258. " It currently passes for the earliest specimen of Eng- lish." — Latham. " Henry, thurg Godes fultome, King on Engleneloande, Ihoaurd on Yrloand, Duke on Normand, on Acquitain, Eorl on Anjou, send I greting, to alle hise holde, ilserde & ilewerde on Huntingdonschiere. " That witen ge well alle, thaet we willen & unnen tha;t ure raedes- men alle other, the moare del of heom, thajt beoth ichosen thurg us and thurg thset loandes-folk on ure Kuneriche, habbith idon, and schullen don, in the worthnes of God, and ure threowthe, for the freme of the loande, thurg the besigte of than toforen iseide rajdes- men, beo stedfa^st and ilestinde in alle thinge abutan ajnde, and we heaten alle ure treowe, m the treowthe tha>t heo us ogen, thet heo stede-feslliche healden & weren to healden & to swerien the isetnesses thet beon makede and beo to makien, thurg than toforen iseide ra?desraen, other thurg the moare del of heom alswo, alse hit is before iseide. And thet aehcother helpe thet for to done bitham ilohe other, aganes alle men in alle thet heo ogt for to done, and to foangen. And noan ne of mine loande, ne of egetewhere, thurg this besigte, muge beon ilet other iwersed on oniewise. And gif oni ether onie cumen her ongenes, we willen & heaten, thait alle ure treowe heom healden deadlichistan And for thait we willen thset this beo standfast and lestinde, we senden gew this writ open, iseined with lire seel, to halden amanges gew ine hord. Witnes us-selven tet Lundsen, tha?ne egetetenthe day on the monthe of Octobr, in the two and fowertigthe geare of ure crunning." A literal translation of this Proclamation, taken from Henry's His- tory of Great Britain, vol. viiL " Henry, through God's support, king of England, lord of Ireland, duke of Normandy, of Acquitain, earl of Anjou, sends greeting, to all his subjects, learned and unlearned, of Huntington-shire. — This knew ye well all, that we will and grant, what our counsellors all or the more part of them that be chosen through us and through the land-folk of our kingdom, have done, and shall do, to the honor of God, and our allegiance, for the good of the land, through the de- termination of those before said counsellors, be steadfast and perma- nent in aU things without end, and we enjom all our lieges, by the allegiance that they owe us, that they steadfastly hold and swear to hold and to maintain the ordinances that be made and be to be made, through the before said counsellors, or through the more part of them also, as it is before said. And that each other help that for to do by them each other, against all men, in all that they ought for to do, and to promote. And none either of my land, nor of elsewhere, through this business, may be imi)eded or damaged in any way. And if any man or any woman cometh against them, we will and enjoin that all our lieges hold them deadly foes. And for that Ave will that this be steadfast and lasting, we send you this writ open, sealed \n\h our seal, to keep amongst you in store. Witness ourself at London, the eighteenth day of the month of October, in the two-and-fortieth year of our crowning." An extract from Sir John Mandeville's Travels. " And I John Maundevylle knyghte aboveseyd, (alle thoughe I be unworthi,) that departed from oure contrees and passed the see, che zeer of grace 1322, that have passed manye londes and manye yles and contrees, and cerched manye fulle straunge places, and haue ben in manye a fulle gode honourable companye, and at many a faire dede of armes, (alle be it that I dide none myself, for myn unable insuffisance,) now I am comen hom (mawgree my self) to reste: for gowtes, artetykes, that me distreynen, tho diffynen the ende of my labour, azenst my wille (God knowethe.) And thus takynge solace of my wrecched reste, recordynge the tyme passed, I have fulfilled theise thinges and putte hem wryten in this boke, as it wolde come into my mjiide, the zeer of grace 1356 in the 34 zeere that I departede from oure contrees. Wherefore I preye to alle the rederes and hereres of this boke, zif it plese hem, that thei wolde prejen to God for me : and I schalle preye for hem. And alle tho that seyn for me a Pater noster, with an Ave Maria, that God forzeve me my synnes, I make hem partneres and graunte hem part of alle the gode pilgrimages, and of alle the gode dedes that I have don, zif ony be to his plesance : and noghte only of tho, but of alle that evere I schalle do unto my lyfes ende. And I beseche Almyghty God, fro whom alle godenesse and grace cometh fro, that he vouchesaf, of his excellent mercy and habundant grace, to fulle fiUe hire soules with inspiracioun of the Holy Gost, in makjTige defence of alle hire gostly enemyes here in erthe, to hire salvacioun, bothe of body and soule ; to worschipe and thankjnge of him, that is three and on, withouten begjnnynge and withouten endynge ; that is withouten quahtee, good, and withouten quantytee, gret ; that in alle places is present, and alle thinges con- tenynynge ; the whiche that no goodnesse may amende, ne non evelle empeyre; that in perfeyte trynytee lyvethe and regnethe God, be alle worldes and be all tymes. Amen, Amen, Amen." An extract from Caxton's translation of the renowned apologue of the Middle Age, entitled " The Hystorye of Reynart the Foxe." Caxton says, " I have not added, ne mynusshed, but have followed as nyghe as I can, my copye, whjche was in Dutche [German], and by me William Caxton translated into this rude and symple Englyssh, in thabbey of Westmestre (1481)." " How the Lyon, kynge of alle bestis, sent out his mandementis that alle beestis sholde come to his feest and court. " It was about the tyme of Penthecoste or Wh}-tsontyde, that the wodes comynly be lusty and gladsom, and the trees clad with levys and blossome, and the ground with herbes and flowris swete-smelhjTig, and also the fowles and byrdes sj-ngen melodyously in theyr armourye, that the Lyon, the noble kynge of all beestis wolde in the holy dayes of thys feest holde an open court at Stade, whyche he dyde to know over alle his land, and commanded by his strayte commyssyons and maundements that every beest shold come thyder, in such wj-se that alle the beestis grete and smale cam to the courte, sauf Reynard the Foxe, for he knewe hymself fawty and gylty in many thj-nges agenst OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. xlvii many beestis that tliyder sholde comen, that he durste not aventure tf) go thyder whan the kynge of alle beestis had assembled allc his court, ther was none of them alle but that he had complayned sore of Reynart the Foxe," The Saxon or Anglo-Saxon language, which is a branch of the I'eutonic, the language of the Teutones, a people who inhabited a large part of Central Europe, while the Celts overspread the west, is the parent language of the English. Some of the other north Euro- pean languages, of the great Teutonic or Gotho-Teutonic family, which have contributed to enrich the English tongue, are the Danish, Swedish, Norwegian, and Icelandic, of the Scandinavian branch, and the German and Dutch, of the Germanic branch. The south Em-o- jjcan languages, wliich have furnished the largest contributions, are the Greek, Latin, and French; especially the Latin, through the medium of the French or Norman-French ; also the Italian, the SjKinish, and various other languages, have afforded more or less. "Suppose," says Dr. Trench ("English Past and Present"), "the English language to be di^^ded into a hmidred parts ; of these, to make a rough distribution, sixty would be Saxon, thirty would be Latin (including of course the Latin which has come to us through the French), five would be Greek ; we should then have assigned ninety-five parts, leaving the other five, perhaps too lai'ge a residue, to be divided among all the other languages from which we have adopted isolated words." The Anglo-Saxon is the language to which the English owes its general form and structure, all the particles on which its syntax depends, all its pronouns and conjunctions, nearly all its prepositions, most of its monosyllables, and, indeed, all the words that are most frequently repeated on the same page. " The Anglo-Saxon," says Dr. Trench, " is not so much one element of the English language, as the foundation of it, — the basis. All its jomts, its whole articu- lation, its sinews and its ligaments, the great body of articles, pro- nouns, conjunctions, prepositions, numerals, auxiliary verbs, all smaller words which serve to knit together and bind the larger into sentences, -- these, not to speak of the grammatical structure of the language, are exclusively Saxon. The Latin language may contribute its tale of bricks, yea, of goodly and polished hewTi stones, to the spiritual building; but the mortar, with all that holds and binds these together, and constitutes them into a house, is Saxon throughout." The predominance of Anglo-Saxon will readily be seen by analyzing a passage in any common English writer. Of the sixty-six words which are comprised in the authorized English version of the Lord's prayer, there are only five that are not Anglo-Saxon. Mr. Sharon Turner, in his "History of the Anglo-Saxons," has adduced from popular English writers sixteen extracts, in which he has discrimi- nated, by Italics, the words which are Anglo-Saxon from those of foreign origin. Two of his extracts are here quoted, and also the results of the comparisons of all of them are given. The words wliich are not Anglo-Saxon are in Italics in the following extracts : — " And they made ready the present against Joseph came at noon ; for tliey heard that they should eat bread there. And when Joseph came home, they brought him the present which was in their hand into the house, and bowed themselves to him to the earth. And he asked them of their welfare, and said. Is your father well, the old man of whom ye spake ? Is he yet alive ? And they answered, Thy sercant our father is in good health, he is yet alive. And they bowed down their heads, and made obeisance. And he lift up liis eyes, and saw liis brother Benjamin, his mother's son, and said. Is this yom- younger brother, of whom ye spake mito me ? And he said, God be gracious unto thee, my son." — Gen. xliiL 25-29. " Of genius, that power which constitutes a poet ; that quality without which judgment is cold and knowledge is inert ; that energy Woidt. Not Saun, . 128 b 74 . 2 . 72 . 14 83 . 13 . 89 . 16 77 . 10 . 78 . 14 79 . 15 . 94 . 20 83 . 27 . 96 . 21 90 . 10 . 113 . 34 101 . 37 . 79 . 32 81 . 21 Total, 1427 291 wliich collects, combines, arnplijies, and nnimaUt ; the superiority must, with some hesitation, be allowed to Itryden. It in not to l.e inferred, that of this poetical vigor Pope had only a Lttle, because Dryden had more; for every other writer Bince Milion muni give place to Pope ; and even of Dryden it must be aaid, that if be has brighter paragi-aphs, he has not better 7>«tract; — ad, a, ac, af, ag, al, an, ap, ar, as, at, to; as, adduce, accede, a/'fix, &c. ; — ante, before ; as, antecedent ; — circum, about ; as, circwTwjacent ; — con, co, cog, col, com, cor, together, with ; as, conform, coeval, coZlect, &c. ; — contra, against; as, contradict; — de, down, irom ; as, deface, degrade ; — dis, asunder ; as, disarm ; — e, ex, out of; as, q'ect, exclude; — extra, beyond; as, exirojudicial ; — in, ig, il. im, ir (when prefixed to a verb), in ; as indue ; (when prefixed to an adjective), not ; as, invisible ; — inter; between ; as, intermix ; — intro, within ; as, introduce ; — ob, oc, of, op, for, in the way of; as, oftject, occur ; — per, through ; as, joervade ; — post, after ; as, postscript ; — pre, before ; as, /^recede ; — preter, beyond ; as, /ireiematural ; — pro, for, forward; as, /jroconsul ; — re, back, again ; as, return, rebuild ■ — retro, backward : as, retrospect ; — se, 9 aside ; as, secede ; — sine, without ; as, «n«cure ; — *u6, tue, auf, svg, sup, sus, under, after ; as, «u6dran, #M/*fice, mi^rgest, ^^plant, su«i)ect ; — super, above ; as, su//e;-aljound, supernatural ; — trans, beyond ; as, transcend ; — ultra, beyond ; as, u/^romarine. The following terminations are derived from the Latin or French : able, ible, cle. He, ial, al, ian, an, ant, eiU, fy, lar, Uy, or, out, Hon, tive, tude, ture. To the Greek the English language is indebted for most of the terms in physical science, and, indeed, for a great part of the termi employed in all the arts and sciences. The following are Oreek prefixes : a (a), without; as, acephalous; — amphi {dfitpl), about, on both sides ; as, amphitheatre ; — ana (ivi.), through, again; as, anabaptist; — anti ((i«'i/), against; as, an/ichristian; — apo {in6), from; as, opostate; — caia (xai<4), down, from side to side ; as, cahed in 1720, thus notices the work of Kersey : " The best dictionary that I know for this purpose [spelHng] is entitled ' A New LLnglish Dictionary,' &c., by J. K. The second edition, 1713, in small octavo." After Kersey's, and soon after 1720, appeared the celebrated Dictionai-y of Nathan Bailey, which was the first English dictionary in which an attempt was made to give a complete coUectioa of the words of the language. Mr. Watt, in his " Bibliotheca Britannica," thus notices this work : " Bailey's English Dictionar}-, printed in 1728, (fourth edition,) was long tlie only one in use, and still continues a favorite with many readers. It was afterwards enlarged into two voliunes 8vo., and some years after printed in foho, with additions in the mathematical ])art by G. Gordon, in the botanical by Philip Miller, and in the etymological by T. Lediard ; the whole re\T8ed [1764] by Dr. Joseph Nicol Scott, a physician. The octavo [24th edition] was revised by Dr. Ilarwood, 17-K2." A part of the long title of the first volume of tlie edition of 1728 is as follows : " An Universal Etymological English Dictionar)- ; com- prehending the Derivations of the Generahty of Words in th* English Tongue, either Ancient or Modern, firom the Ancient British. Saxon, Danish, Norman and Modem French, Teutonic, Dutch, Span- ish, Italian ; as also from the Latin, Greek, and Hebrew Languages, each in their proper Characters ; and also a clear Exphcation of all difficult Words derived from any of the a.'bresaid Languages ; . . . containing many thousand Words more than either Harris, Pliilhps, Kersey, or any EngUsh Dictionary before extant" The second vol- ume was first published in 1727, as a supjilement to the first ; and it consists of two parts : — " L An Additional Collection of some Thousands of AVords not in the former Volume. U. Att Ortho- graphical Dictionary, showing both the Orthc^raphy and Orthoepia of the English Tongue." In his Preface to the first volume, Bailey says, "As for the «fy- mological part, or those words from foreign languages, whence the English words were derived, I think I am the first who has attempted it in EngUsh, except what Mr. Blunt has done in his ' Glossography,' which is but a very smaU part, and those of a Latin derivation chieflvt besides a small extract of Dr. Skinner's ' Etymologicon.' " In his Introduction to the second volume, he remarks, " I have placed an accent over that syllable on which a particular stress or force of sound is to be laid by the voice in pronouncing." This appears to be the first instance in which any such aid to pronunciation was furnished in an EngUsh dictionary. The jxirta of speech were not noted in thia nor in any previous English dictionary. This lexicographer, who was a schoolmaster at Stepney, was the author of several other works, among which were the " Dictionarium Domesiicum, or a Household Dictionary," and " An Introduction to the EngUsh Tongue ; " and he was the editor of several classical au- thors for the use of schools. He died, as it is stated in the " Gentle- man's Magazine," in 1742. The following remarks are extracted from the Enc\ clopn-dia Perthensis : " It is somewhat surprising that, though this work [Bailey's Dictionary] is universaUy known, baring gone through at least twenty-six editions sine* the first edition, dedicated in Latin to Frederick Prince of Wales, and his royal sisters, (his majesty's [George III.] father and aunts,) was published, yet no ao- Ivi HISTORY OF ENGLISH LEXICOGRAPHY. I count whatever has hitherto been ^ven of the learned and laborious author, who excelled Dr. Johnson himself, in industry at least, by introducing a far greater number of words, in his small work of one volume 8vo., than the doctor has inserted in both his volumes foho. We have searched in vain for an account of this learned lexicogra- pher." — In reference to the above compaiison of the number of words found in the dictionaries of Bailey and Johnson, it may be remarked, that Johnson omitted many words that are in Bailey's Dictionary, because they were not in use ; but he inserted many not found in it. He speaks of " the deficiencies of dictionaries," with re- spect to the number of words, and says, he " has much augmented the vocabulary." Dyche's Dictionary, a work in one volume 8vo., " originally begun by the Rev. Thomas Dyche, and finished by William Pardon," has had an extensive circulation in England. The seventh edition was published in 1752, ?.nd the sixteenth in 1777. This statement seems hardly consistent with the remark of Watt, above quoted, that Bailey's Dictionary " was long the only one in use." Benjamin Martin, an ingenious man, and the author of several publications on scientific and philosophical subjects, published a dictionary of considerable merit. The first edition was printed in 1749 ; the second, in 1754. In 1747, Dr. Johnson published a "Plan for a Dictionary of the English Language," addressed to the Earl of Chesterfield ; and soon afterwards he made a contract with some eminent London book- sellers for performing the labor of preparing the work, for the sum of £1,575. The following account of his method of proceeding is given by Sir John Hawkins : " He had, for the purpose of carrying on this arduous work, and being near the printers employed in it, taken a handsome house in Gough Square, and fitted up a room in it with desks and other accommodations for amanuenses, whom, to the num- ber of five or six, he kept constantly under his eye. An interleaved copy of Bailey's Dictionary in foUo, he made the repository of the several articles, and these he collected by incessant reading the best authors in our language, in the practice whereof his method was to score with a black-lead pencil the words by him selected, and give them over to his assistants to insert in their places. The books he used for this purpose were what he had in his own collection, a copi- ous but a miserably ragged one, and all such as he could boiTow ; which latter, if ever they came back to those that lent them, were so defaced as to be scarce worth owning ; and yet some of his friends were glad to receive and entertain them as curiosities." Johnson, who is styled, by Dr. A. B. Evans, " the great captain of EngUsh lexicography," completed his task, after seven years' arduous labor, in 1755 ; and it is justly regarded as one of the greatest liter- ary achievements ever jjerformed by any man within the same space of time. In a notice of the work in the " Gentleman's Magazine " for April, 1755, just after its publication, the following language is used : " Let not any one attempt to withhold the honor which is due to him who alone has effected, in seven years, what the joint labor of forty academicians could not produce in a neighboring nation in less than half a century." The publication of this Dictionary formed a greater era in the history of the language than that of any other work. No other dictionary has had so much influence in fixing the external form of the language, and ascertaining and settling the meaning and proper use of words. Johnson was the first to introduce into English lexi- cography the method of illustrating the different significations of words by examples from the best writers ; and his Dictionary, from the time of its first publication, has been, far more than any other, regarded as a standard for the language. It has formed sub- siantially the basis of many smaller works, and, as Walker remarks, it " has been deemed lawM plunder by every subsequent lexi- pographer," The next year after the publication of his Dictionary, Johnson pre- pared the octavo abridgment ; and he revised the large work for the edition of 1773, wthout, however, making great additions or alter- ations. Supplements to it, by Mason, Seager, and Jodrell, have been published in a separate form. In 1814, an edition of Johnson's Dictionary, Tvith numerous cor- rections, and with the addition of about 14,000 words, by the Rev. Henry John Todd, was pubhshed ; and, in 1827, there was a second edition, with the addition of about one thousand more words, by Mr. Todd. The words added by Mr. Todd, in his first edition, were, in great part, if not chiefly, derived from the English writers of the 17 th century ; and a considerable part of them are obsolete ; and of those added in his second edition, a large proportion are provincial or local words, some of them hardly worthy of a place m a dictionary of the English language. The merits of Johnson's Dictionary have been by some exaggerated, and by others underrated. But though many defects have been pointed out, yet no one of his countrymen has yet produced a work that has superseded it. It would be unreasonable to expect, from the labor of seven years, a work for which " a whole life would be insuf- ficient." If it had been perfectly adapted to the language at the time of its first publication, it would be very defective now. Many changes have taken place in the language within the last century, and there has been a vast influx of new words from the various departments of the arts and sciences. In relation to these matters this Dictionary was not designed to treat largely ; and the scientific terms which it contains generally need to be defined anew, and a great many new ones need to be added ; but in these departments Mr. Todd made few improvements or additions. The " Penny Cyclopaedia " speaks of the work as follows : " John- son's Dictionarj' has been accounted the standard work of its class since its appearance in 1755 ; but, although it was a great achievement for an indi\idual, and its definitions, in particular, afford remarkable evidence of its author's ingenuity and command of expression, it is, in many respects, as far as possible from being what a dictionary should be. Its etymological part (as Home Tooke has long ago shown) is little better than so much rubbish ; and it is characterized throughout by a total want of method and philosophical views. Some valuable matter has been added by the Rev. Mr. Todd; but the philosophical character of the work has received no improvement in his hands." " I have," says Sir John Stoddard, " spoken freely of the errors and defects in Johnson's Dictionary ; but it must be remembered that the English language could never boast, until his time, of a collection of its words accompanied with authorities for different significations, by our best writers. His work was one of immense labor ; and we cannot but lament that during great part of the time which he devoted to it, he was in fact writing, from day to day, for bread." Of Johnson's Dictionary Lord Brougham says, *' He conferred upon Enghsh Uterature the important benefit of the first e\'en toler- ably good dictionary of the language, and one, the general merit of which may be mferred from the fact, that after the lapse of nearly a century filled with the monuments of Uterary labor incalculably multiplied in all directions, no similar work has superseded it. . . . The dictionary, with all its faults, still keeps its ground, and has no successor that could supplant it. This is owing to the admirable jilan of ^ving jjassages from the ^Titers cited as authorities for each word ; and this part of the design is well executed. Hence the book becomes almost as entertaining to read, as useful to consult. The more difficult task of definition has been less happily performed, but far better than the etymological part, which neither shows pro- found knowledge, nor makes a successful application of it. The compiler appears to have satisfied himself with one or two authori- ties, and neither to have chosen them well, nor consulted them with discriminatign,'' HISTORY OF ENGLISH LEXICOGRAPHY. Ivii Of this work Lord Macaulay says, " It was indeed the first diction- ary that could be read with pleasure. The definitions show so much acuteness of thought and command of language, and the passages qtioted from poets, divines, and philosophers are so skilfully selected, that a leisure hour may always be agreeably spent in turning over the pages. The faults of the book resolve themselves, for the most part, into one great fault. Johnson was a wretched etymologist. He knew little or nothing of any Teutonic language except English, which indeed, as he wrote it, was scarcely a Teutonic language ; and thus he was absolutely at the mercy of Junius and Skinner." Since the first publication of Johnson's Dictionaiy, many other English dictionaries, of various degrees of merit, have apjjeared in England, the titles, dates, and names of the authors of which may be seen in the following Catalogue ; but they cannot, all of them, be here particularly noticed. The most considerable of these works is Dr. llichardson's ** New Dictionary of the English Language," pub- lished in 1838. This is an elaborate work, in which much greater attention was paid to etymology than had been bestowed by Johnson or any other Enghsh lexicographer. The author himself says of his work, " As an Etymological Dictionary, I may affirm, that my own is the first that has been attempted in the English language since the publication of the works of Junius and Skinner, and that it is the only one which professes to combine with etjTnolog^ an exact expla* nation of meaning, and a copious deduction of usages." The Quarterly Review says of this work, "It is an admirable addition to our lexicography, supplying a great desideratum, as ex- hibiting the biography of each word, its birth, parentage, and edu- cation, the changes that have befallen it, the company it has kept, and the connections it has formed, by a rich series of quotations, all in chronological order." Dean Trench says of it, " It is the only Enghsh dictionar)' in which etymology assumes the dignity of a science." This dictionary' indicates an extensive and laborious research into the early and almost forgotten productions of English literature ; and it is highly valuable and interesting to one who is dcsiroua at studying the history of the language. In 1828, the first edition of the "American Dictionary of the English Language," by Noah Webster, LL. D. was published, — a work of great labor and learning, comprising a much more full vo- cabulary than Johnson's Dictionary, and containing many and great improvements with respect both to the etymology and definitions of words. This dictionary has been much enlarged and greatly improved in siicceeding editions, by the Rev. Chauncey A. Goodrich, I). I)., and it has received numerous and high commendations, and has met with great success. ENGLISH ORTHOEPISTS. But little attention was bestowed upon orthoepy, by Enghsh lexi- cographers, till after the first publication of Johnson's Dictionary. Since that time, many dictionaries have been published in which the pronunciation of the language has been made the principal object. One of the first works of this sort was the Dictionary of Dr. Kenrick, In a large quarto volume, pubUshed in 1772. This was followed, in 1775, by Perry's " Royal Standard Enghsh Dictionary," a small work, which had an extensive circulation, both in Great Britain and in the United States. " The Synonymous, Etymological, and Pronouncing English Dictionary," a much larger work, by the same author, in royal octavo, was published in 1805. — This latter is the work of Perry which is referred to by the abbreviation F, in this Dictionary. In 1780, Thomas Sheridan, a native of Ireland, who had been an actor of some note upon the stage, uid was a distinguished lecturer on elocution in London, at Oxford, Cambridge, and elsewhere, pub- Ushed his " Complete Dictionarj' of the English Language, both wth Regard to Sound and Meaning, one main Object of which is to estabUsh a plain and permanent Standard of Pronunciation." This work commanded much more attention, as a pronouncing dictionarj', than any other of the kind that preceded it In 1784, the Rev. Robert Nai-es, afterwards archdeacon of Stafford, and one of the first editors of the " British Critic," pubHshed the " P^lements of Orthoepy, containing a Distinct View of the Whole Analogy of the English Language, so far as it relates to Pronunciation, Accent, artd Quantity." This is a judicious and valuable work, though not in the form of a dictionary. In 1791 appeared the first edition of the celebrated Dictionary of John Walker, entitled " A Critical Pronouncing Dictionarj' and Ex- positor of the English Language ; in which not only the Meaning of every Word is clearly explained, and the Sound of eveiy Sylkble distinctly shown, but where Words are subject to different Pronunci- ations, the Authorities of our best Pronouncing Dictionaries are fully exhibited, the Reasons for each are at large displayed, and the pref- erable Pronunciation is jiointcd out ; — to which are prefixed Piinci- h pies of Enghsh Pronunciation." The author had prenously puhlished a valuable work, entitled "A Rhyming Dictionary; in which the whole Language is arranged according to its Terminations." And ho afterwards, m 1798, pubhshed his " Key to the Classical Pronunciation of Greek, Latin, and Scrijjture Proper Names." In the preparation of his Dictionarj', Walker made pronunciation his leading object ; and for this it is chiefly valued. His design was, as he expresses it, " principally to give a kind of historj- of pronunci- ation, and to register its present state." His Dictionary has been very extensively circulated both in Great Britain and the United States. " The settlement of the pronunciation of the English language upon analogical principles, and according to the best usage," as stated by the Penny Cyclopsedia, " was certainly attempted by Walker more systematically than by any preceding writer. — It [his Dictionarj] has been eminently successful, having gone through between twenty and thirty editions, and having superseded all other prerious works of the same nature." Walker was long a distinguished teacher of elocution in London, was a careful observer, and favorably situated to become acquainted with the best usage. No other Enghshman, probably, ever gave a longer, more laborious, and thorough attention to the subject of orthoepy than he, and no other ever obtained so high and widely extended a reputation as an orthoepist* In modem English literature. Walker holds a sunilar rank, as an orthoepist, to that of Johnson as a lexicograj)her. Their labors have been, in sev- eral dictionaries, blended together ; and their names are, in a manner. • Walker's employment, as a teacher of elocution, was among the higher ela and best educated people of England. The following testimony to his merit, from the eminent statesman and orator Edmund Burke, is found in " Prior's Life ot Burke." " One of the persons who particularly solicited Mr. Burke's exertions on this occasion was Mr. or (as he was commonly tenncd) Elocution Walker, author ol the ' Pronouncing Dictionar>-,' and other works of merit, and who had given leosons in the art to young Burke. ... Mr. Burke, one day, in the ricinity of th» House of Commons, introduced him to a nobleman, accidenully passing, with the following characteristic exordium : ' Here, my Lord Berkeley, is Mr. Walker, whom not to know, by name at least, would argue a want of knowlejgeof the harmuuitM, cadenc«8, and proprieties of our lanfuaga.' " Iviii HISTORY OF ENGLISH LEXICOGRAPHY. f proverbially associated with each other, as being each the first in his respective department, — Johnson for the authority and signification of words, and Walker for their pronunciation. Since the first appearance of Walker's Dictionary, various other pronouncing dictionaries have been pubhshed in England, the majority of them smaller works, designed especially for the use of schools. In pronunciation, fashion is changeable, as well as in other things ; and though Walker may be esteemed the best guide for ascertaining what was the pronunciation of the language at the beginning of the present century, yet a considerable change has taken place since his time, and on this account, some of the more recent orthoepists may, in some cases at least, be looked upon as better guides, in relation to present usage, than Walker. Of the dictionaries which have been pubhshed in London since the first appearance of Walker's, the one which evinces much the most investigation of the subject of orthoepy, is that of Mr. B. H. Smart, entitled " A New Ciitical Pronouncing Dictionary of the Enghsh Language, adapted to the present State of Literature and Science," published in 1836. The same work, reduced in size, entitled "Smart's Pronouncing Dictionary of the English Language epit- omized," was published in 1840. To the title of this Dictionary is prefixed " Walker remodelled ; " though it is more of an original work than most English dictionaries ; and the author has introduced, as he states, " some twenty thousand words not found in Walker." " With changes," he remarks, " that extended to every part of the Dictionary, it is plain that the altered work was mine, not Walker's. The title ' Walker Remodelled,' which the proprietors chose to give it, had, in fact, no other foundation than the original purpose for which they had engaged me." The following remarks are extracted from Mr. Smart's Preface : " Walker's Dictionary, in reality a transcript of Johnson's, with the addition of the current prommciation affixed to each word, and the omission of the etymologies and authorities, suppUed for many j ears ) all that was demanded in a dictionary of its kind. But the fitty or sixty years which have elapsed since its first publication have jiro- duced changes in science, in opinions, in habits of thought, greater, perhaps, than any similar space of time in any past age has witnessed ; changes that have materially afiected our language, and rendered all dictionaries in some degree obsolete, that fairly reflected its extent and application only forty years ago. The proprietors of Walker's Dictionary, finding it would shde entirely out of use unless it were adapted to the present day, engaged me, as a teacher of elocution, known in London since Walker's decease, to make the necessary changes. They beheved that they imposed no greater task upon me than the insertion of new words, and the re\ision thi-oughout of Walker's pronunciation ; but I soon found, that, with any chance of success, much greater innovations must be attempted. . . . Dis- posed, on general points, to think entirely with my predecessor, I have not had any very extensive occasion for differing from him in particulars ; but some occasions have occurred, as might be expected, from the distance between his day aiid mine. In short, I pretend to reflect the oral usage of Enghsh, such as it is at present, among the sensible and well-educated in the British metropohs. ... I am a Londoner, have hved nearly all my hfe in London, and have been able to observe the usage of all classes. As a teacher of the Enghsh language and hterature, I have been admitted into some of the first families of the kingdom ; as one partial to books, I have come much into contact with bookish men ; while, as a public reader and lecturer, I have been obliged to fashion my own pronunciation to the taste of the day. Thus prepared, I may not unwarrantably believe that my opinion may have some value with those who seek the opinion of another to regulate their pronunciation." — See p. xx. CATALOGUE OF ENGLISH DICTIONARIES. The first part of the foUowng Catalogue comprises not only dic- tionaries of English words, or of the English language, but also many bilingual dictionaries ; that is, dictionaries containing a vocabulary not only of the English, but also of some other languages, ancient or mod- em, as English and Latin, English and French, &c., — dictionaries which were written for the purpose of facilitating the study of ancient languages and of foreign modern languages. All the earlier lexicograph- ical labors in England were sjjent on works of this sort. No attempt has been made to exhibit here a complete list of these bilingual dictiona- ries, except in the earlier part of the period embraced in the Catalogue. Within a century past, a great many dictionaries have been pub- lished in England, and a considerable number also in the United States, for the purpose of facilitating the study of several ancient, and of numerous modern, languages. A few of these, that are particular- ly connected with English literature, are included in the following Catalogue ; but the most of them are entirely omitted. There are many points relating to English lexicography that are not easily ascertained. Many of the dictionaries have had their titles changed from those which were given them in the first edition ; many of them have been much altered by the labor of subsequent editors ; with respect to some, it is not easy to ascertain the date of the first edition ; and some have undoubtedly been published which have passed into obUvion, and are now entirely unknown. It is not easy to form an imexceptionable classification of dictiona- ries ; and there are some respecting which it is difiicuit to determine to what class they most properly belong. The list of the dictionaries of the various arts and sciences, contained in the following Catalogue, is not complete. The object has been to insert all the most important ones ; though there are, doubtless, some that are omitted more im- portant than some that are inserted. Dictionaries of facts, comprising biography, geography, history, mythology-, &c., also most of the glos- saries to individual authors, are intentionally omitted. I. — ENGLISH DICTIONARIES OF WORDS. Date. Author. Titlb. 1499. Richard Fraunces. ? . . Promptorium Parvulorum, sive Clerico- FuiAR Galfridus. ) rum Lexicon Anglo-Latinum Prin- ceps. 1500. (Anonymous.) Ortus Vocabulorum. 1530. John Palsgrave L'Eclaircissement de La Langue Fran- caise. 1538. Sir Thomas Elyot. . . . Dictionarium, (Latin and English.) 1542. do. do. ... Bibliotheca Eliotis Librarie. (Third edi- tion.) 1547. William Salesburt. . . Dictionarie Englishe and Wclshe. 1552. Richard Hcloet Abecedarium Anglico-Latinum pro Ty- runculis. 1552. John Verox Diotionariolum Puerorum. 1559. John Withals A Little Dictionarie for Children, (Latin and English.) 1562. Henry Sutton The Brefe Dyxcyonary. 1563. Thomas Cooper Thesaurus Linguae Romanse ct Britan- nicse cum Dictionario Historico et Po- etico. (Elyot's Dictionarium or Bibli- otheca, enlarged.) 1568. John Withals A Shorte Dictionarie for Yonge Begin- ners. (A new edition.) 1570. (Anonymous.) Dictionarie, French and English. 1572. John Hioqins Huloet's Dictionarie newelye correct- ed, amended, set in Order, and en- larged. 1572. Lewis Evans A Shorte Dictionarie, most profitable for Yonge Beginners. 1573. John Baret An Alvearie, or Triple Dictionarie, in English, Latin, and French. 1580. William Bullokar. . . . Booke at Large for the Amendment of Orthographic for English Speech. 1583. Richard Ht-tton Lexicon Latino-Grtrco-Anglicum. 1584. Rodolph Waddinoton. . Dictionarie in Latino and English, new- ly corrected and enlarged. (Veron's Dictionariolum, enlarged.) 1588. Thomas Thomas Dictionarium Latino-Anglicanum. Oatb. Avthob. Tm.m. 1589. John Rider Dictionarie in Latine and English. 1592. Richard Percivale. . . Dictionarie in Spanish and English. 1593. CLArniis Hollybard. . . Dictionarie, French and English. 1598. John Flokio A Worlde of Wordcs ; a most copious Dicliocaris cf the Italian and English Tongues. 1599. John Minsheu Percivale's Dictionarie in Spanish and English, enlarged and amplified. 1606. Francis Holyoke Rider's Latin and English Dictionary, corrected and augmented. 1611. Randle Cotgrave A Dictionarie of the French and Eng- lish Tongues. 1616. John Bullokar An English Expositour of Hard Words. 1617. John Minsheo Guide into the Tongues : — English, British or Welsh, Low Dutch, High Dutch, French, Italian, Spanish, Por- tuguese, Latin, Greek, and Hebrew. 1632. Henbt Cockerajc An English Dictionarie, or an Inter- preter of Hard Words. 1632. Robert Sherwood. ... A Dictionarie, English and French. (Annexed to Cotgrave's French and English Dictionarj-.) 1655. William Walker. .... The Taste of English and Latin Phrase- ology, or a Dictionary of English and Latin Idioms. 1656. Thomas BLOtmx Glossographia, or Dictionary interpret- ing the Hard Words now used in out refined English Tongue. 1658. Edward Phillips The New World of English Words, or ■ General Dictionary, containing the Interpretations of such Hard Words as are derived from other Languages. 1660. James Howell Lexicon Teiraglotton, an English- French-Iulian-Spanish Dictionary. 1662. Christopher Wash. . . . Dictionarium Minus, a Compendious Dictionary, English-Latin and Latin- English. 1664. Francis Oouldman. ... A Latin and English, and English snd Latin Dictioniiry. (lix) Ix A CATALOGUE OF ENGLISH DICTIONARIES. Date. Acthor. Titlk. 1673. James Howell Cotgrave's French and English Diction- ary, revised. 1677. Thomas Holyokb An English and Latin, and Latin and English Dictionary. (Francis IIol- yoke's Rider's Dictionary, enlarged.) 1677. Elisha Coles An English and Latin, and Latin and English Dictionary. 1677. do. do An English Dictionary, explaining the difficult Terms that are used in Divin- ity, Husbandry, Physick, Philosophy, Law, Navigation, Mathematics, and other Arts and Sciences. 1677. Guy Miege A New Dictionary, French and English ; with another, English and French. 1678. Francis Govldman. ... A Latin and English, and English and Latin Dictionary. (Fourth edition, with many thousand words added by Dr. Scattergood.) 1678. Adam Littleton A Latin and English, and English and Latin Dictionary. 1688. Guy Miege French and English, and English and French Dictionary. 1691. William Sewel A Dutch and English Dictionary. 1699. Abel Boyer Royal Dictionary ; French and English, and English and French. 1701. J. Jones Practical Phonography, or the New Art of rightly Spelling and Writing Words by the Sound thereof. 1704. Edward Cocker English Dictionary. 1707. (Anonymous.) Glossographia Anglicana Nova, or a Dic- tionary interpreting such Hard Words, of whatever Language, as are at pres- ent used in the English Tongue. 1708. John Kersey A General English Dictionary, compre- hending a Brief but Emphatical and Clear Explication of all Sorts of Diffi- cult Words, that derive their Origin from other Ancient and Modern Lan- guages. 172-. Nathan Bailey An Universal Etymological English Dic- tionary, comprehending the Deriva- tions of the Generality of Words in the English Tongue, either Ancient or Modern. (Soon after 1720.) 1724. J. Hawkins Cocker's [Edward] English Dictionary, Enlarged and Altered. 1731. Philip Miller Gardner's Dictionary. 1735. B. N. Defoe A Compleat English Dictionary, con- taining the True Meaning of all the Words in the English Language. 1736. Robert Ainsworth. ... An English and Latin Dictionary. 1737. (Anonymous.) A New English Dictionary, containing a large and almost complete Collection of English Words. 1749. Benjamin Martin A New Universal English Dictionary. 1752. Thomas Dyche and ) . . A New General English Dictionary, pe- WiLLiAM Pardon. > culiarly calculated for the Use and Improvement of such as are unac- quainted with the Learned Languages. (Seventh edition.) 1755. Samuel Johnson A Dictionary of the English Language, in which the Words are deduced from their Originals, and illustrated in their different Significations by Examples from the best Writers. 1756. do. do. The Dictionary of the English Lan- guage, abridged. 1757. James Buchanan A New English Dictionary. 1759. J. Peyton A New Vocabulary, or Grammar of the True Pronunciation of the English Language, in the Form of a Dic- tionary. 1760. Joseph Bakbtti A Dictionary of the English and Italian Languages. Datb. Adtbor. Titi.». 1761. Daniel Penning The Royal English Dictionary, or Treas-^ ury of the English Language. 1764. Joseph Nicol Scott. . . Bailey's Dictionary, Enlarged and Re- vised. (Folio edition.) 1764. Daniel Farro The Royal British Grammar and Vocab. ulary, being an entire Digestion of the English Language into its propel Parts of Speech. 1764. William Johnston. ... A Pronouncing and Spelling Dictionary, 1764. John Entick A Spelling Dictionary of the Engli Language. 1765. James Elphinston. . . . The Principles of the English Language digested. 1766. William Rider New Universal English Dictionary. 1771. J. Seally . The London Spelling Dictionary. 1772. Frederick Barlow. . . . The Complete English Dictionary. 1773. William Kenrick. ... A New Dictionary of the English Lan- guage. 1774. James Barclay A Complete and Universal English Dic- tionary. 1775. John Ash The New and Complete Dictionary of the English Language. 1775. William Perry The Royal Standard English Dictionary. 1775. John Walker A Rhyming Dictionary. 1778. Joseph Baretti A Dictionary of the English and Span- ish Languages. 1779. (Anonymous.) A Pocket Dictionary, or Complete Ex- pository. 1780. Thomas Sheridan A Complete Dictionary of the English Language, both with Regard to Sound and Meaning, one Main Object of which is to establish a Plain and Per- manent Standard of Pronunciation. 1782. Edward Harwood. . . . Bailey's Dictionary, Enlarged and Cor- rected. (Twenty-fourth edition, 8vo.) 1784. Robert Nares Elements of Orthoepy, containing a Distinct View of the Whole Analogy of the English Language. 1784. William Fry A New Vocabulary of the most Difficult Words of the English Language. 1790. George Picard A Grammatical Dictionary. 1791. John Walker A Critical Pronouncing Dictionary, and Expositor of the English Language. 1796. (Anonymous.) A Dictionary of the English Language, both with Regard to Sound and Mean- ing- 1797. William Scott A Spelling, Pronouncing, and Explana- tory Dictionary of the English Lan- guage. (A new and improved edi. tion.) 1798. Stephen Jones A General Pronouncing and Explana- tory Dictionary of the English Lan- guage. 1801. George Mason A Supplement to Johnson's English Dictionary. 1802. George Fulton and ) . . A General Pronouncing and Explana- G. Knight. ) tory Dictionary of the English Lan- guage. 1805. William Perry The Synonymous, Etymological, and Pronouncing English Dictionary. 1806. Thomas Browne The Union Dictionary, containing all that is truly useful in the Dictionaries of Johnson, Sheridan, and Walker. (Second edition.) 1806. Benjamin Dawson. ... A Philological and Synonymical Dic- tionary of the English Language. (Only from A to Adornment.) 1807. William Enfield A General Pronouncing Dictionary. 1809. W. F. Mylius A School Dictionary of the English Lan guage. (Second edition.) 1810. B. H. Smart. . A Practical Grammar of English Pro- nunciation. 1811. Nicholas Salmon Sheridan's Dictionary, corrected and im- proved. A CATALOGUE OF ENGLISH DICTIONARIES. Ixi Oatb. Adthob. Titlb. 1818. Henet John Todd. . . . Johnson's Dictionary of the English Language, with Numerous Correc- tions, and with the Addition of Several Thousand Words. 18191 John Seaoer. A Supplement to Johnson's Dictionary. 18201 RicuAUD P. JoDRELL. . . Philology on the English Language. (Supplement to Johnson's Diction- ary.) 1820 (about). Christopher > . . A New Pronouncing English Diction- Earnshaw. ) ary. 1820. Alexander Chalmers. . Johnson's Dictionary, as corrected and enlarged by Todd, abridged. 1821. Georob Fi'LTON Johnson's Dictionary in Miniature. 1826. Alfred Howard Walker's Dictionary, arranged for the Use of Schools. 1826. Thomas Rees Todd's Johnson's Dictionary in Minia- ture. 1827. R. S. Jameson A Dictionary of the English Language, by Johnson and Walker, with the Pronunciation greatly simplified, on an entire new Plan. 1830. John Davis Walker's Critical Pronouncing Diction- ary, Corrected and Enlarged. 1830. Samcel Maunder A New and Enlarged Dictionary of the English Language. 1835. David Booth An Analytical Dictionary of the English Language. 1835. James Knowles A Pronouncing and Explanatory Dic- tionary of the English Language. 1836. B. H. Smart A New Critical Pronouncing Dictionary of the English Language, (" Walker Remodelled.") 1836. (Anonymous.) A New and Enlarged Dictionary of the English Language. 1837. Charles Richardson. . . A New Dictionary of the English Lan- guage. (Two vols., 4to.) 1839. do. do. . . A New Dictionary of the English Lan- guage, abridged from the Quarto Edi- tion. (New edition, 1856.) 1840. B. H. Smart . Smart's Pronouncing Dictionary of the English Language, epitomized. 1844. Alexander Reid A Dictionary of the English Language. 1817. Robert Sullivan A Dictionary of the English Language. 1848. John Boao The Imperial Lexicon of the English Language. 1849. John Craiq A New, Universal, Etymological, Tech- nological, and Pronouncing Diction- ary of the English Language. 1850. John Oqilvie The Imperial Dictionary, English, Tech- nological, and Scientific. 1855. Thomas Wright Universal Pronouncing Dictionary and General Expositor of the English Language. 1855. Htde Clarke A New and Comprehensive Dictionary of the English Language. 1856. Charles Richardson. . . Supplement to a New Dictionary of the English Language. n. — AMERICAN DICTIONARIES OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 1798 (about). Johnson and i . o i. , -r^. . Elliot. ^ • ' ^ School Dictionary. 1806. Noah Webster. A Compendious Dictionary of the Eng- lish Language. 1807. do. do. A Dictionary of the English Language, for the Use of Common Schools. 1813 An American Gentle- > . . A New Critical Pronouncing Dictionary man. J of the English Language. 1816. John Pickering A Vocabulary of Words and Phrases which have been supposed to be pecu- liar to the United States. (825. Richard Wiggins The New York Expositor. Datb. Autbob. Titlb. 1827. J. £. Worcester Johnson's English Dictionary, as im- proved by Tudd and abridged by Chal- mers, with Walker's Pronouncing Dictionary combined. 1827. Ltman Cobb An Abridgment of Walker's Dictionary. 1828. William Grimsuaw. . . Etymological Dictionary. 1828. Noah Webster. An American Dictionary of the English Language, revised and enlarged in 1847, by Chauncey A. Goodrich. 1829. do. do An American Dictionary of the English Language, abridged from the 4to. Ed. 1829. do. do A Dictionary of the English Language, for the Use of Primary Schools and the Counting-House. 1829. William Grimshaw. . . The Ladies' Lexicon and Parlour Com- panion, do. do. The Gentleman's Lexicon. 1829. William W. Turner. . . The School Dictionary. 1830. J. E. Worcester A Comprehensive Pronouncing and Ex- planatory Dictionary of the English Language. 1834, Noah Webster A Dictionary for Primary Schools. 1835. J. E, Worcester An Elementary Dictionary for Common Schools, 1845. Noah Webster. A Dictionary of the English Language, abridged from the American Diction- ary. — University edition. 1845. William Bowles An Explanatory and Phonographic Pro- nouncing Dictionary of the English Language. 1846. do. do. .... A Phonographic Pronouncing Diction- ary. — Abridgment. 1846. J. E. Worcester A Universal and Critical Dictionary of the English Language. 1848. John R. Bartlett Dictionary of Americanisms. 1850. William Grimshaw. . . A Primary Pronouncing Dictionary. 1850. J. E. Worcester Primary Dictionary, 1851, (B. H, Hall.) A Collection of College Words and Cus- toms. 1855. J. E. Worcester A Pronouncing, Explanatory, and Sy- nonymous Dictionary of the English Language. 1855. Dan S. Smallet The American Phonetic Dictionary of the English Language. 1856. Chauncet A. Goodrich. A Pronouncing and Defining Dictionary of the English Language, abridged from Webster's American Dictionary. 1859. Alexander H. Laidlaw. An American Pronouncing Dictionary of the English Language. 1859. Alfred L. Elwyn. . . , Glossary of Supposed Americanisms. 1860, (Anonymous.) A New Pocket Dictionary. m.— ENGLISH GLOSSARIES. 1674. John Bat A Collection of English Words not gen. erally used. 1725, (Anonymous.) A Dictionary of the Terms of the Cant- ing Crew. 1771' (Anonymous.) Exmoor Scolding and Exmoor Court- ship, with a Glossary. 1787. Francis Qrose A Glossary of Provincial and Local Words. 1793. (John Collier.) A View of the Lancashire Dialect, [with a Glossary.] 1796. Francis Grosb A Dictionary of the Vulgar Tongue, or of Buckish Slang, &c. 1805. R. Anderson Ballads in the Cumberland Dialect, with a Glossary. 1808. R. PoLWHELB A Cornish English Vocabulary. 1811. Robert Willan A Glossary of Words used in the West Riding of Yorkshire. 1814. Samvbl Psoqb Anecdotes ofthe English Language, with a Supplement to F. Grose's Glossary. Ixii A CATALOGUE OF ENGLISH DICTIONARIES. Datb. Author. Title. 1816. White Kennett (Bp.). . A Glossary to explain the Original, the Acceptation, and the Obsoleteness of Words and Phrases. 1820. Roger Wilbraham. ... A Glossary of Words used in Cheshire. 1822. Robert Nares A Glossary of Words and Phrases found in the Works of Shakspeare and his Contemporaries. 1823. Jon Bee. (John Badcock.) Dictionary of the Turf, the Ring, the Chase, the Pit, &c. 1823. Edward Moor Suffolk Words and Phrases. 1824. James Mander Derbyshire Miner's Glossary. 1825. John T. Brockett A Glossary of North Country Words. 1825. James Jennings A Glossary of Words used in Somerset- shire, &c. 1828. (William Carr.) The Dialect of Craven, with a Copious Glossary. (Two volumes.) 1829. Joseph Hunter The Hallamshire Glossary. 1830. John Forby The Vocabulary of East Anglia, Nor- folk and Suffolk. (Two volumes.) 1832. William Toone A Glossary and Etymological Dictionary of Obsolete and Uncommon Words. 1833. Jonathan Boucher. ... A Glossary of Archaic and Provincial Words, edited by Joseph Hunter and Joseph Stevenson. (Two numbers published.) 1837. James F. Palmer A Glossary of Devonshire Words. 1839. Abel Bywater The Sheffield Dialect. 1839. William Holloway. . . A General Dictionary of Provincial- isms. 1839. Charles Clark A Glossary of Words peculiar to Es- sex. 1839. (Anonymous.) A Glossary of Provincial Words used in Herefordshire. 1839. (Anonymous.) A Glossary of the Yorkshire Dialect. 1839. John Phillips A Glossary of the Devonshire Dialect. 1839. (Anonymous.) A Glossary of the Westmoreland and Cumberland Dialects. 1842. John Y. Akerman. ... A Glossary of Provincial Words in Use in Wiltshire. 1846. James O. Halliwell. . . A Dictionary of Archaic and Provincial Words. (Two volumes, 8vo.) 1846. John T. Brockett A Glossary of North Country Words. (Third edition, two volumes.) 1848. Arthur B. Evans Leicestershire Words. 1849. (Anonymous.) A Glossary of Words used in Teesdale, Durham. 1851. Thomas Sternberg. . . . The Dialect and Folk-lore of Northamp- tonshire. 1851. (Anonymous.) A Glossary of Cumberland Provincial Words. 1851. (Anonymous.) A Glossary of Dorsetshire Provincial Words. 1851. (Anonymous.) A Glossary of Gloucestershire Provincial Words. 1852. (Anonymous.) A Glossary of Berkshire Provincial Words. 1853. (Anonymous.) A Glossary of the Provincialisms of Sussex. 1854. Anne E. Baker. ...... A Glossary of Northamptonshire Words. 1855. (Anonymous.) A Glossary of Yorkshire Words and Phrases. 1856. R. Garnett A Glossary of Words used in Warwick- shire. 1857. Thomas Wright A Volume of Vocabularies [Anglo- Saxon and Early English] from the Tenth Century to the Fifteenth. 1857. do. do A Dictionary of Obsolete and Provincial English. 1857. iDiicatiffe Anglicus) The Vulgar Tongue. Two Glossa- ries of Slang and Flash Words and Phrases. 1859. A London Antiquary. . • . A Dictionary of Modem Slang, Cant, and Vulgar Words. IV. — DICTIOXAllIES AND GLOSSARIES OF THE SCOTTISH DIALECT. Date. Adtiior. Title. 1782. John Sinclair Observations on the Scottish Dialect. 1787. James Beattie Scotticisms arranged in Alphabetical Order. 1799. Hugh Mitchell Scotticisms and Vulgar Anglicisms. 1808. John Jamieson An Etymological Dictionary of the Scot- tish Language. (Two volumes.) 1818. do. do An Etymological Dictionary of the Scot- tish Language, abridged. 1825. do. do Supplement to the Etymological Dic- tionary of the Scottish Language. (Two volumes.) 1858. Cleiahbotham the Younger. A Handbook of the Scottish Language. V. — ETYMOLOGICAL DICTIONARIES. 1671T Stephen Skinner Etymologicon Linguae Anglicanse. 1703-5. George Hickes Linguarum Veterum Septentrionalium Thesaurus Grammatico-criticus et Archaeologicus. 1734. Jacob Serenius. ..... Dictionarium Anglo-Sueth.-Lat. in quo Voces Anglicanee quotquot Gothis de- bentur ad Origines suas revocantur. 1737. John G. Wachter. . . . Glossarium Germanicum, continens Origines et Antiquitates totius Lin- guae Germanicse. 1743. Francis Junius Etymologicon Anglicanum. 1769. John Ihre Glossarium Suio-Gothicum. 1779. Robert Kelham A Dictionary of the Norman or Old French Language. 1783. George Wm. Lemon. . . English Etymology, or A Derivative Dictionary. 1786. John Horne Tooke. . . . Diversions of Purley. 1800-25. Walter Whiter. . . Etymologicon Universale, or Universal Etymological Dictionary. 1826. John Thomson Etymons of English Words. 1833. Heinrich Meidinger. . . Vergleichendes Worterbuch der Goth- isch-Teutonischen Mundartcn. 1834. John Oswald An Etymological Dictionary of the Eng- lish Language. 1834. Robert Sullivan A Dictionary of Derivations. 1838. J. Rowbotham A New Derivative and Etymological Dictionary. 1847. H. Fox Talbot English Etymologies. 1850. AuGUSTE Jal Glossaire Nautique, Repertoire Poly- glotte des Termes de Marine, anciens et modernes. 1851. LoRENZ Diefenbach. . . Lexicon Comparativum Linguarum In- do-Germanicarum. 1853. Wm. Pulleyn The Etymological Compendium. 1853. Frederick Diez Etymologisches Worterbuch der Ro- manischen Sprachen. VI. — SAXON AND ANGLO-SAXON DICTIONARIES. 1659. William Somner Dictionarium Saxonico-Latino-Angli- cuni. 1701. Thomas Benson Vocabularium Anglo-Saxonicum. 1772. Edward Lye Dictionarium Saxonico- et Gothico-La- tinum. 1838. J. Bosworth A Dictionary of the Anglo-Saxon Lan- guage. A CATALOGUE OF ENGLISH DICTIONARIES. Ixiii Vn.— ENGLISH SYXONYMES. OjtT*. ACTnOB. TiTLB. 1794. JouN Thusler The Distinction between Words es- teemed Synonymous in the English Language. 1794. Hestee Lynch Piozzi. . British Synonymy, or An Attempt to regulate the Che ice of Words in Fa- miliar Conversation. 1813. William Taylor English Synonyms Discriminated. 1816. Geokoe Crabb English Synonymes Explained. 1842. Wm. CABrENTER A Comprehensive Dictionary of English Synonymes. (Third edition.) 184). JoHV Platts A Dictionary of English Synonymes. 1846. B. F. Graham English Synonymes. 18.52. Abp. Whately ) A Selection of English Synonyms. (Sec- (Edited by.) \ ond edition.) 18o2. Peter M. Rooet Thesaurus of English Words and Phrases Classified and Arranged. 18-54. D. L. Mackenzie A Practical Dictionary of English Syn- onyms. 1855. Thomas Fenby A Copious Dictionary of English Syno- nymes. 1851. Richard C. 1854. do. 1859. do. Trench. do. do. . On the Study of Words. . English Past and Present. . A Select Glossary of English Words used formerly in Senses different from their Present. Vm.— THEOLOGICAL AND BIBLICAL DICTIONARIES. 1622. 1732. 1769. 1779. 1784. 1801. 1802. 1815. 1816. 1830. 183-. 1831. 1832. 1833. 1841. 1843. 1814. 1846. 1849. 1849. 1851. 1852. 1607. 1671. Thomas Wilson A Complete Christian Dictionary. Samuel D'Oyly and ) . . Calmet s Dictionary of the Bible, trans- JoHN C'olson. ) lated from the French. John Brown A Dictionary of the Bible. Alexander Macbean. . Dictionary of the Bible. Peter Oliver Scripture Lexicon. Charles Taylor A New Edition of Calmet, with Frag- ments. Charles Buck A Theological Dictionary. John Robinson A Theological, Biblical, and Ecclesias- tical Dictionary. William Jones The Biblical Cyclopaedia, or Dictionary of the Holy Scri])tures. Howard Mai.com A Dictionary of Important Names and Terms found in the Holy Scriptures. (Frederick A. Packard.) The Union Bible Dictionary. R. Watson Biblical and Theological Dictionary. Edward Robinson. . . . Taylor's Edition of Calmet, revised, with Additions, do. do A Dictionary of the Holy Bible. Walter F. Hook. .... Church Dictionary. Wm. Goodhvoh and > . . The Pictorial Dictionary of the Holy Wm. C. Taylor. ) Bible. John Kitto A Cyclopaedia of Biblical Literature. Robert Eden Churchman's Theological Dictionary. (Second edition.) John Eadie Biblical Cyclopaedia. J. R. Beard The People's Dictionary of the Bible. John Kitto A Cyclopaedia of Biblical Literature for the People. — Abridgment. J. Farrab Biblical and Theological Dictionary. IX. — LAW DICTIONARIES. John Cowell A Law Dictionary, or the Interpreter of Words and Terms used in either Com- mon or Statute La%v8. Thomas Blount A Law Dictionary and Glossary of Ob- scure Words and Terms in Ancient Law, Records, &c. Datc. Autbok. Titlk. 1729. Giles Jacob A New Law Dictionary. 1764. Timothy Cinninguam. . A New and Complete Law Dictionary. 1792. Richard Birn A New Law Dictionary. 1810. Thomas E. Tomlins. . . The Law Dictionary. 1829. James Whishaw A New Law Dictionary. 1843. John Bouvier A Law Dictionary, adapted to the Con- stitution and Laws of the United States, and of the several States. 1850. Alexander Bubrill. . . A Law Dictionary and Gloasary. X. — MnJTABY AND MARINE DICTIONARIES. 1769. William Falconer. ... A Marine Dictionary. (A new edition, by Dr. William Bumey, 1815.) 1802. Chables James A New and Enlarged Military Diction- ary. 1810. William Duane A Military Dictionary. 1841. R. H. Dana, Jr. Dictionary of Sea Terms. 1844. E. S. N. Campbell. ... A Dictionary of MiliUry Science. (A new edition.) 1852. Robert Bcrn Naval and Military Technical Dictionary. 1853. J. H. Stocqueler Military Encyclopaedia. 1855. J. S. B Glossary of Military Terms. XI. — MEDICAL DICTIONARIES. 1719. John Qcincy Lexicon Physico-Medicum, a New Med- ical Dictionary. 1745. Robert James A Medicinal Dictionary, including Phys- ic, Surgery, Anatomy, Chemistry, Bot- any, &c. 1749. John Barrow A New Medicinal Dictionary. 1759. Thomas Wallace The Farrier's and Horseman's Com- plete Dictionary. 1796. James Hunter. A Complete Dictionary of Farriery and Horsemanship. 1798. Robert Hooper A Compendious Medical Dictionary. 1803. Thomas Boardman. ... A Dictionary of the Veterinary Art. 1806. John J. Watt An Encyclopaedia of Surgery, Medicine, Midwifery, Physiology, Pathology, Anatomy, Chemistry. &c. 1809. Bartholomew Parr. . . The London Medical Dictionary. 1818. Samuel Cooper Dictionary of Practical Surgery. 1833. Robley Dunglison. ... A Dictitmary of Medical Science and Literature. 1833-58. James Copland Medical Dictionary. (Four vols.) 1835. Forbes, Tweedie, / . ^ Cyclopjedia of Practical Medicine, and Connolly. ) William B. Costello. >_.-,, ,. , „ .• i e (Commenced 1841.) f The Cyclopaedia of Practical Surgery. 1844. Richard D. Hoblyn. . . A Dictionary of the Terms used in Med- icine and the Collateral Sciences. 1845. Shirley Palmeb A Pentaglot Dictionary of Anatomy, Physiology, Pathology, Practical Med. icine. Surgery, &c. 18-54. R. D. Hoblyn Medical Dictionary. 1855. D. P. Gabdner. A New Medical Dictionary. Xn. — DICTIONARIES OF CHEMISTRY, inNERALOGY, ftc. 1795. Wm. Nicholson A DicMonary of Practical and Theoret- ical Chemistry. 1807. A. & C. R. Aiken A Dictionary of Chemistry and Mineral- ORV- 1820. Andrew Ure A Dictionary of Chemistry and Mineral- ogy. 1824. A Fractical CkepuaL ... A Dictionary of Chemical and Philo- sophical Apparatus. Ixiv A CATALOGUE OF ENGLISH DICTIONARIES. Date. Author. Title. 1826. W. C. Ottley A Dictionary of Chemistry and Mineral- ogy. James Mitchell A Dictionary of Chemistry and Geology. 1839. Geobob Roberts An Etymological and Explanatory Dic- tionary of Geology. 1854. Robert D. Thomson. . . Cyclopaedia of Chemistry. Xm. — DICTIONAHIES OF* THE VARIOUS ARTS AND SCIENCES. 1705. (Anonymous.) The Gentleman's Dictionary. — In three Parts. — I. Horsemanship. II. The Military Art. III. Navigation. 1731. Philip Miller The Gardener's and Botanist's Diction- ary. 1736. Nathan Bailet Dictionarium Domesticum, or a House- hold Dictionary. 1736. (Anonymous.) Dictionarium Polygraphicum, or the whole Body of Arts. 1744. (Anonymous.) Builder's Dictionary, or Gentleman's and Architect's Companion. 1756. Richard Rolt A New Dictionary of Commerce. 1764. Malachy Postlethwayt. Dictionary of Trade and Commerce. 1778. Mawe & Aberckombie. A Dictionary of Gardening and Botany. 1795-6. Charles Hutton. ... A Mathematical and Philosophical Dic- tionary. 1810. Thomas Mortimer. ... A General Dictionary of Commerce, Trade, and Manufactures. 1811-12. Peter Nicholson. . . An Architectural Dictionary. 1814. Peter Barlow A New Mathematical and Philosophical Dictionary. 1815. Charles Hutton A Philosophical and Mathematical Dic- tionary. 1816-20. Thomas Green A Universal Herbal, or Botanical, Med- ical, and Agricultural Dictionary. 1822. John C. Loudon Encyclopaedia of Gardening. 1823. George Crabb Universal Technological Dictionary. 1823. James Mitchell A Dictionary of the Mathematical and Physical Sciences. * 1825. James Elmes A General and Bibliographical Dictionary of the Fine Arts. 1825. Walter Hamilton. ... A Concise Dictionary of Terms used in the Arts and Sciences. 1825. J. F. Danneley An Encyclopaedia or Dictionary of Music. 1826. John C. Loudon Encyclopaedia of Agriculture. 1829. Alexander Jamieson. . Dictionary of Mechanical Science, Arts, Manufactures, and Miscellaneous Knowledge. 1832. J. R. McCuLLOCH A Dictionary of Commerce. 1833. Thomas Valentine. ... A Dictionary of the Terms of Music. (Third edition.) 1836. John C. Loudon Encyclopaedia of Plants. 1838. do. do Encyclopaedia of Cottage, Farm, and Villa Architecture. 1838. John Britton A Dictionary of the Architecture and Archaeology of the Middle Ages. 1838. William Grier The Mechanic's Pocket Dictionary. (Third edition.) 1839. Andrew Ure A Dictionary of Arts, Manufactures, and Mines. 1840. Samuel Maunder Scientific and Literary Treasury. 1840. J. S. Henslow A Dictionary of Botanical Terms. 1840. William Humble Dictionary of Geology and Mineralogy. 1841. Edward Scudamore. . . A Dictionary of Terms in Use in the Arts and Sciences. 1842. G. Francis The Dictionary of the Arts, Sciences, and Manufactures. 1842. Wm. Brande A Dictionary of Science, Literature, and Art. 1842. Gibbons Merle The Domestic Dictionary and House- keeper's Manual. 1842. John C. Loddon. ..... Encyclopaedia of Trees and Shrubs. Date. 1843. 1844. 1844. 1844. 1848. 1850. 1852. 1852. 1854. 1854. 1854. 1855. 1856. 1857. 1857. 1858. 1858. 1858. AUTROB. TlTlB. William Waterston. . . A Cyclopaedia of Commence. Thomas Webster An Encyclopedia of Domestic Economy. CuTHBERT W. Johnson. . The Farmer's Encyclopaedia and Die tionary of Rural Affairs. Joseph Gwilt An Encyclopaedia of Architecture. Samuel Maunder Treasury of Natural History, or Popular Dictionary of Animated Nature. John Weale Rudimentary Dictionary of Terms used in Architecture, Engineering, Fine Arts, Mining, etc. do. do. A Dictionary of Machines, Mechanics, Engine-work, and Engineering. J. Russell Hind An Astronomical Vocabulary. F. W. Fairholt Dictionary of Terms of Art. John W. Moore Complete Encyclopaedia of Music. Charles Tomlinson. . . Cyclopsedia of Useful Arts. Charles Davies. ( . . . . Mathematical Dictionary, and Cyclopae- Wm. G. Peck. ) dia of Mathematical Science. J. W^. Griffith. } , TT c • • • The Micrographic Dictionary. Arthur Henfrey. > ^ '^ ■' William Fleming. . . . Vocabulary of Philosophy. J. P. NiCHOL A Cyclopaedia of the Physical Sciences. J. Smith Romans. ) . ^ , ,. , ^ J. Smith Romans, Jr. S ' ^ Cyclopaedia of Commerce. William Baird A Cyclopaedia of the Natural Sciences. P. L. Simmonds A Dictionary of Trade Products, Com- mercial, Manufacturing, and Technical Terms. XIV. — ENCYCLOPAEDIAS AND GENERAL DICTIONARIES OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 1710. John Harris. 1728. Ephbaim Chambers. 1745. Dennis de Coetlogon. 1751-4. John Barrow 1763-4. A Society of Gentlemen. 1764-5. Croker, Williams, i and Clark. \ 1771. William Smellie. . . . 1795-1801. 1797-1829. Begun by John ; Wilkes. ) 1802. A. F. M. Willich. . 1802-19. Abraham Rees. 1807. Alexander Aitchison. 1807-8. George Gregory. . . 1809. William Nicholson. . 1809-14. Wm. M. Johnson i and Thomas Exlet. \ Lexicon Technicum, or an Universal Dictionary of Arts and Sciences. (Two vols., folio.) A Cyclopaedia, or General Dictionary of Arts and Sciences. (Two vols., folio. — Sixth edition, 1778, four vols., folio.) An Universal History of the Arts and Sciences, and a Comprehensive Illus- tration of all Sciences and all Arts. (Two vols., folio.) A New Universal Dictionary of the Arts and Sciences. (Two vols., folio.) A New and Complete Dictionary of the Arts and Sciences. (Four vols., 8vo.) A Complete Dictionary of the Arts and Sciences. (Three vols., folio.) Encyclopaedia Britannica, or Dictionary of Arts, Sciences, and Miscellaneous Literature. (Three vols., 4to.) The English Encyclopaedia, or a Die. tionary of Arts and Sciences. (Ten vols., 4to.) , Encyclopaedia Londinensis, or Universal Dictionary of Arts, Sciences, and Lit- erature. (Twenty-four vols., 4to.) The Domestic Encyclopaedia, or a Dic- tionary of Facts and Useful Knowl- edge. (Four vols., 8vo.) The Cyclopaedia, or Universal Dictionary of Arts, Sciences, and Literature. (Forty-five vols., 4to.) Encyclopaedia Perthensis, or Universal Dictionary of Knowledge. (Twenty- three vols., large royal 8vo.) A Dictionary of Arts and Sciences. (Two vols., 4to.) The British Encyclopaedia. (Six vols., 8vo.) The Imperial Encyclopaedia. (Four vols., 4to.) A CATALOGUE OF ENGLISH DICTIONARIES. Ixv Diitl. AOIHOl. TiTLB. 1810. Jame8 Millar Encyclopaedia Britannica. (Fourth edi- tion, twenty vols., 4to.) 1810-30. Sir David Bhewsteh. The Edinburgh Encyclopicdia. (Eigh- teen vols., 4to.) ) Pantalogia, with a General Dictionary of \ Arts, Sciences, and Words. (Twelve vols., royal 8vo.) , Supplement to the fourth, fifth, and sixth editions of the Encyclopaedia Britannica. (Six vols., 4to.) Encyclopeedia Edinensis, or Dictionary of Arts, Sciences, and Miscellaneous Literature. (Six vols., 4to.) 1813. John M. Good, 0. Gkeo OUY, and N. Boswokth 1815-24. Macvbt Napieb. . . 1816. Jakes Millar. 1818-44. Edward Smedlet, ' HuoH James Rose, and Henry Joux Kobe. 1826-34. Thomas Curtis. . . . 1829-33. Francis Lieber, E. 1 Wigglesworth, and > Thos. G. Bradford. J Encyclopaedia Metropolitana, or Univer- sal Dictionary of Knowledge, on a New Plan. (Twenty-nine vols., 4to.) The London Encyclopaedia, or Universal Dictionary of Science, Art, Literature, and Practical Mechanics. (Twenty- two vols., royal 8vo.) Encyclopaedia Americana, or a Popular Dictionary of the Arts and Sciences, on the Basis of the Seventh Edition of 1833-43. George Long. 1835-38. C. T. Partiwotow. 1842. Macvet Napier. 1852. J. G. Heck, {Am. Editor,) Spencer F. Baird. 1853. 1853-59. Thomas Stewart ) . Traillk. ) 1854-59. Charles Knight. . 1857-59. George Ripley and i Charles A. Dana. \ 7mM. the German " Conversatioiu-TjeTl- con." (Thirteen voU., 8vo.) The Penny Cyciopicdia of the Society of Useful Knowledge. (Twenty-seven vols., large royal 8vo.) The British Cyclopaedia of th« ArU, Sciences, Geography, Natural History, and Biography. (Ten voU., Sva) Encyclopa'dia Britannica. (Seventh edi« tion, twenty-one vols., 4to.) The Iconographic Encyclopaedia of Sci- ence, Literature, and Art. (Six vola.) National Cyclopeedia of Useful Knowl- edge. (Twelve vols., 8vo.) Encyclopa'dia Britannica. (Eighth edi- tion. Vol. L — XVIL A — Plato.) The English Cyclopedia. A New Dic- tionary of Universal Knowledge. Go- ography, four vols. ; Natural Ui«tory, four vols. ; Biography, six vols. ; Sci- ences and Arts, to be completed in six vols., imperial 8vo. New American Cyclopaedia. (Vols. L — • Vn. A— FUEBOS.) A LIST OF THE PRINCIPAL SCIENTIFIC WORKS USED IN THE PREPARATION OP THIS DICTIONARY. 49~ This list contains tbe titles of such Scientific works as are not mentioned in the preceding Catalogue of English Dictionaries. Datb. Acthob. Title. 1816. Fabkeb Cleaveland. . . An Elementary Treatise on Mineralogy and Geology. Boston. 1819-59. American Journal of Science and Arts. New Haven. 1820. C. J. Temminck Manuel d'Ornithologie. Paris. 1822. John Farrae An Elementary Treatise on the Appli- cations of Trigonometry. Boston. 1822. Samuel Parkes The Chemical Catechism. London. 1823. Henry J. Brooke. A Familiar Introduction to Crystallog- raphy. London. 1824. Jacob Bigelow Florula Bostoniensis. Boston. 1825. H. M. DucROTAY De i . . Manuel de Malacologie et de Conchyli- Blainville. 5 ologie. Paris. 1826-^9. The Edinburgh New Philosophical Jour- nal. Edinburgh. 1827. Edward Geiffith ? • • • The Animal Kingdom, &c., by Cuvier, and others. ) with additional descriptions, &c. Lon- don. 1827. John Farear An Elementary Treatise on Astronomy. Boston. 1828. James Wood The Elements of Optics. Cambridge, Eng. 1829. "William Henry The Elements of Experimental Chem- istry. London. 1829. J. B. Fischer Synopsis Mammalium. Stuttgart. 1829. M. Le Baron Cuvier. . . Le Regne Animal. Paris. 1829. Library of Useful Knowledge. (Natural Philosophy.) London. 1830. Soc. for the Diffusion ) Geometry, Plane, Solid, and Spherical. of Useful Knowl. S London. 1830. William T. Brande. . . A Manual of Chemistry. London. 1831. Humphrey Lloyd A Treatise on Light and Vision. London. 1831. Henry Katee and P _ ^ treatise on Mechanics. Boston. DioNYSius Lardner. ) 1831. Sir David Brewster. . . A Treatise on Optics. London. 1832. DiONYSius Labdner. ... A Treatise on Hydrostatics and Pneu- matics. Boston. 1832-59. The London and Edinburgh and [since 1840] Dublin Philosophical Magazine and Journal of Science. London. 1833. Baden Powell A Short Elementary Treatise on Exper- imental and Mathematical Optics. Ox- ford. 1835. J. J. Bebzelius Traite de Chimie. Paris. 1835. Leonard Jenyns A Manual of British Vertebrate Ani- mals. Cambridge, Eng. 1835. Edwabd Tubneb Elements of Chemistry. • (Reprinted from the London edition.) Philadel- phia. 1835. J. S. Henslow The Principles of Descriptive and Phys- iological Botany. London. 1835. David Beewsteb A Treatise on Optics. London. 1835-7. William Swainson. . Lardner's Cabinet Cyclopaedia, (Quad- rupeds and Birds.) London. 1836. J. B. P. A. DE Lamabck. Histoire Naturelle des Animaux sans Vertfebres. Paris. liS36. William Yaerell A History of the British Fishes. London. Date, Authob. Title. 1836. Hermann Burmeistee. . A Manual of Entomology, translated by W. E. Shuckard. London. 1837. Thomas Bell A History of British Quadrupeds, in- cluding the Cetacea. London. 1837. William Buckland. . . . Geology and Mineralogy. Philadelphia. 1837. William Phillips An Elementary Introduction to Min- eralogy, augmented by Robert Allan. London. 1839. Thomas Bell A History of British Reptiles. London. 1839. J. 0. Westwood An Introduction to the Modern Classifi- cation of Insects. London. 1839. J. Feederic Daniell. . . An Introduction to the Study of Chemi- cal Philosophy. London. 1839. John Lindley An Introduction to Botany. London. 1839. Robert Hamilton The Natural History of the Amphibious Carnivora, including the Walrus and Seals; also of the Herbivorous Ceta- cea, &c. Edinburgh. 1839-55. Michael Faraday. . Experimental Researches in Electricity. London. 1840. Thomas Nuttall A Manual of the Ornithology of the United States and of Canada. Boston. 1840. DiONYSius Lardner. ... A Treatise on Geometry, and its Appli- cation to the Arts. London. 1840. Robert Hark A Compendium of the Course of Chem- ical Instruction in the Medical De- partment of the University of Penn- sylvania. Philadelphia. 1841. A. A. Gould Report on the Invertebrate Animals of Massachusetts. Cambridge, U. S. 1841. Edward Forbes A History of British Star-fishes and other Animals of the Class Echino- dermata. London. 1842. Thomas Graham Elements of Chemistry. London. 1842. J. J. Audubon The Birds of America. New York. 1842. Robert Kane Elements of Chemistry. London. 1842. Justus Liebio Chemistry in its Application to Agricul- ture and Physiology, with Notes and Appendix by John W. Webster. Bos- ton. 1842. do. do Animal Chemistry, or Organic Chem- istry in its Application to Physiology and Pathology, with Notes and Ap- pendix by John W. Webster. Boston. 1842-1846. Louis Agassiz. . . . Nomenclator Zoologicus. Soleure. 1843. Joseph Y. Watson. ... A Compendium of British Mining, with Statistical Notices of the Principal Mines in Cornwall. London. (Printed for private circulation.) 1843. Wm. Yarrell A History of the British Birds. London. 1844, John W. Dbapeb A Treatise on the Forces which produce the Organization of Plants. New York. 1844. Edward A. Parnell. . . Applied Chemistry in Manufactures, Arts, and Domestic Economy. London. 1845, Thomas Young A Course of Lectures on Natural Phi- losophy and the Mechanical Arts London. (Ixvi) SCIENTIFIC WORKS USED IN THE PREPARATION OF THIS DICTIONARY. Lxvii Date. Adtboh. Titli. X84d. L. F. Kaemtz A Complete Course of Meteorology, translated by C. V. Walker. London. 1845. John F. Daniell Elements of Meteorology. London. 184d-6. C. F. Pescuel Elements of Physics, translated by E. West. London. 184& D. HcMPHRETS Storeb, . A Synopsis of the Fishes of North America. Cambridge, U. S. 1846. J. J. AuDOBON and ) ... The Viviparous Quadrupeds of North John Bachman. i America. New York. 1846. George B. Emerson. . . A Report on the Trees and Shrubs growing naturally in the Forests of Massachusetts. Boston. 1846. Richard Owen A History of British Fossil Mammals and Birds. London. 1846. G. R. Waterhouse A Natural History of the Mammalia. London. 1847. Jacob Bioelow The Useful Arts considered in Connec- tion with the Applications of Science. New York. 1847. John Lindley The Vegetable Kingdom. London. 1847. Jacob Bioelow Elements of Technology. Boston. 1848. J. MuLLER Principles of Physics and Meteorology. Philadelphia. 1848. Leopold Guelin Hand-Book of Chemistry, translated by Henry Watts. London. 1848. Sir W. Snow Harris. . . Rudimentary Electricity. London. 1848. Alex. K. Johnston. . . . The Physical Atlas. A Series of Maps and Notes illustrating the Geograph- ical Distribution of Natural Phenom- ena. London. 1850. William Baird The Natural History of the British En- tomostraca. London. 1851. S. P. Woodward A Manual of the MoUusca, or a Rudi- mentary Treatise on Recent and Fos- sil Shells. London. 1851. Sir H. T. de la Beohe. . The Geological Observer. London. 1851. Charles Darwin Geological Observations on Coral Reefs, Volcanic Islands, and on South Amer- ica. London. 1851. G. F. Richardson An Introduction to Geology and its As- sociate Sciences, Mineralogy, Fossil Botany and Conchology, and Palaeon- tology. London. 1851. Sir Charles Lyell. . . A Manual of Elementary Geology. Lon- don. 1851-^. DiONYSlus Lardner. . Hand-Book of Natural Philosophy and Astronomy. London. 1852. Thaddecs W. Harris. . A Treatise on some of the Insects of New England which are injurious to Vegetation. Boston. 1852. Charles U. Shepard. . . A Treatise on Mineralogy. New Haven. 1853. F. J. Pictet Traite de Paleontologie. Paris. 1853. Edward Forbes and ).. A History of British Mollusca and their Sylvanus Hanley. ) Shells. London. 1853. Thomas Bell A History of British Stalk-eyed Crus- tacea. London. 1853. Michael Faraday. . . . Lectures on the Non-Metallic Elements. London. 1853. Asa Gray The Botanical Text Book. New York. 18-53. Thomas C. Archer. . . . Popular" Economic Botany. London. 1853. M. PoriLLET Elements de Physique Exp^rimentale et de Meteorologie. Paris. 1853. Sir J. F. W. Herschel. . Outlines of Astronomy. Philadelphia. 18.53. Sib Charles Lyell. . . . Principles of Geology. Boston. 1853. E. S- WiNSLOW The Foreign and Domestic Commercial Calculator, Boston. Datb. Authoe. Titlb. 1854. James D. Dana A System of Mineralogy. New York. 1864. Jonathan Pereira. . . . Lectures on Polarized Light. Edited by Rev. Baden Powell. ndon. 1855. M. MiLNB Edwards. . . . Cours Elementaire d'HistoireNaturelle, (Zoologie.) Paris. 1855. BiCHABD Owen Lectures on Comparative Anatomy and Physiology of the Invertebrate Ani- mals. London. 1855. Thomas Btmeb Jones. . General Outline of the Organization of the Animal Kingdom, and Manual of Comparative Anatomy. London. 1855. T. F. Hardwich A Manual of Photographic Chemistry. London. 1855. John H. Balfodr. .... A Manual of Botany. London and Olaa- gow. 1855. Luther S. Cushino. . . . Rules of Proceeding and Debate in De. liberative Assemblies. Boston. 1855. John Brocklesby Elements of Astronomy. New York. 1855. James F. Johnston. . . . The Chemistry of Common Life. New York. 1855-7. William A. Milleb. . Elements of Chemistry, Theoretical and Practical. London. 1856. John Johnston A Manual of Chemistry. Philadelphia. 1856. David T. Ansted Elementary Course of Geology, Mineral- ogy, and Physical Geography. London. 1856. M. Y. Reonault Elements of Chemistry, translated by T. F. Betton. Edited by James C. Booth and WUliam L. Fabcr. Phila- delphia. 1856. W. H. C. Bartlett. .... Elements of Natural Philosophy. New York. 1856. John Wilson A Treatise on English Punctuation. Boston. 1856. William Gregory. ... A Hand-Book of Organic Chemistry. London. 1857. Louis Agassiz Contributions to the Natural History of the United States of America. Boston. 1857. William Youatt The History, Treatment, and Disease* of the Horse. Philadelphia. 1857. Asa Gray Manual of the Botany of the Northern United States. New York. 1857. James Eaton A Treatise on Arithmetic. Boston. 1857. Asa Gray First Lessons in Botany and Vegetable Physiology. New York. 1858. M. F. Billet Traite d'Optique Physique. Paris. 1858. George B. Wood, f - - ■ The Dispensatory of the United States Franklin Bacue. ) of America. Philadelphia. 1858. J. Van Der Hoeten. . . Hand-Book of Zoolcgy, translated by Rev. Wm. Clarke. Cambridge, Eng. 1858. Thomas Sctton A Dictionary of Photography. London. 1858. Sir John Stoddart. . . . Glossology, or the Historical Relations of Languages. London and Glasgow. 1858. Thomas Graham Elements of Inorganic Chemistry, in- cluding the Applications of the Science in the Arts. Philadelphia. 1858. Spencer F. Baird Catalogue of North American Birds, chiefly in the Museum of the Smith- sonian Institute. Washington. 1858. Benjamin Greenleap. . . The National Arithmetic. Boston. 1859. James D. Dana Synopsis of the Report on Zoophytes of the United i>tates Exploring Expedi- tion round the World. New Haven. 1859. Henry W. Herbert. . . Hints to Horse-Keepers. A Complete Manual for Horse- Keepers. New York. 1859. Sir Wm. Hamilton. . . . Lectures on MeUphysics and Logia Boston. ABBREYIATIONS AND SIGNS USED IN THIS DICTIONARY. ETYMOLOGY. Arab, stands for Arabic. Ann Armoric. A. S Anglo-Saxon. Belg Belgic or Flemish. Bret Breton. Brit British. Celt Celtic. Chal Chaldee, Chaldaic. Corn Cornish. Dan Danish. Dut Dutch. Eng English, England. Eth Ethiopic. Fin Finnish, Finland. Fl Flemish or Belgic. Ft French. Frs . Friesic, Frisian. Gael Gaelic. Ger. German. Goth Gothic. Gr Greek. Heb Hebrew. Hind Hindoo, Hindostanee. Hun Hungarian. Icel Icelandic. It Irish or Erse. It Italian. L Latin. Low L Low Latin. M. Goth MoDso- Gothic. Norm. Fr Norman or Old French. Norse Norse or Old Danish. Norw Norwegian or Danish. Old Fr Old or Norman-French. Per Persian. Pol Polish. Port. . Portuguese. Rus Russian. Sansc Sanscrit. Sax Saxon. Scot Scottish, Scotland. Slav Slavonic. Sp Spanish. Su. Goth Suio- Gothic or Norse. Sw Swedish. Syr Syriac, Syrian. Turk. Turkish. W Welsh. ARTS AND SCIENCES. Agric. stands for . Agriculture. Alg Algebra. AtuU Anatomy. Ant Antiquities. Arch Architecture. Arith Arithmetic. Arts Sg Sai Arts and Sciences. Astral Astrology. Astron Astronomy. Bib Biblical Matters. Bot Botany. Carp Carpentry. Chem Chemistry. Chron Chronology. Com Commerce. Conch Conchology. Eccl. Ecclesiastical Matters. Eccl. Hist Ecclesiastical History. Elec. Electricity. Ent Entomology. Fort Fortification. Geog Geography. Geol. Geology. Gram Grammar. llcr Heraldry. Herp Herpetology. Hist History. Hort. stands for Horticulture. Hyd Hydrostatics. Ich Ichthyology. Lmuj (not abbreviated.) Lit. . Literature. Logic (not abbreviated.) Man Manege or Horsemanship. Math Mathematics. Mebh Mechanics. Med. Medicine. Met Metaphysics. Meteor Meteorology. Mil Military Afiiairs. Min Mineralogy. Mus Music. Myth Mythology. Nat. Hist Natural History. Nat. Phil. .... Natural Philosophy. Naut Nautical or Marine AiTairs. Opt, Optics. Ornith Ornithology. Paint Painting. Pal Paleontology. Persp Perspective. Phren Phrenology. Phys Physiology. Pros Prosody. Rfiet Rhetoric. Sculp Sculpture. Surg Surgery. Theol Theology. ZoOl Zoology. AUTHORITIES. {Such as are abbreviated, and not commonly found in Tables of Abbreviations.) &1fi' \ ^^^^^ ^°^ Beaumont and Fletcher. Brit. Grit British Critic. Ch. Ex Christian Examiner. Ch. Ob Christian Observer. Ec. Rev Eclectic Review. Ed. Rev Edinbiirgh Review. Ency ■, . Encyclopaedia. Eng. Cyc English Cyclopaedia. Farm. Ency. . . Farmer's Encyclopaedia. For. Qu. Rev. . . Foreign Quarterly Review. Gent. Mag. . . . Gentleman's Magazine. Glos Glossary. Mil. Ency Military Encyclopaedia. Mir. for Mag. . . Mirror for Magistrates. Month. Rev. . . . Monthly Review, (London.) N. A. Rev. . . . North American Review. N. B. Rev. . . . North British Review. P. Cyc Penny Cyclopaedia. P. Mag Penny Magazine. Phil. Mag. . . . Philosophical Magazine. Phil. Trans. . . . Philosophical Transactions. Pol. Diet Political Dictionary. Qu. Rev. (^Lond.) Quarterly Review. Shak Shakespeare. Tra7is Translation. Txr „ ( Webster's Encyclopaedia of icy. • • • ^ Domestic Economy. West. Rev. . . . Westminster Review. 4®" The preceding list contains the names only of such authorities for the use and meaning of words as are com- monly abhreviated in this Dictionary, heing but a small part of the whole number cited. With respect to lexi- cographers, as Cotgrave, Bailey, Johnson. Kichard-vm, Brande, Ac, and the most distinguished authors in litera- ture and science, as Chaucer, Bacon, Sjienser, Hooker. Milton, Browne {Sir T.), Locke. Dryden, Pcq>e, Swift, Ad- dison, Blackilone, Franklin, Orwper, Paley, Blair. Camp- bell, Whately, Trench, &c., only the surname is commonly given, without any title. With respect to the authorities for pronunciation, the initial letters of the names of the most eminent orthocpists are given, as in thefoUowiDg list. PRONUNCIATION. S. . stands for . Sheridan. W. Walker. P Perry. J. Jones. E Enfield. F. Fulton and Knig^- Ja Jameson. K. Knowles. Sm Smart. R Reid. C Craig. O Ogilvie. B Boag. CI Clarke. Wr Wright. Wb Webster. GRAMMAR, &c. a. . stands for . Adjective. ad. Adverb. comp Comparative. co7y'. Conjunction. dim Diminutive. f. Feminine. ^g Figurative. i Imperfect o?" Preterite Tense. id. The same. i. e That is. imp Imperative. intejy Interjection. m. Masculine. mod Modern. n Noun. nom Nominative. Obs Obsolete. p Participle. p. a Participial Adjectiv pi Plural. pp Participles. prep Preposition. pi-et Preterite. priv Privative. pron Pronoun. R Rarely used, sing Singular. sup Superlative. Syn Synonymes. V. a Verb Active. V. n Verb Neuter. U. S. United States. SIGNS. ^p" Parallel lines [ || ] are prefixed to two or more words that come under the same prin- ciple of pronunciation. ^^ A dagger [t] is prefixed to words or meanings of words, that are obsolete or anti- quated. 5^" The figures occasionally annexed to the pronouncing words, refer to paragraphs in the • « Principles of Pronunciation." ^W Words printed in Italics, in the To- cabulary, (as Calculus and Nalveti,') are words which belong to foreign languages, and are not properly Anglicized. S*" The two parts of such compound words as are not properly written as simple words, are separated by a lengthened hyphen; as, Fellmc-commoner. The two parts of such words are commonly and properly separated, when written or printed, by a hyphen. 1^ The double accent mark, when used in pronunciation, denotes that the aspirated sound of the succeeding consonant is thrown back on the preceding syllable ; thus, peti"tion (pettsh'on.) (Ixviii) DICTIONARY OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE A pronounced ias a letter, but 9 as a word. 9 1. Tlic first letter of the alphabet, and a Towcl. It has various sounds, of which the three principal arc, the long, as in fate, the short, as in fat, and the broad, as in fall. — See Kei/ to the bounds of the Vowels, and Principles 0/ Pronunciation, No. 4. 2. [A. S. an, one.] The indefinite article, set before nouns in the singular number, and sig- nifying one, any, some ; as, "a man," "a tree" : — each, every-, as. "two dollars a day," "ten cents a bunch." — It is also put before collective nouns, as, " a multitude," " a dozen," " a thou- sand" ; and it is used in connection with plural nouns when they are preceded by the adjective feio and the phrase (/reat many, as, " a feto men," " a great many men " ; but in these cases it implies one whole number, or an aggregate of few or many. — Before words beginning with a vowel or a vowel sound, it retains n after it for the sake of euphony, as, " an ox," " an hour " ; this having been the original form of the indef- inite article. — See An. " Any, an, a, one, seem all to be nearly equivalent words, ami derived from one orij^in ; I moan from aiie, Mie name of unity. Hence a, or an, and any are fre- quently synonymous ; ' a considerate man would have acted difTeroutly ' ; that is, any considerate man." Dr. Cromhie. " In the generality of grammars the definite article the. and the indefinite article an are the very first parts of s|ieech that are considered. In no language, in its oldest stage, is there ever a word giving, in its primary sense, the ideas of a and the." Latham. 3. A contraction for at, on, or in, before par- ticiples or participial nouns. " Long a com- ing." Bacon. They go a begging to a bankrupt's door. Drydcn. 4. t A barbarous corruption for he. Stand hcri' by mc. Master Robert Shallow s I will make the kingdoyougrac* : I will leer upon him as a coinea by. Sluik. 5. t A barbarous corruption for hav^e. 1 had not thought my body could a yielded. Beaum. t( Fl. Vg" In com|K>sition the prefixed syllable a, in words from the Anglo-Saxon, is derived, in some cases, from % preposition ; as, aboard, ablaze, arow, adays, aloft, for- merly written on board, on blaze, on roie, on days, on lofi. In otiicr cases, according to Lye, "it was ori- (Cinally merely an initial augment, altering nothing in the sense of the word " ; and hence, in some words frmn that language, it is sometimes retained and some- times driipiiod, as, abidan or biilan, to abide or bide, oirrcan, to break ; and, when retained in some, it seems to add an intensive effect, as, awake, arine, in Milton's line, Aioaix, arue, or be for ever fUlen. In many words to which it is prefixed, it has a pecu- liar significance not easily defined, as, afresh, aloud, anew ; and in some cases ot*^ colloquial usage it seems to be expletive, and may have originated in a careless proniiiiriation, as, aweary, acold, used by Shakspeare : " I 'gin tobeairraruofthesun";" Poor Tom 'naeold." In words of Greek origin, a is a prefix of privative or negative meaning; as in aehromalk, from a, not, or without, and xptofia, color, i. e. without color. AAM(lm), n, [Dnt.aam.] (Com.) A Dutch liquid measure, varying in different cities : — at Am- sterdam, it is nearly equal to 41 English wine gallons; at Antwerp, to 36^; at Hamburg, to 384 ; and at Frankfort, to 39 gallons. McCulloch. AA-RfiN'IC, (9-rBn'ik), >„. Relating to AA-RON'{-CAL (j-rSn'^-k?!), S Aaron, the Jew- ish high priest, or to the priesthood, of which Aaron was the head. AB— . A prefix to words of Latin origin, as in ab- solve, from absolvo {ab and solvo, to loosen). It is a Latin preposition, and signifies from. It becomes abs before words beginning with c, q, or t ; as, -abs-tain, from abstineo {abs and teneo, to hold). t^ At the beginning of the names of English places, it generally sliows that they have some rela- tion to an abbey or abbot ; as, Mingdon. Oibson. Ab, n. [Heb. jSt, verdure.] The fifth month of the ancient Hebrew sacred year, but the eleventh of the civil year, or, in intercalary years, the twelfth. P. Cijc. Ab'A-CA, n. A sort of hemp or flax which grows in the Philippine Islands. Herbert. Ab-a-CIS'CUS, n. [L., from Gr. dim. of Sjia^, a slab.] 1. (Arch.) A small square stone in a tessel- lated pavement. Britton. 2. An abacus. Gwilt. AB'A-cIsT, n. One who casts accounts wth an abacus. [11.] Todd. A BACK', ad. [A. S. on beec, on the back, behind.] 1. Backwards. They drew alxicl:, as half with shame confound. Spenter. [Still used in the north of England. Broekett.] 2. (Xaut.) Noting the situation of the sails when pressed against the masts by the force of the wind. Taken all aback, i. e. by surprise or unawares. t Ab'ACK, n. [L. abacus; Fr. abaque.'] An aba- cus. B. Jonson. t AB'A-c6t, n. The cap of state, wrought into a figure of two crowns, once used by English kings. Brande. A-BAC ' TOR, n. [L., from abigo, abactus, to drive awav.] \Law.) One who steals cattle in herds, in distinction from the thief who steals one or two. Crabb. A-BAc'U-lGs, n. [L., dim. of o6oct«.] An aba- ciscus. Ab'A-COs, n. ; pi. Xb'a-cT. [L., from Gr. S0,ii, a slab, or from Phoenician abak, sand, strewn upon a surface for writing.] 1. A sideboard ; a table placed against the wall, serving as a cupboard or buffet. 2. An ancient Roman game played on a board. 3. An instrument employed to facilitate ar- ithmetical calculations, being a parallelogram, divided by parallel wires, on which perfo- rated beads, or little ivory balls, were strung as counters, or by bars on which the counters were slid along in grooves ; the counters on the Boman Doric ABANDON lower wire or bar representing units, those on the next above tens, and so on, increasing by multiples of 10. The left side of the cut repre- sents the number 163,968. Brande. 4. A table strewed with dust, on which math- ematicians were in the practice of drawing their diagrams. 6. (Arch.) The upper part, or crowning mem- ber, of the capital of a column, upon which the architrave is laid. - „ , ^ 6. A rectangular Grecian Dor slab of marble, stone, porcelain, &c., used ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ for coating the walls ^ ^T^^^T^^^^y of rooms in panels, or over the whole sur- face. FairhoU. Abacus harmnnieus, the structure and dispo- sition of the keys of a musical instniinent. CorinlUaa. Crabb. t a-bAd 'DOM-, n. [Heb. "plS*, destruction.] 1. An evil angel. " "' The angel of the bottomless pit, whose name in the Ilrbrew tongue is Abaddon, but in the Greek tongue hath hb name Apolfyon, Sev. Ix. IL 2. The bottomless pit itself; hell. In all her gate* Abaddon mes Thy bold attempt JfittoM. A-BAfT' (12), prep. [A. S. a and afian, behind.] (Naut.) Denoting towards the stem or hinder part of a vessel ; behind ; as, " Abafi the main- mast " ; — often contracted into aft, in which case it becomes an adverb. 4r«r- A thing is abuft the foremast when it is be- tween the foremast and the stern ; and a distant object is abqfl the beam, when it is situated in an arc of tiM horizon embraced between the directierpendiciilar to ike keel, and the point to which the ship's stern is directed. AB'4-OfyM; n. [Eth.. stateltf abbot.'] An Ethio- pian fowl, remarkable for its beauty, and for a sort of horn on its head. Crabb. t A-ByVI'SANCE, n. [Fr. abaiaaer, to let down, bow down.] Obeisance. Skinner. AB-AL'H:\-ATE(»b-ary?n-aO. «"•.«• W-. abalirno •. ' ab, from, and alienus, belonging to another.] [1. AHALIEXATED; pp. ABALIEXATINO, ABAL- lENATED.] 1. t To estrange. Abo. Sandys. 2. {Ciril LawJ) To transfer the title of prop- erty from one to another ; to alienate. AB-AI^ip.V-A'TION(»b-il-y9n-5'8huii), n. [L.vrit : — removal of a nuisance. Plea of abatement, a plea that the suit of the plaintiff may cease for the time being. Burrill 4. {Her,) A mark of disgrace annexed to a coat of arms on account of something dishon orable in the bearer. Dr, Spencer- Syn. — See Allowance. A-BAT'ER, n. 1. One who abates, 2, A thing that abates, [k.] Abaters of acrimony or sharpness are expressed oils of rtp* vegetables, ... as of almonds, &c. Arbuthnot. AB'A-TIS (ab'si-tis or ab-a-te') [ab'9-tts, Ja. K. Wb, ; 9-b5t-te', Sot.], n, [Fr., from abattrc, to beat down, to fell.] {Mil.) An intrenchment formed by trees felled and laid together length- wise, with the branches pointing outwards, to prevent the approach of an enemy, while the trunks serve as a breastwork to the defendants. Ency. Brit. A-B.\'TIS, n, [Low L., a, from, batus, a measure ; Heb. £13-] {A?it,) An officer of the stables, who had the care of measuring out the proven- der ; an avenor. Todd. Ab'A-TI^ED (ab'9-tlzd), p, a. Provided with an abatis. Qu, Rev, AB-AT-.j6uR' (Sb-a-zhor'), n, [Fr., from abattre, to throw down, AnAjour, day, or light.] {Arch,) A skylight, or any sloping aperture for the ad- mission of light to a room. Britton. A-BA'TOR, n. {Law,) One who abates : — one who, having no right of entry, gets possession of a freehold to the prejudice of the lawful heir or devisee, after the death of the possessor, and before the heir or devisee enters, Burrill. AB-AT-TOIR ' (5b-si-twbr'), n, [Fr., from abattre, to knock down.] A large public slaughter- house for cattle. P, Cyc. fAB'A-TUDE, »i. {Law.) Any thing diminished. Bailey. t AB'A-TURE, n. Spires of grass trodden down by a stag in passing. Bailey. t A-BAWED',a. Abashed. — See Abash. Chancer. Abb, n. [A. S. 06.] A term used by clothiers for the yarn of a weaver's warp. They say also abb- wool in the same sense. Lncy. Brit. AB'BA, n. [Heb. 2S ; Chaldee, StaS-] A Syriac word, which signifies literally father, and fig- uratively a superior. A^ylijfe. Ye have received the Spirit of adoption, whereby we cry, .466a, Father. Horn. viii. U. iifg" Writers of the middle ages gave the name of Abba to the superior of a monastery, usually called Abbot. AB'BA-CY, n. [Low L. «66rtesse.^ The governess or supe- rior of an abbey or convent of nuns, or of a nunnery ; possessing generally the same dig- nity and authority as an abbot, except that she cannot exercise the spiritual functions apper- taining to the priesthood. The atibeta shuts the gate npon ui. Shak. All'iipy (&l)'l)?)i «• [Low L. abbatia; It. badia; tip. abadia; Ft. abhai/e.] p/. Ab'bey§. 1. A religious community, or monastery, un- der the superintendence of an abbot or abbess ; — a priory ; a monastery ; a convent ; a cloister. 2. A house adjoining or near a monastery or convent, for the residence of the abbot or supe- rior. Braiide. 3. A church attached to a convent. Brande. 4. A name applied to a duchy or earldom in the early times of the French monarchy ; the dukes and counts calling themselves abbots, though in all respects secular persons, in con- sequence of the possessions of certain abbeys having been conferred upon them by the crown. Ency. Syn. — Mbey, priory, monastery, cloister, eoneent, friary, and nunnery are all used to denote religious houses, common in Catholic countries. jSbheij has been used to denote a reliKiuus house of the lii);liest rank. Priories were formerly regarded as sulmrdinate to ab- beys ; but latterly there is cenerally little or no differ- ence, except that tlie former are under the direction of a prior, and the latter of an abbot. The proper idea of a cloister is seclusion, and it may include religions of either sex. Monastery denotes solitude, and is com- monly appropriated to monks. A concent, of which the leading; idea is community, is the residence of monks or nuns. A friary is a liouse for friars, and a nunnery for nuns or female religious. AB'BPY-LAND, m. {Law.) An estate in ancient tenure annexed to an abbey. Blackstone. AB'BjpV-LtJB'BpR, n. A slothful loiterer in a religious house, under pretence of holy retire- ment and austerity. Thli li no Father Dominic, no huge, over-grown nfthe;/- lubher. Di-yden. AB'BQT, n. [Syr. abba, a father. — L. abbas, abba- lis ; It. Mate ; Sp. abad ; Fr. abbe.\ 1. The chief governor, father, or superior of an abbey, convent, or monastery of monks, or male persons living under peculiar religious vows. tlook. 2. A title of bishops whose sees were for- merly abbeys; and also of French dukes and counts upon whom the possessions of abbeys had been conferred. 3. A title borne formerly by the civil author- ities in some places, especially among the Gen- oese, whose chief magistrate used to be called abbot of the people. Ab'BQT-SHIp, n. The state or office of an abbot. ABBRKUyoiR,n. [Fr.] See Abrbvvoir. AB-BRE'Vl-ATE [?b-br8'vi-5t, W.J. F.Ja. K. Sm. C; 9b-br6'vy&t, S. E.; ^b-brSv'Q-at, P.], v. a. [L. abbrevio, abbreviatus ; ab, from, and brevis, short; It. abbreviare; Sp. abreviar.'] [». ab- bkbviated ; pp. abbkeviatino, abbkevi- atedJ 1. To shorten by contraction of parts ; to contract words or sentences in writing, print- ing, or discourse. It ii on« thing to cUjreviate by eontracUiig, aaothtr bv cut- ting oil'. /hiriM. The only Invrntion of late year*, which hath cnnlribulvd towunla iHiliti'iicM in iliiicnurH-, in tliat <>(' abbrevialiny, iir re- ducing word* of rauny ■yllahlea into one. Swi/t. 2. To curtail ; to cut short ; to abridge. The length of their dayi Iwibre the flood, which wer* aHirr- viiUeU after. Browne. 3. {Math.) To reduce fractions to the lowest terms. Brande. t AB-BRE' Vl-.\TR, n. An abridgment ; an epitome. Thia true aM»'«rti'a/eof all hii workf. Brerui/. AB-BUE'V|-ATK, a. {Dot.) Having one part short in relation to another. LwMon. AB-BRK-VI-A'TIQN, n. 1. Act of abbreviating; contraction ; curtailment. Thin iKxik, «» graver author* tay, wait railed Llt)er Domui Dei, and, by uUireriuliuit, UouicMiay Book. Sir H'm. I'emjile.. 2. One or more of the letters of a word, standing for the whole ; as, N. for North, Gen. for General. 3. {Math.) Reduction of fractions to the lowest terms. Brande. 4. {Mus.) One dash or more, through the stem of a minim or a crotchet, or under a scmibrevc, by which such note is converted • into as many quavers, semiauavcrs, and ^S demisemiquavers as it is equal to in time. ^T Moore. AB-BRE'V|-A-T0R [?b-brfi've-5-tor, Ja. K. Sm. Wb. ; 9b-br5-v9-a'tor, W. J. F. ; ab-brSv-ya'tor, S.; ?b-brfiv'e-a-tor, P.], n. [Ft. abbreviatettr.'] 1. One who abbreviates or abridges. *' The abbreviators of Dio Cassius." West. 2. One of a college of seventy-two persons in the chancery of Rome, whose business it is to draw up the pope's briefs, and to reduce pe- titions, when granted by him, into proper form for being converted into bulls. AB-BRE'VI-A-TQ-RY, a. That abbreviates or shortens. " Todd. AB-BRE'VJ-A-TURE, n. 1. A mark used for shortening ; an abbreviation. The hand of Providence write* often by abbreviatitreit. hi- eroglyphics, or short characters. Browne. 2. A compendium or abridgment. This is an excellent abbrcviatuiv of the whole duty of a Christian. Jip. Taylor. ABB-WOOI. (-wfil), n. {Among clothiers.) Warp. A, B, C (a-be-s5), n. The first three letters of the alphabet, as designating the whole ; the al- phabet. ABC book, a little elementary book by which read- ing is taught, men comes answer Shot. Then comes answer Like an A 1} C book. AB'DAL§, n. pi. [Perhaps from Ar. abdallah, servant of God. Ency. Brit.] A class of re- ligious fanatics or monks among the Persians, corresponding to dcrviscs among the Turks. JB-DE-lA'FI, n. {Bot.) An Egj-ptian plant like a melon. Crabb. Ab'D^-RITE, n. An inhabitant of Abdera, a maritime to\vn of Thrace ; — applied especially to Democritus, the philosopher. AB'D^ST, n. Mahometan rite of ablution before prayer. Pitt. AB'D1-C.4NT, n. One who abdicates. Smart. Ab'DI-CANT, a. Abdicating; renouncing; — used with of. "Monks abdicant of their or- ders." Whitlock. AB'DJ-cATE, v. a. [L. abdico, abdicatiu, to re- nounce ; Sp. abdicar; Fr. ahdiqiter.] [(.ab- dicated; pp. ABDICATIXO, abdicated.] 1. To renounce, relintjuish, or abandon, as an office, station, or dignity, so as to forfeit all right to it ; as, " To abdicate a throne." 2. To resign ; to give up ; to surrender. He ought to lav down his roniniinlon, and to aMimte that power he hath, rather than to suffer it forced to a willing in- justice, ill'. fio/L 3. To deprive of right, as when a father dis- cards or disclaims a son. Ency. Brit. Scaliger would needs turn down Tlomer.and abdicnif him, after the posscnion of three thousand yean. Jiri/iln. Syn. — At the Enplisb revolution of 1(W8, the Par- liament declared that Kine James had aMicated the throne, rather than rfi-Mrtrd it, because the Utter might imply that he had not forfeited his right to retuni. Kee I^ird ^hmhi'i cpeecb on that occaaion. .-> See Abandon. Ab'I)|-';aTR, r. n. To relinquish or abandon an otiice, btation, or dignity ; to reftign ; to give up a right. He cannot ahiltcnie tnr hli children, olhcnriw thaa br hia own consent in fuim to a l>iU IWiin th« two houaca. te^ AB-DI-cA'TIQN, M. [L. abdicatio.] Act of abdi- cating ; renunciation of an office or dignity by its holder ; the voluntary renunciation of su- preme power; — resignation. The coDsrqurncoi drawn from these fbeta (namely , that Ihcj ■mounted to an olfllrtillun 'if the govvmnient s which 'I'Wtm- fiVm did not aircct <>iily tin- imtxhi "f |||<- king hiniM-ir. hut also of all his heirs, and ri-ndrriM the tlimnr alMrilulely slid cum- plctejy vacant) it belonged to our aaccators to dctcmiine. BkacLf AB'DI-cA.T|VE [«b'd?-kl-tiv, IF. J. F. Ja. Sm.; 9b-(Uk'9-tTv, S. E. P.], a. Causing or implying an abdication, [k.] Bau^y. tAB'DI-TlVE, a. [L. abdo, abditia, to hide.] That has the power of hiding. Bailey. AB'D|-TQ-RY, n. [L. abditorium.] {Law.) A place to hide goods in. CotctU. AB-DO'MgN (108) [»li-d6'ni?n, S. W. J. E. F. Ja. K. Stn.; fb-dS'iiien or Hh'dn-mtn, P.; tb'do-mCn or 9b-d6'ni?ii, Wb.], n. [L., from €ibdo, to hide, to conceal.] pi. L. ^Jt-DdM'f-y^ ; Eng. ^b- DO'M^N?. 1. (Anat.) The lower venter or belly, being below the diaphragm and ab bihrtb* good ahearmtet, or good behavtor. Blaet^om. A-B5-C5-dA'RI-.AN, n. A teacher or a learner of the alphabet. * Cockeram. A-B5-C5-DA'RI-AN, a. [Low L.a4ee«far«K*, from MiEN, SKR; m6VE, N6R, SON ; bOlL, BCR, BOUB. — g. 9, ^ |, soft; C, G, g, g, hard; ? o* «; ? « gx. — THIS, this. ABECEDARY ABJECT the names of the first three letters of the alpha- bet, a, b, f.] Relating to, or containing, the al- phabet. Mece.darian hymns, liymns in which the several verses bejrinwith the letters of the alphahet iure mentioned by St. Augustine, A-BpL-O'NI-AN, ) which arose in Africa near tlie beginniiig of the third century. They pre- ter.dcd to follow the example of Abel, who, they said, was married, but lived in continence. Buck. A'BpL-MOSK, n. [Ar. habb el misk, musk seed.] {Bot.) Musk mallow, producing the amber seed or musk seed, which is often substituted in per- fumery for animal musk, and is used in the East for flavoring coU'ee ; Abelmoschus moschatus ; — written also ahelinusk- Loudon. A'B^R-, n. [Celt.] The mouth of a river, or the confluence of one river with another; — used as a prefix to the names of several small towns situated at such confluences ; as, Aber- deen, Crabb. A-BER'Dg-VlNE, n. {Ornith.'\ The European siskin, a small green and yellow finch, belong- ing to the same sub-gonus as the goldfinch of England ; Carduelis spinus. Brande. t .\B-ERR', V. n. [L. dberro ; ab, from, and erro, to wander.] To wander ; to err. Robinson. AB-ER'RANCE, n. Deviation from right ; error. Glanville. AB-ER'RAN-CY, n. Same as Auekuance. [k.] Browne. AB-ER'RANT, a. [L. aberro, aberrans, to wander from.] 1. Deviating from the right way. Bailey. 2. {Bot.) Deviating from the common struc- ture. Loudo7i. AB-pR-RA'TION, n. [L. aberratio.'] 1. Deviation from the right way, or from the natural state ; — applied to the mind. So then we draw near to God, when, npcnting us of our forme' aberratioim from liim, we renew our covenants with him. Bp. Hall. 2. (Astro7i.) The change of the apparent po- sitions of the heavenly bodies, arising from the combined effects of the motion of light and the motion of the earth in its orbit. Airy. 3. ( Opt.) The deviation of the rays of light from the principal focus of a curved lens or speculum. Lloyd. I" AB-ERR'ING, p. a. Going astray. Browne. t AB-P-rCtn'CATE, v. a. [L. ab, from, and erun- co, eruncatus, to weed out with a grubbing-hoe.] To pull up by the roots. Bailey. AB-P-RUN'ca-TOR, n. A machine for weeding ; a weeder. " Farm. Diet. A-BKT', V. a. [A. S. abet, better, or betan, to make better, and, applied to fire, to kindle. — Old Fr. abetter, to incite, to animate.] [i. abet- ted ; pp. ABETTING, ABETTED.] 1. To support, aid, help, assist, or encour- age ; — used chiefly in o bad sense. And you that do nhfi him in this kind Cherish rebellion, and are rebels all. Shnk. 2. (Law.) To encourage, set on, instigate to eommit a crime, or to assist in some criminal act. Cowell. Syn. — We abet a quarrel ; encourage pretensions ; •upport an interest ; maintain a cause. ■f A-B£t', n. The act of abetting. Chaucer. f A-B6t'MENT, «. The act of abetting. Wotton. A-B£t'TAL, n. Act of abetting : aid. West. Rev. A-BET'TER, n. One who abets ; an abettor. .\-BET'TOR, 71. {Law.) One who abets, or gives aid or encouragement in an unlawful or crimi- nal act ; an accessary ; an accomplice. Cowell. Syn. — 9hettur.f propose, set on foot, encourage; accessaries take a subordinate part, assist, aid, help, further ; accomplices take an active part. tAB-K-VAC-U-A'TION, n. [L. ab, from, and evacuo, to empty.j {Med.) A partial evacua- tion. Crabb. A-BEY'ANCE (ji-ba'jins), n. [Fr. abayer, to listen with the mouth open, to gape after, to long for.] {Law.) Expectation or contemplation of law. When there is no i>erson in existence in whom nn inherit- ance can vest, it is said to be in aheiiaiice, that is, in expecta- tion : the law considering it us always potentially existing, and ready to vest whenever a proper owner appears. Bluckstimc. A-BEY'ANT (9-ba'gint), a. {Law.) Being in abey- ance. Qu. Rei\ tAB'GRE-GATE, v. a. [L. abyrego.] To lead out of the flock. Baiiey. t AB-GR?-gA'TION, 71. A separation from the flock. Bailey. AB HAL, )„_ The fruit of a species of Asiatic Ab'IIJL, ) cypress ; — used in medicine as an emmenagogue. Dimgliso7i. AB-HOR', V. a. [L. abhorreo, to shrink back from ; ab, from, and ho7-7-eo, to shudder ; It. db- borrire; S^t. aboiTecer ; Fr. abho7Ter.] [*. ab- HOURED ; pp. ABHORRING, ABHORRED.] To hate extremely, or with contempt or acrimony ; to abominate ; to detest ; to loathe ; to cherish a strong dislike to ; to regard with horror. Thou shalt utterly abhor it, for it is a cursed thing. J)ev(. vii. 26. Syn. — We abhor cruelty and inhumanity ; hate pride and vice of all sorts ; hate an oppressor; abomi- nate impiety, profaneness, and indecency ; detest base- ness ; loathe the sight of offensive objects, and, when sick, food. AB-HORRED', p. a. Hated extremely ; detested. Thou wast a spirit too delicate To act her earthy and afJiorred commands. Shai: AB-HOR'R^NCE, M. Act of abhorring; detesta- tion ; great hatred ; extreme aversion ; utter dislike. It draws upon him the hatred and abhorrence of all men here, and subjects him to the wrath of God hereafter. South. AB-HOR'R^N-CY, n. Same as Abhorrence : — formerly used ifc-ith f/'om. Iler knowledge, her conjugal virtues, her nhfiorrenci/ from the vanities of her sex, are likewise celebrated by our author. Dri/dcii. AB-HOR'RgNT, a. 1. Struck with abhorrence; hating; detesting. The arts of pleasure in despotic courts I spurn abhoneiil. Glover. 2. Contrary to; foreign from; inconsistent with; — used with to or from, but more com- monly and more properly with to. This legal, and, as it should seem, injudicious profanation, so abhorrent to our stricter principles, was received with a very faint murmur by the easy nature of polytheism. Oiblx)n. An hypothesis abhorrent from the vulgar. Glanville. AB-HOR'R^INT-LY, ad. In an abhorrent manner. AB-HOR'R^R, n. One who abhors. Do7ine. AB-H6r'RI-BLE, a. That is to be abhorred. Biish. AB-HOR'RING, n. Object or feeling of abhor- rence ; abhorrence. Doii7ie. J' BIB, n. [Heb. 3'^S8t, a ripe car of corn.] The first month of the Hebrew year, more generally known by the Chaldean name of Nisan (blos- som) ; answering to part of March and April, and so called because, in Palestine, barley was in ear at that time. Crabb. A-BID'ANCE, n. Act of abiding ; abode, [r.] Month. Rev. A-BTde', v. n. [Goth, beidan; A. S. abidaTi, or bida7i, to abide, to bide.] [i. abode ; pp. abid- ing, ABODE.] L To stay in a place temporarily; to sojourn. I.ct the damsel abide with us a few days. Gen. xxiv. 65. 2. To dwell ; to reside. The Mnrqnis Dorset, as I hear, is fled To Richmond, in the parts where lie abides. Shale. 3. To remain ; to continue. Let every man abide in the same calling. 1 Cor. vii. 4. To endure without offence ; to bear. Though thou didst learn, had that i Could not iihide to be with. But thy vile race, n't whicli good natures Shak. Mide with a friend, by a promise, in or at a place. Syn. — ^bide for a nifrht ; stay a while ; sojourn for a week or month ; dwell in a house with continuance ; reside In a street or a house for a season ; remain or continue in a situation ; endure or bear patiently. — See Continue. A-BIDE', V. a. 1. To wait for; to await; to at- tend. Bonds and afflictions abide me. Acts xx. 23, 2. To bear ; to support. The day is terrible ; who can «6inc of England, and expreaaly disclainia any riglit to the crown of England in the deacendanta of the Pretender. Jiiamtc. AB-JORE', V. a. [L. abjure, to deny or renounce upon oath ; ab, from, and jtcro, to swear ; It. ahbinrare; Sp. abjurar; Fr. abjnrer.'] \i. ab- JUKEU; pp. ABJURING, ABJUKEl).] 1. To cast off or renounce upon oath; as, "To abjure allegiance to a government or a sover- eign." And thereupon he took the oath in that caac provided, viz. that he a/j/Biieiu in the main. Pope. 4. {Chem. & Med.) The washing by which chemical preparations and medicines are sepa- rated from extraneous matters. Dwujlison. 5. {Roman Catholic Church.) The water in which the priest who consecrates the host washes his hands, or the drop of wine and water swal- lowed by him immediately after receiving the holy host. AB-LC"TIQ.\-A-RY, a. Relating to ablution. .^B-LU'V|-O.N (24), n. [L. ablitrium, a flood.] 1. Act of washing or carrying away by water : — a flood. 2. That which is washed ofT. [r.] Dtoight. A'BLY (i'bl?), ad. In an able manner; with ability. AB'N'P-gAte, r. o. \lj. abtiego, tUtnfgatus.y To deny, [r.] Burke. Thay hare atmegated the idea of Indepcndeiit richu of :h» AB-.\p-(;A'TIO.\,ii. Denial ;rcnimciation. "The abnegation or renouncing of all his own inter- ests." [k.] UummontL AB'iN(;-GA-T|VE, o. Denying; negative. Month. Rev. t AB'N^-GA-TQR, n. One who denies. Sandyt. AB'.\e:T, n. [Heb. C:S5t.] A Jewish priest's girdle ; an abanct. " ' " tlooper. t Ab'NQ-dAte, r. a. [L. abnodo.] To cut off the knots of trees. Ash. tAB-XQ-DA'TIQN, n. [L. abnodatio.] The act of cutting off the knots of trees. Bailey. AB-\OR'MAL, a. [L. abnormis; ab, from, and norma, a sauare or rule.] Not according to rule; irregular. Brande. AB-N6r'M|-TY, n. Quality of being abnormal; irregularity ; deformity. Ec. Bet. t AB-NOR'MOVS,a. Irregular; abnormal. Bailey. A-BOARD' (»-b«rd'), ad. [a, for on, and board, from A. S. a, on, and bord, plank or board ; It. abordo ; Fr. abord.] {\aut.) In a ship ; within a ship ; on board. lie loudly called to such at were ahoard. SiitMKr. To fall aboard of, to strike Sfainst anotlMr skip : — to go aboard, to enter a ship; to embtxk. ~^ Aboard main tack, an order to draw one of the corneni of tlw mainsail down to the cliess-tree. A-BOARD', />r<*p. On board of; to; into. We left tills phice, and were again conveyed aboard our "biP- FxrUliag. t A-Blit. We efface in order to uieiid ; we obliterutt, to forget ; we abotisk, to destroy. .\-B6L'|Sn-A-BLE, a. That may be abolished. Cotgrare. ,\-B- scandaL Stci/t. AB-Q-iJ"TIO.N (94), n. Act of abolishing; de- struction ; annihilation ; abrogation. From the total nbohtmn of the pnpuUr power, may be dated tlic ruin i>r Rome. Orrm. Wi< all know that many wrll-m^aning men rnted asainat the atmlitimi of the slave tm. . ABUOGATIXO, AHKOOATED.j To repeal; to annul; to abolish entirely, as distinguished from derogate and abrogate. — See Dekooate and Okkogate. All statutes made by King Edward were revoked, a&ix>«a(- ed, and made frustrate. JlaU. Syn. — See Abolish. tAB'RO-GATE, o. Annulled; abolished. K. Ed. VI. Injunc. AB-RO-GA'TIQN, H. The act of abrogating ; are- peal. Clarendon. .^-BHO 'Mj9, n. FGr., from a, priv., and PpUpa, food, not fit for food.] (Hot.) A genus of plants of the same order as fheobroma, or the chocolate-tree. t A-BR66i)', ad. [A. S. brod, a brood.] In the act of brooding. Bancroft. t A-BR66D'|NG,n. Act of sitting abrood. Barret. t A-BROOK' (?-br4k'), ». a. [A. S. brucan, to bear.] To brook ; to bear ; to endure. Shak. jf-BRdT'O-JvOM, or jl-BRdT'j9-J^0M, n. [L. ; from Gr. ajipdroyov, from a priv. and (ipor6{, mor- tal.]^ {Dot.) The plant southernwood ; Arte- misia abrotanum. Loudon. AB-RCtpt', a. [L. abrttmpo, abruptus, to break off.] 1. Broken ; craggy ; rotigh ; rugged ; steep ; precipitous. " Rocks abrupt." Thomson. 2. Blunt ; unseasonable ; hasty ; sudden ; without the customary or proper preparatives. " Abrupt departure." S/iak. 49~ Used by Milton as a noun ; as, " Over the vast a*r«j»L" AB-Rfrrr', r. a. L tTp disturb ; to interrupt. Hrowne. 2. To break off. [r.] Vong/teare. 4LB-Rf;p'TI0N, n. Act of breaking off; violont and sudden separation. Shak. AB-RUl'T'LY, ad. In an abrupt manner; hastily; without due forms of preparation. Abruptly pinnate, {Bot.) pinnate without an odd leaflut at the end. Gray. AB-RC'PT'N{:sS, n. 1. State of being abrupt; steepness; craggedness. It'oodicard. 2. An abrupt manner ; suddenness ; roughness. " Abruptness of the sentences." Wurton. A'BRya, n. [Or. alifdi, delicate.] {Bot.) A West- Indian tree with papilionaceous flowers ; wild liquorice. Necklaces and rosaries are often formed of its seeds. Loudon. Ab^SC£8S, n. ; pi. Xa'scEss-^f. [L. abscessus', Fr. aicf-*, a departure, a suppuration.] {Med.) An inflammatory or purulent tumor ; an im- posthume, gathering, or boil. Ihinglison. AB-SCInD' (9b-slnd'), t\ a. [L. abscindo, to cut off; Gr. axRu, to rend asunder.] To cut off. " Two syllables abscinded." Johnson. Ab'ScIss, >i.; pi. Ab'scTss-??. (Geom.) Aline used in reference to a point, being a portion of a line, given in position, and called the axis oj abscisses, which is cut off by a line or a plane passing « through the point and parallel to a given line or plane. Peirce. IKS' The abscisses and ordinates of the several points ofa curve determine its nature. In the figure, C D is tlie absciss, and li D the ordinate, of the point B. .^B-SCls 'SA, n. ; pi. L. ab-scIs'sa! ; Eng. pi. ab- scIs/sAs. [L.] (Geom.) Same as Absciss. BraMcf«. AB-SCl§'SION (9h-slzh'uii, 93) [sh-slzh'uu, W. J. F. Ja. k. Sm. C. ; ^b-slsh'uii, &'. P.], n. [L.oi- acissio.] 1. Act of cutting off. Wiseman. 2. State of being cut off. Brotcne. 4P3~" I have difTered from Mr. Sheridan in marking as in tliis word, and I think with the best usage on my side. Though datible ss is almost always pro- nounced sharp and hissing, yet wlien a sharp s pre- cedes, it seems mure agreeable to the ear to pronounce the succeeding s Hat. Thus, thougli the termination iUon is always sharp, yet because the .« in transition is necessarily sharp, the t goes into the flat sound, as if written tratisizhioa, which see." fValker. These remarks relating to the pronunciation of double ss in abscission are applicable also to the double s in scission and rescission, and also in tlie word scis- sors. AB-SCOND', v. n. [L. abscondo, to hide away.l " [t. AK.SCONDEI) ; pp. absconding, ABSCONDED.] To absent one's self privately ; to withdraw ; to secrete one's self ; to hide ; to steal away. " The marmot absconds all xvinter." Bay. t AB-SCOND', V. a. To conceal. "Nothing is absconded from us. Bentley. t AB-SCt'JxND'?NCE, n. Concealment. Phillips. AB-SCuND'gR, n. One who absconds. Ab'SJNCE, n. [L. absentia; aiswm, to be away ; Fr. absence.'] 1. The state of being absent, opposed to /wc»- ence ; as, " During my absence." 2. Carelessness ; inattention. "The little absences of mankind." Addison. 3. Want ; as, " In the absence of proof." 4. {Law.) Non-appearance. Burrill. Ab'S^NT, a. [L. absens ; Fr. absent."] 1. Not present. "Absent from her sight." Shak. 2. Careless ; inattentive ; abstracted in mind. Addison. Syn. — A man is literally absent when he is not present ; he is flgiiratively absent, inatlentire in mind, or abstracted, when his mind is occupied with some subject not connected with the com|iany present. AB-8f:NT', r. a. [i. absented; pp. absenti.no, ABSENTED.] 1. To withdraw; to forbear to come into presence : " If any member ahsitUs himself." Addison. 2. To make absent, [n.] Go — for thy stay, not fVcc, abnent* thee more. Milton. t AB'SpNT,H. One who is not present. Bp. Morton. t A B-S^N-TA 'N e-Ol'S, a. [Low L. absetitaneus.] Habitually absenting one s self. Bailey. AB-S^N-TA'TION, n. An absenting one's •elf. Your nljarnlalioH frum the lloat had mr entire rmicur- •«•":«• WakrJttU. AB-S^N-TEE', n. One absent from his gtiition or country : — a landed proprietor who resides at a distance from his estate; — a terra applied generally by way of reproach to Irish landlords. A fTcat p«rt of eatatca In Ireland are owned br tijmUtr*. VkOd. AB-a?N-TEE'TlJM, n. The state of an absentee ; the act or habit of residing at a distance from one's real estate. Qu. Rev. AB-SfcNT'6R, n. his place. One who absents himself from Thurlow. tAB-StNT'M^NT, n. A remaining absent from. Barroie. AB-SI.V'TIII-AN, a. Of the nature of worrawood- " AbsiiUhiait bitterness." Randolph, AB-8lN'TH|-AT-5D, p. a. Impregnated with wormwood. Bailey. AB-STn'THINE, n. {Chem.) A peculiar bitter principle extracted from wormwood- Brande. AB-SIJ^-rni'rk^, n. [L.] (Med.) Wine im- pregnated with wormwood. Dwtglison. .^fl-S/JV'r///-t/.»/(9lH«ln'th?-Bni),»i. [L., from Gr. a\liivOtov ; a priv., and \\.ui)o%, delight.] Common wormwood ; Artemisia Abtinthium. Loudon. t AB-SiST', f. n. [L. aimto, to withdraw.] To stand off ; to leave off. Bailey. Ab'SO-lOte (24), a. [L. oi»o/ro, ai»o/M/iM, to free from.] 1. Clear from other things ; independent of any thing else ; perfect in itself ; unrestricted ; unlimited ; complete; — applied as well toper- sons as to things ; as, " Absolute power or gov- ernment " ; " An absolute command." " An absolute master." Shak. 2. {Gram.) Independent as to syntax; not connected grammatically with, or governed by, other words ; as, " The case absolute." Syn. — An absolute sovereign is above the control of law, and has unrestricted (Miwer of legislation. An absolute monarch ; despotic authority ; arbitrary meas- ures. Absolute or unlimited space. Absolute or uncon- ditional promise. Absolute or peremptory refusal. Ab'SO-LOTE-LY, o/f. In an absolute manner; completely ; ill the fullest sense ; without con- dition, limitation, relation, or dependence. A B'SO-LUTE-.\ (;SS, n. Freedom from limitation or dependence ; despotism. AB-SQ-LU'TIQN (24), n. [L. absolutio.] 1. Act of absolving ; acquittal ; a remission ; — applied especially to a ceremony, performed by a priest, ofdeclanng a repentant sinner absolved or freed from sin and its consequences. South, 2. f{R/i€t.) Exhaustive treatment of a sub- ject. B. Joiuon. Syn. — See Pardon. Ab'SCWLO-TI§.M, n. 1. Independence of control from a constitution or laws ; the principles of despotism ; despotism. Brande. 2. Predestination. Ash. AB'SQ-LO-TIsT, n. An advocate for despotism. For. Qu. Ret. AB-SoL'r-TO-RY [»b-s61'u-tur-c, U'. /. E. F.Ja. ' K. Sm.; iib'so-iu-to-r?, N'. /'. H'6.1, a. [L. abto- lutoritts.] Tliat absolves ; absolvatory ; serv ing to acquit. Ayliffe. AB-S(")L'V.\-TO-RY, a. Relating to pardon ; for- giving; absolutory. AB-?6LVE' (»b-z6Iv'), r. a. [L. absolro, to free * from.] [»■. ABSOLVED ; pp. absolving, ab- solved.! 1. To loosen from ; to clear ; to acqtiit, as from guilt or punishment. For God. not man, abmim our ftmiltk* her*. ftp*. 2. + To complete: to finish. Milton. 3. t To explain ; to solve. He shall aimilit the doubt. Sir T. Browmr. Syn. — A persfm may be absolrrd from sin and its con»e«|nence« by the merry of God, ar^uitlrd of an ac- cusation by men, ffcarrrf from a rharee by evidence, and have punislunent remitted. — Se« Poruive. mIeN, SYR; m6vE, NiiR, sON; bOi.!^ BOR, ROlE. — V. Q, t, |, soft, f, G, 5, f, hard; ? as s; $ as gr.. — THIS, Ifcis. ABSOLVER 8 ABSURD Ab-^OLV f R, n. One who absolves. More. AB-§6L'V{-T0R, n. (Law.) A decree of abso- lution ; — a Scotch forensic term. Jamieson. •' AB'SO-NAnT, c \Li.absono,absonans.'] Con- trary to ; discordant with ; absonous. " Ab- sonant to nature." Quarles. tAu'SQ-NATE, p. o. {Law.) To avoid ; to de- test. Ash. + AB'SQ-NOOs, a. [h. absonus.'] 1. Unmusical. Fotherby. 2. Absurd ; contrary to. " Absonous to our reason." Glanville. AB-SORB', V. a. [L. absorbeo, to suck up ; It. assorbire; Sp. absotTer ; Yr. absorber.'] [i. ab- SOllBED ; pp. ABSOKKIXG, ABSOUliED.] 1. To imbibe ; to suck up ; as, " A sponge will absorb water." 2. To swallow up, as a vortex ; to destroy. And dark oblivion soon alisorh)! them all. Cowper. 3. To engage wholly ; to engross ; as, " To be tihsorbed in business." AB-SdRB-A-BlL'l-TY, n. Quality of being ab- sorbable. Knowles. AB-SORB'A-BLE, a. That may be absorbed. Knowles. AB-SORB'5NT, n. 1. {Med.) A medicine that dries up humors, or neutralizes acids, as chalk, magnesia, &c. Dunglison. 2. {Anat.) An absorbent vessel. AB-SORB'^NT, a. That absorbs moisture, water, ■ &c. Todd. Msorbent vessels, {.^nat.) sometimes called absorb- ents, are the lacteal vessels, which take up the digested aliment and carry it into the system, and the lym- phatic vessels, which alisorh and convey out of the system all matters injurious to it. .Absorbent ^niands. {Paint.) picture grounds prepared in distemper, that have the property of absorbing re- dundant oil. FairhoU. f-AB-SOR-BI"TION, ?j. Absorption. Browne. I-AB-SORPT', ;j. a. [L. absorptus.] Absorbed; swallowed up. " Absorpt in care. Pope. AB-S6RP'TI0N (;94), n. 1. Act of absorbing, sucking up, or imbibing ; as, " The absorption of water by a sponge." 2. State of being swallowed up. Its [the Greek philosophy's] gradual decay and total absorp- tion in the schools. Warburton. 3. Complete occupation ; engrossment ; as, "Absorption in business." AB-SORP'TIVE, a. Having the power to imbibe. Smart. ABS'q,uk HOC, [L.] {Law.) Without this; — words of exception, formerly made use of in a traverse, or denial of an allegation. Whishaw. .\B-STAIN', r. n. [L. abstineo; abs, from, and te- 7ieo, to hold, to keep from ; It. astenere ; Sp. abstenerse ; Fr. abstenir.] [i. abstained ; pp. ABSTAINING, ABSTAINED.] To keep from ; to forbear ; to refrain from any indulgence ; to desist. Called to the temple of impure delight. He that abstaiiui, and ho alone, does right. Cowper. t AB-STAIN', V. a. To hinder. Milton. AB-STE'Ml-OUS, a. [L. abstemius, abs, from, and temetum, intoxicating drink ; It. astemio ; Sp. abstemio ; Fr. abstime.'] 1. Practising abstinence ; very temperate ; sober ; abstinent ; refraining. Under his special eye Abstemious I grew up and thrived amain. Milton. 2. Spent in abstinence or fasting. Till yonder sun descend, O, let me pay To grief and anguish one abstciniom day. Pope. 8yn. — An abstemiotis man lays an habitual, and an abstinent man a temporary, restraint U|K)n his appetites ; a temperate man habitually practises mod- eration in drink ; and a sober man is free from intox- ication or excess. A man may be sober, yet not temperate ; and temperate, yet not abstemious or ab- stinent. AB-STE'MI-0(JS-LY, ad. With abstinence ; tem- perately. AB-STE'MJ-OUS-NfiSS, n. Quality of being ab- stemious. HerbeH. Syn. — See Abstinence. t AB-STER'SJVE, a. cleansing. t AB-STfiN'TlQN, n. [L. abstenttis, kept away from.] 1. Act of restraining. Bp. layior. 2. (Law.) Act of prevontint; nn heir from taking possession. AB-STER^E', ». a. [L. ahstergo, to -wipe off, to dry up ; Fr. absterger."] \i. absterged ; pp. ABSTEUOING, ABSTERGED.] To cleanse by wiping ; to wipe. Burton. AB-STER'9PNT, a. (Med.) Having a cleansing quality ; purgative. Dunglison. t AB-STERSE', v. a. To cleanse ; to purify. Browne. AB-STER'SION, n. The act of cleansing. Bacon. t AB-STER'SIVE, n. A cleanser. Sir W. Petty. Having the quality of Pope. t AB-STER'SjVE-NfiSS, n. Quality of being ab- steisive. Boyle. AB'STJ-NENCE, n. [L. abstinentia ; Fr. absti- nence.] Act of abstaining ; forbearance of prohibited food or drink ; forbearance of neces- sary food, or of any thing ; fasting. Abttinence from a present pleasure, that offers itself, is a pain, nay, oftentimes a very great one. Lode. Abstinence in extremity will prove a mortal disease, but the experiments of it are very rare. Arbuthnot. Syn. — .Abstinence and abstemiousness are more than temperance and sobriety. In abstinence and abstemi- ousness there is self-denial ; in temperance and sobriety, wisdom and decorum. A day of fasting is a day of abstinence. AB'STJ-NEN-CY, n. Abstinence. Hammond. AB'STI-NENT, rt. [L. abstinens ; It. astitimite ; Yt. abstinent.] Using abstinence ; abstemious ; very temperate. — See Abstemious. Hales. Ab'ST|-NENT, n. (Eccl. Hist.) One of a sect in France and Spain, about the end of the third century, who opposed marriage and condemned the use of flesh meat. Btick. Ab'STI-NENT-LY, ad. With abstinence. Donne. t AB-STORT'gD, a. \1,. abstortus.] Forced away by violence. Bailey. AB-STRACT', V. a. [L. abstraho, absti'actus, to draw away ; abs, from, and traho, to draw.] \i. ABSTRACTED ; pj). ABSTRACTING, ABSTRACTED.] 1. To take or draw from, as one thing from another ; to separate, as ideas ; to disunite. I deny that I can abstract one [quality] from another. Berkeley. 2. To take away surreptitiously from the property of another ; as, " To abstract money or goods from a parcel." Rev. J. Hunter. 3. To reduce ; to epitomize. Let us abstract them into brief compcnds. IVatts. 4. (Chem.) To drive off by distillation ; to extract. " Having abstracted the whole spirit." Boyle. AB-STRACT', r. n. To separate ideas. "Brutes abstract not." Locke. I own myself able to abstract in one sense, as when I con- sider some particular parts or qualities separated from others. Btrkcleij. AB'STRAcT [ab'sti^kt, S. P. Ja. K. Sm. Wb. ; ab-strakt', W. C. — See Abstractly], a. 1. Separated from something else, or from all other things ; existing in the mind only ; not concrete or connected with sensible objects ; independent of others, and not to be altered by time or circumstances. Abstract terms signify themodeorqiiality of a bcinf, with- out any regard to tlie subject in which it is j as, whiteness, roundness, length, breadth, wisdom, morality, hie, death. IValls. or disconnected ; as, " To consider a thine- in the abstract." Syn. 33r Abriegmekt 2. t Refined ; pure. Donne. Ab'STrAcT [ab'strSkt, S. W. P. J. F. K. Sm. Wb.],n. 1. The concentration or essence of virtues, powers, or properties in one subject, previously existing in another larger, or in many others. Look here upon thy brother Geoffi-ey's face ; This little ahstract etiral license, violate tlie accenlii- ation of his time, it was certainly pntnounced so two centuries afo, as a|ipeara by Dr. Johuaoa's quolaiiun of him. ' Our conrt shall be a little artulemt. Still and ronteni|ilativr in living arta.' But the accentuationof this word fonnerly,on Ibefinl syllable, is so genprnlly acknowledged, as not to stand in need of |Mietic autjiority." M alker. — The now re- ceived reading of ^Uaks|>earp in llie abm-e |MUsa{!« is academe ; but Holland, his coniem|iorary, iuu, "And Vetus now, who hold* thy house, fair arorimir hlght i " and Cowley, in a later age, " He that only talked with him might tad A Ittle oeademy in his mind." A-CA'D(-A-LITE, n. [Acadia, the Indian name of Nova Scotia, and Or. iiOoj, a stone. /'. Cyc] (J/i'n.) A silicious mineral found in Nova Sco- tia ; red chubasite. C. T. Jackson. Alger. Ac'A-.l6u,n. [Fr.] {Bot.) Mahogany. — -4ra- jou, or acajaiba, is also the West Indian name of the cashew-tree. Ar'A-LfePH, or Ar-A-LE'PH A, n. ; pi. ACALBPn.K. [dr. aKah,^, a nettle.] {^ZocL) An acalephr.n. — See ACALBPHAN. p. Cye. Agassiz. mIeN, SlfR, m6vE; NOR, s6n ; Bt>LL, BOR, rOlE. — 9, 9, ^, J, sofl ; C, fi, 5, g. hard; ? «. « ; ^ « f«- •THIS. this. ACALEPIIAN Id ACCEPT AC-A-LE'PHAN [ak-ji-is'fjn, CL, Brande; ^-kW- ^-^n, .S'wt.l, n. ; pi. Ac-a-le'piian§. {Zoiil.) One of a class of the radiate aquatic and ma- rine animals, having the property of irritating and inflaming the skin when touched, as the sea-nettle, jelly-fish, medusa, Portuguese man- of-war, (4c.; acaleph; acalepha. Bratide. AC-A-LE'PHoId, a. [Eng. acalephan and Gr. ttfioi, form.] i^ZoOl.) Like a medusa. Owen. A-CAL'y-CINE, ; a. [Gr. a priv. and icdXv^, AC-A-L^C'l-NOtJS, ) a flower-cup ; L. calyx.] (liot.) Having no calyx or flower-cup. Gray. A-CAMP'TO-s6mE, n. [Gr. a priv., Kintrria, to bend, and aiS/ia, the body.] {Conch.) One of an order of cirripeds, in wnich the body is so enveloped and attached in a shell, that it can- not be protruded, Brande. jf-CJjV'THjl, n. [Gr. axavda, a thorn ; axt'i, a point, and avdoi, blossom.] 1. (Bot.) A thorn; a prickle. Ency. 2. {ZoOl.) A spine or prickly fin. 3. (Anat.) A spinous process of a vertebra ; — the spine ; the vertebral column. Dunglison. AC-AJ^-THA' CF.:X, n. pi. [Gr. oKovQa, a thorn.] {Bot.) A natural order of monopetalous, dicot- yledonous, herbaceous plants or shrubs, of which Acanthus is the type. Baird. AC-AN-THA'CEOUS (ilk ?n-tha'shus), «• Armed with prickles, as thistres, &c. ; prickly. Crabb. A-CAN'THINE, a. Relating to the acanthus. Ash. ji-CAj\r'THI-dJV, n. [Gr. uKavdiujv, a porcupine.] (Zov/.) A genus of porcupines. Van Der Iloeven. jt-CMj^'THO-PHlS, n. [Gr. oKavBa, a thorn, and 6(i>ii, a serpent.] {Zoiil.) A genus of venomous serpents, peculiar to Australia, distinguished by a little spur, or horny excrescence, at the extremity of the tail. Brande. A-CAN-THO-CEPH'A-LAN, n. [Gr. oKatQa., a * prickle, and Ktipalii, head.] One of an order of ■ intestinal worms, having rows of hooked spines around the head, by which they cling to the in- terior of the intestines of animals. Brande. ji-CJjV-THO-DER 'MA, n. [Gr. oKovBa, a prickle, an 1 iipiiu, a hide.] {Zoot.) A genus of fossil fishes allied to Batistes. Agassiz. AC-^Jf-THO'DE^, n. [Gr. ixavBa, a point, and d&oii, a tooth.] (Zool.) A genus of fossil ganoid fishes of dimmutive size. Agassiz. A-CAN'THQ-p6d, n. [Gr. SKavda, prickle, and rrovf, voiof, a foot.] (Ent.) One of a tribe of spiny-legged beetles ; the rose-bug, &c. Brande. AC-AN-THOP-Te-R stem.] {Bot.) Having no stalk A-CAU'LOys, ) or stem ; stemless. Ash. AC-CEDE', V. n. [L. accedo; ad, to, and cedo, ' to go, to yield ; Tr. acccder.] [i. acceded ; pp. ACCEDING, ACCEDED.] To come to ; to come over ; to assent ; to become a party to : as, " To accede to a request, to a treaty." Syn. — See Comply. AC-CEL-e-rA^T' DO, a. [It.] {Mm.) Hasten- ing ; faster and faster. Dwight. AC-CEL'5R-ATE, V. a. [L. aceelero, acceleratus, to hasten ; It. accelerare ; Fr. aceel^rer.] [i. ACCELERATED ; pp. ACCELERATING, ACCELER- ATED.] To cause to move faster ; to expedite ; to hasten. " To accelerate his journey." liall. Syn. — See Hasten. AC-CEL'^R-AT-f-D,/). rt. Hastened. Accelerated motion, (JV/ecA.) motion in wliicli the ve- locity of a moving body is continually increased by force acting uiwn it. Orier. AC-CEL'^R-AT-JNG,;?. a. Causing acceleration ; hastening. AC-CEL-gR-A'TFON, n. Act of accelerating; an increase of the velocity of bodies in motion ; a hastening. AC-CEL'?;R-A-TIve, a. Tending to accelerate ; increasing motion or velocity. Netcton. AC-CEL'pR-A-TOR, n. [L. aceelero, to hasten.] A muscle which contracts to acceler- {Anat.) ate the passage of urine. AC-CEL'5R-A-TO-RY, ative. Quincy. Accelerating ; acceler- Craig. t AC-CEND', D. a. [h.accendo.'] To kindle. "De- votion sufficiently accended. Decay of Piety. AC-CEN-D|-BiL'|-Ty,M. Inflammability. JSd. iJew. AC-CEN'Dl-BLE, a. That may be inflamed. Smart. t AC-CEN'SION, w. A kindling. Locke. Ac'CfNT (114), n. [L. accentus ; ad, to, and cano, to sing ; It. accento ; Sp. acento ; Fr. accent.'] 1. The modulation of the voice in speaking, or the manner of speaking ; as, " The Scotch accent." Your accent is something finer than you could purchase in ■o removed a dwelling. Shak. 2. Language ; words. [Poetical.] IIow many ages hence Shall this our lofty scene be acted o'er. In states unborn, and acceiitt yet unknown ! Shak. 3. A stress of voice on a certain syllable of a word, that it may be better heard than the rest, as in the second syllable of the word confess'. IKS' A great part of the words in the Englisli lan- guage of tliree or more syllables have two accents ; the greater is called the primary accent, and the less the secondary accent. Thus, in the word ap" pel-la' tiou, the third syllable has the priniary, and the first sylla- ble the secondary, accent. Tlie only perceptible difference among our syllables arises from some oi them being uttered with that stronger percussion of voice which we call accent. Jllair. 4. A mark on a syllable to direct the modula- tion of the voice: — the mark ['], noting the accent or stress of voice, as in even, called the acute accent ; — the mark [ ^ ], called the grave accent, used generally to indicate the falling of the voice; — the mark ["] or [~], called the circumflex, denoting an undulation of voice. 6. {Math.) A mark ['] over a letter to indi- cate that it has a value or a meaning different from that of the same letter used without the ac- cent : — a mark [ ' ] over a number noting a min- ute of a degree, or, doubled ["], a second. 6. {Mus.) Emphasis given to notes in partic- ular parts of a bar. Moore. Syn. — See Emphasis. AC-CENT' (114), V. a. [i. ACCENTED ; pp. AC- CENTING, ACCENTED.] To pronounce, utter, or mark with accent ; as, " To accent a syllable." AC-CENT'pD, p. a. Pronounced with the ac- cent ; marked with the accent. AC-CENT'OR, n. 1. {Mus.) One who sings the highest part in a trio. Crabb. 2. {Ornith.) A genus of birds ; the hedge- chanter. Gray. AC-CE^r-Tg-Ri'J^M,n. pi. {Ornith.)' A sub-family of dcntirostral birds of the ^ni^^^B*^ order Passeres and family Luscinidee ; accentors. Gray. Enicoclchla ludoviciana. II AC-CENT'y-AL, a. Relating to accent. II AC-CENT'y-ATE (?k-sent'yu-at), V. a. \i. AC- CENTUATED ; pp. ACCENTUATING, ACCENTUAT- ED.] To pronounce or to mark with the accent ; to accent. II AC-CENT-r-A'TlON, n. The act of uttering "or of marking the accent. Lowth. AC-CEPT', V. a. [L. accipio, acceptus; ad, to, and capio, to take ; It. accettare ; Sp. aceptar ; Fr. accepter.] \i. accepted ; pp. accepting, ACCEPTED.] 1. To receive favorably or kindly. Sweet prince, accept their suit Shak. 2. To admit ; to agree to ; as, " To accept an excuse or a proposal"; "To accept an amend- ment." 3. To take as oflfered ; as, *' To accept an appointment or an office." 4. To estimate ; to regard ; to value accord- ing to desert ; to receive as worthy. For if there be first a willing mind, it is accepted according to tliat a man hath, and not according to that he hath not. 2 Cor. Tiii. 12. 5. t To respect partially. lie will surely reprove you if ye do secretly accept persons. Job xiii. 10. 6. {Com.) To acknowledge by one's signature the sum named in an order, draft, or bill of ex- change, as due, and to promise the payment of it. JSTa^ Accept is used in some of its senses with of. " Accept of my hearty wishes." Addison. " I'erad- venture he will accept of me." Oen. xxxii. 20. A. E, T, 0, 0, Y, long; A, E, T, O, 0, Y, short; A, ?, I, Q, V, Y, obscure; fAre, FAR, fAst, fAlL; HtIR, HEE; ACCEPTABILITY 11 ACCI PITER AC-CftPT-A-BlL'l-TV, rt. Quality of being ac- ' ccptable; acceptablcncss. Bp. Taylor. IJ A<><;fcPT'A-BhE [»lc-8«|)'t»-hl, P. Ja. K. Sm. CI. Wb. Johnson, Ash, Lhjche, Harclay ; ik'v^yt- t»-bl, S. ff. J. E. F. C], a. Sure to be accepted or well received ; welcome ; grateful ; pleasing. A lacriflce accepuMe, well-pleuing to Qod. /'Ai7. iv. IH. Tlili woman, wlioin tliou inad'it to be my help, Bo tit, •0(icc«';>m the influence of thy looki, receive Accat in every virtue. Milton. 4. A sudden attack of disease ; a fit. Krlap«e> make diaeawM More detpenitc thun their tlratear evi- dent both from examining the dictionaries and from observing common usage. With resfiect to the diction- aries which were published before tliat of Johnson, the orthography found in those of Baret, Bnllokar, Cot- grave, Pliilli|>8, &c., is accessary ; in those of Coles. Kersey, Bailey, Dyche, and Martin, both accessary and accessory; and all the principal dictionaries of the English language publislied since that of Johnson, give both forms. — Johnson says of accessary, — "A corrup- tion of the word accessory, hut now more commonly used than the projier word " ; and Smart says, ".Ac- cessory claims a slight etymological preference, but is less Usual." As to the Law Dictionaries, the orthography of those of Whishaw, Burn, Bouvier, and Biirrill, is accessary ; those of Cowell, Bluiint, Cunninehain, Tomlins, and Bell, give both forms. The orthography found in Blackstone's Commentaries and Erskine's Institutes is accessory, that of Dane's Abridgment and the Penny Cyclopaedia, accessary. Brande gives accessory as the orthography of the word when a legal term, and accet sarij or accessory when used in the arts. AC-CfiS-Sl-BlL'l-TY, n. The quality of being accessible. /. Taylor. AC-CES'S|-BLE, a. That may be approached; approachable ; easy of access. Addison. AC-CfiS'Sl-BLY, ad. So as to be accessible. Clarke. AC-C£S'SIQN (9k-s«sh'un), M. [L. accessio.'\ 1. Increase by something acquired ; addition ; enlargement ; augmentation. Clarendon. 2. Act of coming to; arrival; as, "The king's accession to the throne." 3. (Med.) The beginning of a paroxysm, or a fit of an intermitting fever. Crabb. 4. (Law.) A kind of title by which a person acquires property in a thing in consequence of its growing out of, or being combined with, an- other thing : — in international law, the act b^ which one power enters into engagements origi- nally contracted between other powers. BurriU. Bouvier. Syn. — See Increase. AC-C£s'SIQN-AL (»k-sesh'un-»l), a. Additional. AC-C£SS'|VE, o. Additional. Hopkins. AC-C$S-S6'R]-AL, a. Belonging to an accessory. II Ac'CgS-SQ-RJ-LY, ad. In the manner of an accessory. II AC'CgS-SQ-RI-N6ss, n. The state of being accessory. Smart. II Ac'C^S-SCVRY [»k'»«8-ao-r?, S. W. P. J. E. F. Ja. K. Sm. C. ; fk-sSs'so-rf, Ask], a. 1. Contributing to a crime ; acceaaanr. Cbirendon. 2. Joined to another thing ; additional. Hooker. See AtrCKtMAUY. II Ac'C^S-.sy.Ry, «. [Low L. acce*aoriu*.'\ 1. That which advances or promotes a design ; an accompaniment. Gayton. 2. (Law.) One who is ^ilty of a crime, not principally, btit by participation ; an accom- plice ; an abettor ; accessary. 3. (Paint.) An object in a picture not abac* lutely necessary to the figure. FairhoU. See AcCKtiSAKY. ' AC-CIA-CJI-TU'lt» (llt-eh»-k»-td'r»), n. [It., a squeezinq.] (Mtu.) A grace note, one semi- tone below that to whica it is prefixed, being, as it were, squeezed in. liranae. Ac'CI-d£N'CE, n. [L. accidentia, accidents, pi, of accident.] A corruption of accident*, being the name applied to a little book containing the accidents or first rudiments of grammar. I pray you, oak him iorm queitioni in hia aeciilenct, tHaJk. Ac'C|-D6NT, n. [L. accido, accident, to happen to; ad, to, and cado, to fall.] 1. An event proceeding from an unknown cause, or happening without the design of the agent ; an unforeseen event ; incident ; casualty ; chance. " Some unlooked accident." Shak. 2. A property or quality of any being that is not essential to it. " But the boay's accident." Daviet. 3. pi. (Gram.) The properties and inflections of the parts of speech. Holder. Syn. — Accident exc\iu\e9 the idea of de«ign, and event excludes the idea of chance. Jlecident refer* to what has hapiieiied ; chance to what may hapiien. An erent is more int|iorTnnl than an iueiienl. WhRle\-er hapiiens, whether by chance or design, may lie called an iHcideuL. A casually is an unwelcome accident : and, when used as a law term, it often suggests iha idea of those accidents by which an injur)' lias lieen sustained, or for which a coroner may be invoked. — See Circumstance. AC-CI-D£N'TAL, n. L A property non-essential. Pearson. Conceire, a* much a« yon can, of the eaentiaia of any ■ubject before you coniider ita aecidentaU. tocte. 2. (Mus.) A sharp, fiat, or natural, ( ^ , h , ^,) not in the signature of a piece, but ^ ' ' ' occurring accidentally before a note, thcight. 3. ( Paint.) A chance effect produced bv rays of light falUng on certain objects. FairhoU. AC-CJ-D£N'TAL, a. L Havinfj the quality of an accident ; happening by accident ; happening unexpectedly ; not designed or planned ; casual ; fortuitous ; as, " An accidental occurrence." 2. Non-essential ; incident. " Circumstances accidental to the tragedy." Jlymer. Accidental colors, {Opt.) tboee colors which dejiend U|ion the reactions of the eye, incuniradiaiiuciion to those which belong tser>'alion ; easaml remark ; <•■• tingent expouses. — See CIRCUMSTANTIAL, UccA- SIONAL. AC-CJ-DfcN'TAL-I:fM, n. (Paint.) The effects produced accidentally by rays of light. Ruskin. See Accidental. Ac-C|-D5N-TAl'j-TY, «. The quality of being accidental ; accideiitalness. [k.] Coleridye. Ac-C|-D£:N'TAL-LY, ad. In an accidenUl man. ner; casually. Ac-CI-DEN'TAL-NfisS, n. Quality of being accl, denUl. Bailejf. Ac-Cl-DfiN'TA-RY, a. Accidental. Holland. t Ac-CJ-d6N'T|-A-RY (lk-s«-d«n'sli^»-rf), a. Be- longing to accidents or accidence. Bp. Morton. t AC-tiP'|-6NT, n. [L. accipio.'] A receiver. Bailey. jfC-ClP 'f- TER, n. ; pi. 4C-c1r 'f-TMtff. [L., from ad, to, and capio, to seise.] m!eN, SYR; m6vR, N6r, 86N: R^LT., BiiR, pCi" <;, Q, ^, 4, aojl; v., B, £, f, hard; ^ as x ; }f as gz.— THIS, this. ACCIPITRARY 1. {Ornith.) The order of rapacious birds, whose type is the hawk, and which includes the families Vulturidie, Falcoui- da, and Striyidte. Gray. 2. (Sur(j.) A bandage applied over the nose ; ^so called from its likeness to the claw of a hawk. Dunylison. f-AC-ClP'J-TRA-RY, n, A falconer. Nash. AC-ClP-J-TRi'J^JE, n. ' pi. { Ornitfi.) Sparrow- hawks ; a sub-family of birds of the order Accipitres and family Falconidce. Gray. i^C-ClP'J-TRT\E,a. Re- * lating to the hawk or Artur palumbaria. to a bird of the order Accipiter. JfC-CIS'MUS, n. [L. ; Gr. aKKiati6i.'\ {Rhet.) A. feigned refusal ; an ironical dissimulation. Umart. f AC-CITE', r. a. [L.accio.] To call ; to cite. S/ioA. AC-CLAIM', V. a. [L. acclamo.] 1. To applaud. " In acclaiming thee." Bp. Hall. 2. To declare by acclamation. "Acclaims thee king of traitors." Smollett. AC-CLAIM', n. A shout of praise ; acclamation ; applause, [r.] Milton. t AC'CLA-MATE, r. o. To applaud. Waterhouse. Ac-CLA-MA'TION, n. [L. acclamatio.] 1. A shout of applause ; applause. " Accla- mations loud." Milton. 2. A viv6 voce mode of electing to office. Burke. Syn.— See Applause. AC-CLAM'A-TO-Ry, a. Pertaining to accla- mation. * Todd. AC-CLi'MATE [sik-kll'mat, C. O.Lv. a. [L,. ad, to, and Gr. K/.i/ta, K/.i/tuToi, clime ; Fr. acclimater.] [i. ACCLIMATED ; pp. ACCLIMATING, ACCLI- MATED.] To inure or adapt to a climate ; to acclimatize. Land. Med. Rev. Lord Colchester. AC-CLI'MATE-M(:NT, n. Acclimation, [k.] Coleridye. AC-CL{-MA'TI0N, n. Act of acclimating; act of makijig or of becoming inured to a climate. Dunylison. AC-CL|-MAT-|-ZA'TION, n. Act of inuring to a climate ; acclimation, [r.] Qu. Rev. AC-CLi'MA-TIZE, V. a. [Fr. accHmater.] [i. ACCLIMATIZED ; pp. ACCLIMATIZIXO, ACCLI- MATIZED.] To inure or adapt to a climate differ- ent from what is natural; to acclimate. — See Climate. Lyell. AC-CLl'MA-TiJRE, n. State of being inured to a climate, [r.] " Caldwell. t AC-CLI VE', a. Sloping upwards. Atibrey. AC-CLl V'l-TY, n. [L. accliftis, steep. — A. S. clif, a cliff.] Steepness reckoned upwards ; ascent. — The ascent of a hill is the acclivity, the descent the declivity. AC-CLl'VOUS r?k-kli'vus, .S. W. J. F. Ja. K. Sm. ; ftk'kli-vus, P.],a. Rising with a slope. Johnson. t AC-CLOi?', V. a. To stuff full ; to cloy. t AC-CoIl', v. n. To bustle ; to coil. Spenser. t AC-c6l', v. a. [L. coUum, the neck.] To em- brace round the neck. Surrey. Ac'CO-L4,n. [L.] 1. (Law.) A husbandman ; a borderer. Whishaw 2. (/cA.) A delicate fish found at Malta. AC-CQ-LADE', or AC-CQ-LADE' [ik-o-lad', K. R. Wh.; 5k-o-lad', Syi.'], n. [Fr., from L. ad, to, and collicm, the neck.] 1. A blow on the neck or the shoulder, or an embrace; — a ceremony formerly used in con- ferring knighthood. Hallam. 2. {Miis.) A brace connecting several staves. f-AC'CO-LKNT, n. [L. accolo, accolens, dwelling near.] A borderer. Bailey. 32 AC-CuM-Bl-NA'TIQN, n. [L. ad, to, and comhi- natio, a uniting.] Act of combining together. Qu. Rev. AC-COM'MO-OA-BLE, a. That may be fitted or adapted, [r.] Watts. t AC-COM'MO-UA-BLE-NESS, n. Adaptability. Todd. AC-COM'MO-DATE, v. a. [L. accommodo, ac- commodatus ; ad, to, and commodum, con- venience, advantage ; It. accommodare ; Fr. accommoder.] [t. accommodated ; pp. ac- commodating, ACCOMMODATED.] 1. To supply with conveniences of any kind. Heaven speed the canvas, gallantly unfurled To furnUli and accoiiimoilate a world. Cowper 2. To adapt ; to fit ; to suit. He had altered many things that he might accommodate himself to the age in which he lived. Diyden. 3. To adjust ; to reconcile ; as, " To accommo- date differences." 4. (Theol.) To apply one thing to another by analogy. 5. (Com.) To serve by lending. Syn. — See Fit. AC-COM'MO-DATE, V. n. To be conformable. Browne. AC-C6M 'MO-DATE, «. Suitable ; fit. [r.] Watts. AC-C6m'MO-DAT-5D, p. a. Supplied ; adapted ; suitable. AC-COM'MO-DATE-LY, ad. Suitably ; fitly, [r.] More. AC-c6m'MO-DATE-NESS, n. Fitness, [r.] Ilallywell. AC-C6m'MO-DAT-}NG, p. a. Affording accommo- dation ; disposed to oblige ; obliging ; friendly. AC-C6M-M0-DA'TI0N, n. 1. State of being ac- commodated ; provision of conveniences : — ap- plied often in the plural to things requisite to ease and refreshment. The king's commissioners were to have such accommoda- tioits as the other thought tit to leave to them. Clarendon. 2. Adaptation ; fitness ; agreement. Socinus's main design was to bring all the mysteries of Christianity to a full accommodation with the general notions of man's reason. South. 3. Reconciliation ; adjustment ; as, " To come to an accommodation." 4. (Theol.) The application of one thing to another by analogy. Many of those quotations from the Old Testament were probably intended as nothing more than accommodations. I'aley. ;8®" This word is often used adjectively. Accommodation bill, (^Com.) a bill of exchange given as an acconiniodation, instead of a loan of money, and which it is generally understood the drawer will take up. .Accommodation note, (Com.) a note not given for property transferred, but to raise money ti|)on ; — a note lent tu accommodate the bearer. .Accommodation stage-coach or train of cars, a stage- coach or train of cars designed to accommodate pas- sengers, as to time, in distinction from the mail-stage and express train. AC-COM'MO-DA-TIVE, a. Tending to accommo- date ; accommodating. Reeder. AC-c6m'MO-DA-TOR, n. One who accommo- dates. Wdrburtofi. t AC-c6m'PA-NA-BLE, «. Sociable. Sidney. AC-c6m'PA-NI-5R, n. One who accompanies. Bailey. AC-c6m'PA-NJ-MENT, n. 1. That which accom- panies ; an appendage ; something attending as a circumstance or added for ornament. An cpithalamium, the usual indispensable accompaniment of a wedding. Warton. 2. (Mus.) A subordinate part which accom- panies another, enriching the melody, — espe- cially an instrumental part which accompanies a voice or voices. Dxcight. 3. pi. {Her.) Such things as are usually'ap- plicd about the shield, as the belt, &c. Crabb. AC-c6m'PA-NIST, n. (Mus.) One who performs an accompanying part. Crabb, AC-cOm'PA-NV (9k-kam'p?-ne), v. a. [Fr. ac- compagner. — See Company.] [i. accompa- nied ; pp. accompanying, accompanied.] To be with another as a companion ; to keep company with ; to attend ; to join with ; to go along with ; to escort. ACCORD Sopator of Berea accompanied Paul into Asia. Actn xx. 4. It is wisely ordered by nature that pain should accoiiifiaHU the reception of several I'teus. Locke. Syn. — Accompanied by friends or associates; at- tended by servants ; escorted by truups. — See Atten D. AC-C6.M'PA-NY, v. n. 1. To be a companion. Now eanie still evening on, and twilight gray Had in her sober livery all things clad : Silence accompanied. Milton. 2. To cohabit. Milton. 3. (^Mtts.) To perform an accompaniment. Moore. AC-COM'PLICE, n. [L. ad, to, and complico, to fold together ; Fr. complice.'] 1. An associate, usually in an ill sense ; an abettor. Swift. 2. {Law.) One of several concerned, partici- pating, or implicated in a felony or crime. Syn. — See Abettor, Associate. AC-C6m'PLICE-SHIP, n. State of being an ac- complice, [r.] //. Taylor. AC-COM-PLIC'l-TY, n. The character or act of an accomplice ; complicity, [r.] Qu. Rev. AC-CO M'PLISH, V. a. [L. ad, to, and compleo, to fill up ; Fr. accomplir. — See Complete.] \i. accomplished ; pp. accomplishing, accom- plished.] 1. To complete ; to effect ; to achieve ; to ex- ecute fully ; to bring to pass ; to obtain ; as, " To accomplish a design." The desire accomplislied is sweet to the souL Prov. xiii. 19. 2. To end or finish, as to time. The days of your dispersions are accompliihed. Jer. xxv. Si. When we had accomplished those days we departed. Acta zxi. 5. 3. To fulfil, as a prophecy. We see every day those events exactly accompliihed, which our Saviour foretold at so great a distance, Addiaon- 4. To furnish ; to adorn. The armorers accomplisliing the knights, With busy hammers closing rivets up. Give dreadful note of prei>aration. Shak Syn. — Accomplish an object ; effect a purpose ; com plete an undertaking; execute a project or orders finish a work ; perform a task ; achiere an enterprise; fulfil an obligation or an engagement. My de!om the lUef, AcronU their vow. /'ojie. Syn. — See Allow. AC-C'OBD', V. n. To agree; to suit one with an- other ; to harmonize ; to correspond. Shak. (Scotland.) Ufled iin|)cr8onally ; as, " As accords," or " As accords of law," i. o. conformable to law. JamUsoH. AC-CORD', n. 1. A compact ; an agreement ; an adju.stn»ent. " If both are satisfied with this accord." Dry den. 2. Union ; concurrence ; consent. ^^ Accord of friends." Speiuier. 3. {Mus.) Harmony of sounds ; concord. Bacon. 4. (Paint.) Harmony of light and shade. Own accord, voluntary motion ; npontaneous feeling or action. " Duiivg that of his own accord." Hooker. t AC-CORD'a-BLE, a. Agreeable. Gower. AC-(?ORn'ANCE, n. Agreement; conformity; consent ; — followed by with ox to: — harmony. Syn. — See Melody. AC-CORD'AN-cy, n. Same as Accordance. Paky. AC-C0RD'.\NT, a. [Fr.] Harmonizing; being in agreeinent ; agreeable ; consonant. S?iak. AC-CORD'ANT-LV, ad. In an accordant manner. AC-CORD'^R, M. An assistant; a helper. Cotgrace. AC-c6RD'JNG, p. a. Agreeing ; harmonizing. "According voice." iSAaA. Jarriiig iiitereats of themselves create The accorrliuij music of a well-mixed state. Poiye. t^Accordiair \a sometimes followed by as, and then has the force of an adverb. Julinaon quotes the phrase accordini; as from Swift, and says, " ft is, I think, vicious." But it seems to have good use in its favor. According at we hope in thee. Pt. xxxiii. 22. Arc alt things well jlccorrfiH^ a» I gave directions? Shot. A greater or less degree of probability, according as the things compared are mure or less similar. Jieid on the Powers of the Mind. AC-CORD'JNG t6, prepositional phrase. In ac- cordance with ; agreeably to ; as, "According to his best judgment." AC-CORD'|NG-LY,arf. Agreeably; conformably; suitably. AC-c6R'Dl-6iV, n. {Mus.) A modern musical instrument, the sound of which is produced by the vibration of metallic springs, occasioned by a current of air rushing from a bellows, where it is accumulated, through valves attached to the keys, and opened by the fingers of the musician. Francis. tAC-COR'PQ-RATE,r.a. To incorporate. "Until she accorporate herself with error." Milton. AC-cOST', r. a. [L. adj to, and costa, a rib, a side ; Fr. aecoster.'] \t. accosted ; pp. accost- ing, ACCOSTED.] 1. t To approach. STrnk. Lapland, so much of it a< accosts the sea. Fidler. 2. To speak to first; to address; to greet; to salute. I flrtt accofled him ; I sued, I sought. Drj/ffen. If you would convince a person of his mistake, accost him not upon that subject when his spirit is ruffled. tfatts. Syn. — See Address. t AC-COST', V. n. To come near. Whether high towering, or accosting low. Spenser. AC-C08T'A-BLE, a. Easy of access ; familiar. The French are a free, debonnair, accostable people. Howell. AC-CdST'eD,B. o. 1. Addressed. 2. {Her.) Placed side by side. Todd. ■^CCOaCHEMEJVT (sk-kash'mang), n. [Fr. ; ad, to, cotich4!, a bcd.l (.Med.) Childbirth; deliv- ery; parturition; labor; travail. Dunglison. ACCOUCHEUR (ttk-k6-shar') [ak-k6-sh5r', Ja. ; Sk-k6'»har, K. ; ak-k8sh-Ur , Sm.], n. [Fr.] A physician who assiiits women in childbirth; a man-midwife. Todd, ACCOUCHEUSE (Ik-kft-ihUs'), n. wife. [Fr.] A mid- Smart. AC-CoOnT', n. [Old Fr. accompt. — See Col NT.] 1. A register of debts and credits, or of re- ceipts ana expenditures; a computation applied to sums of money. He keeps his account with the Bank of England. Brande. The skill of keeping accounts is a business of reason more than [of J arithmetic. Locix. 2. A reckoning or computation applied to numbers, time, weight, or measures ; an inven- tory. Neither was the number put in the account of the Chroni- cles of King Uuvid. 1 Chron. xxvii. -24. A beggarly account of empty boxci. HAal: 3. Explanation ; reason. It is easy to give account, how it comes to pats, &c. Locke. 4. Regard ; consideration ; sake ; as, " On no account would I consent to it." Uk judgment led him to oppoae men on a public account. Attertmry. 5. Estimation as worthy ; distinction ; dig- nity ; consequence or importance. '* Men of account." Poj>e. Lord, what is man, that thou takest knowledge of him! or the son of man, that thou makest occoun/ of him ! /'».cxllv.3. 6. Profit; advantage. We would establish our souls in such a solid and substan- tial virtue as will turn to CKCount in that great day. Sfectator. 7. A narration ; recital ; description ; a state- ment. Give an account of thy stewardship, Lutx xvl. 2. A connected and probable account can be given only by comparing the evidence. IkuKntfl. Account current, {Com.) a running account, or the statement of the mercantile traasactions of one person with another, drawn out in the form of debtor and creditor. Syn. — Account is a term of extensive application. Keep an account ; make a computation or reckoning ; send a bill. An account of transactions or of a battle ; a narrative of a person's life or travels ; a narration of a story ; a relation or recital of circumstances. It was on your account, for your sake, for your advantage or benefit: — for this reason or purpose. — See NARRA- TION. AC-COiyNT', V. a. [L. ad, to, and computo, to count.] \i. accounted ; pp. accounting, ac- counted.] 1 . To esteem ; to deem ; to consider ; to think ; to hold in opinion. I was accounted a good actor. Shak. 2. To reckon ; to compute. " The sun, where- by years are accounted. Browne. It was accounted to hira for righteoumeM. Oal. liL 6. AC-CoOnt', v. n. 1. To give an account or ex- planation ; to answer in judgment. " A reckon- ing whereby pleasures must be accounted for." Atterbttrt/. 2. To show the reason ; to assign the cause. I know no other way to account tor it. Swtfl. AC-CdONT-A-BlL'I-TY, n. State of being ac- countable ; accountableness ; responsibility. [A modern word, but in good use.] 11. Hall. De Quincey. AC-C60nt'A-BLE, a. Liable to be called to ac- count ; amenable ; answerable. Locke. Syn. — See Answerable. AC-COiyNT'A-BLE-N6ss, n. State of being ac- countable ; accountability. tAC-CoCNT'ANT, a. Accountable. "Account- ant to the law." Shak. AC-C6tyNT'ANT, n. One skilled or employed in accounts. Brottme. AC-COt)NT'ANT-^£N'eR-.AL, n. The principal or responsible accountant in a public office, or in a mercantile or banking house or company ; an officer in the English Court of Chancery. — See Accomptant^eneral. Brande. ac-c6Cnt'ant-8hIp, n. countant. The office of an ac- Crabb. AC-C6t>NT'-BOOK (-bftk), n. A book containing accounts. " Turning to my arcount-book, and seeing if I have enough left for my support." Sufi/t. AC-CdONT'|NO, n. The act of reckoning up an. counts. AC-COOp'LE (»k-kOp'pl), V. a. [L. ad, to, and copulo, to join together ; Fr. accovpler.] [i. ac- COtl-LED ; pp. ACCOtPLIXO, ACCOUPLBf).] To join ; to link together ; to couple. Bacon. AC-COCP'LE-.MfcNT (»k-kttp'p|.iu«ni), n. 1. Act of coupling ; a junction. Todd. 2. (Car.) A tic or brace. H'eale. t AC-COCr'A^E (»k-kBr'»j), V. a. [Fr. aecoura- ger.] To encourage. Spenser. t AC-COURT', V. a. To court. Spenser. AC-cftU'TRE (»k-k3'iur), r. a. [Fr. accoulrer, to dress, from coudre, to sew ; L. ad, to, and consuo, to stitch together. Skinner. L. ad, to, and cultura, culture, preparation. Gattel.] [i. accoutuei) ; pp. accoituino, accoutred.] To supply with equipage or accoutrcmentu ; to dress ; to equip. " Accotdred as I was." Shak. AC-c6u'TRE-M6NT (»k-k6'fur-ni«nt), n. Pouches, belts, &c., of a soldier ; military dress and arms ; equipments ; dress ; equipage ; trap- pings ; ornaments. Shak. tAC-c6f,«. o. [FT.aceoiaer.] To <{me\.. Spenter. AC-CRf:D'|T, r. a. [L. accredo ; ad, to, and ere- do, to trust ; Old Fr. accr^diter.'] [i. accukdit- ED ; pp. ACCREDITING, ACCIIKDITED.] To give trust or confidence to ; to countenance ; to pro- cure honor or credit for. Burke. AC-CReD-l-TA'TIQN,n. That which gives credit. " Letters of accreditation." [k.] R. Cumberland. AC-CRED'|T-5D, p. a. Intrusted ; confidential. AC-CR£s'C?NCE, n. Act of growing to; in- crease, [h.] Coleridge. AC-CRfiS'CgNT, a. [L. aecresco, aecrescens ; nd, to, and cresco, to grow.] Growing to ; in- creasing. Shuckford. ACCRESCfMEJrrO (»k-kre«h-?-m«n't»), n. [It., increase.^ (AfjM.) The increase, by one half, of its original duration, which a note gains by having a dot placed at the right of it. Brande. AC-CRETE', a. {Bot.) Grown together. Don. AC-CRE'TIQN, n. [L. accretio, accreaco, to grow.] 1. Act of growing to another ; increase by the addition outwardly of new parts. Bacon. 2. {.Med.) A growing together by juxt.iposi- tion, as of the fingers or the toes to one an- other. Dunglison, 3. {Late.) The gradual and imperceptible ac- cumulation of soil out of the sea, or a river. BurriU. AC-CRE'Tj VE, a. Growing ; increasing bv growth. " Accretive motion of plants." fjUinviUe. t AC-CRlM-l-NA'TION, n. [L. ad, to, and crim- tnatio, an accusation.] Crimination. Ogilrie. AC-CROACH' (»k-kr«ch'), r. rt. [Ft. accrocher ; croc, a hook.] [i. accroached; pp. ac- croaching, ACCROACHED.] To dritw to one's self, as with a hook ; to assume the exercise of royal power, [r.] Blackstone. t AC-CROACH'MfNT, n. Act of accroaching. Baiiey. AC-CR(?E' (»k-krt>'), r. n. [L. ad, to, and cretco, or aecresco, to grow, to increase ; Fr. accroitre, OCCft*/] [l. ACCRUED ; pp. ACCRUING, ACCRUKD.I 1. To accede ; to be added. " Great gooa will acrue from it." Scott. 2. {Com.) To arise, as profits : — to follow, as loss ; but used less properly in this ill sense. t AC-CRCed', p. a. Joined together. Uaring Us forvr* all in one accnted. j^nwi. AC-CR0'M5XT, n. Addition ; increase, jr.] Bp. Taylor. AC-Cy-B.A'TlQN, n. [L. aectibo, to recline.] The ancient reclining posture at meals. Broome. jfC-CU'Bt- tOs, n. [L., from aeeumbo, to recline.] A room for the use of the clergyman, which is annexed to large churches. Weale. t AC-cC.MB', r. w. [L. aeeumbo.] To recline or lie at the table according to the ancient man- ner. BaiUy mIeN, STR; m6vE, N6R, s6N; bOlL, BOr, R(5le. — g. 9, ^, |, soft; C, e, q, j, hard; § « «; $ « {>• — THIS, t&is. ACCUMBENCY u ACETIFY AC-CUM'B^N-CY, n. State of reclininn; on the elbow, or being accumbent. Dr. Robinson. ;\(;-CUM'B5NT, a. [L. accumbens.'] 1. Reclin- " ing, as at a table ; leaning. Arbuthnot. 2. (^Bot.) Lying against, as when one part lies close upon the edge of another. Henslow. t AO-CUM'B^NT, ». One who reclines. Bp. Hall, AC-CU'MU-LATE, v. a. [L. accu>nulo, accumu- lattis, to heap up ; ad, to, and cumidtis, a heap. It. accutmiUire ; Sp. acunmlar ; Fr. accMWMfcr.] \i. ACCUMULATED ; pp. ACCUMVLATIXG, ACCU- MULATED.] To heap, as one thing upon an- other ; to pile up ; to amass ; to collect ; to bring together ; to increase ; to gather. Abandon all remorse ; On horror's head honors accwimUUe. Shak. Syn. — See Heap. iftC-CU'Aiy-LATE, V. n. To be heaped up ; to in- ' crease ; as, " The revenue accumulates rapidly." AC-UU'MU-LATE, a. Heaped; accumulated. "A * more accumulate degree of felicity." iiouth. AC-Cir-MU-LA'TION, n. 1. Act of accumulating. 2. That which is accumulated ; increase ; col- lection ; as, "An accumulation of rubbish." 3. {Law.) A concurrency of several titles, or of several proofs. AC-cfl'MU-LA-TlVE, a. That accumulates ; caus- ing accumulation ; cumulative. Johnson. AC-CU'MU-LA-TIVE-LY, ad. In an accumulat- ing manner. Todd. AC-CU'MU-LA-TOR, n. One who accumulates. i[C'ClT-R.A-CY , n. [L. accuratio ; ad, to, and euro, to take care of.] State of being accurate ; I'ree- dom from error ; correctness ; exactness ; nice- ty. ^^ Accuracy in the calculations." Arbuth- not. "Accuracy in the expression." Drydeti. Syn. — See Justness. Ac'cy-RATE, a. [L. accurattis ; It. accurato.] 1. Done carefully ; free from error ; con- formed to truth ; correct ; exact ; true ; — said of things ; as, " An accurate calculation." 2. Very careful, exact ; — said of persons ; as, " An accurate computer or observer." Syn. — Accurate and correct are not as strong terms as ecact and jirecue. An accurate or correct account or description ; an exact measure or model ; precLie rule or language. — See Strict. Ac'Cy-RATE-LV", ad. In an accurate manner ; exactly ; without error ; correctly ; precisely. Ac'cy-RATE-NESS, n. Accuracy ; exactness. AC-CiJRSE', V. a. [L. ad, to, and A. S. cursinn, to curse.] [t. accursed ; pp. accuksing, ac- CUKSED.] To doom to misery ; to curse. Hooker. AC-CiJRSED' (15), p. a. (sik-kUrst' or tik-kurs'ed). Doomed to misery ; cursed ; detestable ; exe- crable ; hateful. Thither, full fraught with mischievous revenge, AcciirDeil, and in u. cursed.hour he flies. Milton. Accursed tower, accursed, fatal hand. Shak. AC-CU'^A-BLE, a. That may be accused ; blama- * ble ; culpable. Browne. ^C-CU'§AL, n. [L. accuse, to accuse.] Act of accusing; accusation, [r.] The council of Nicea commenced with mutual accusah and recriminations. ililman. t AC-CU'§ANT, n. One who accuses. Bp. Hall. AC-Cy-^A'TION, n. [L. accusatio.l 1, Act of accusing or charging with an of- fence ; blame ; censure. Thus they in mutual accusation spent The ft-uitless hours. Milton. 2. That of which one is accused; a formal charge. They set over his head his accusation. Matt, xxvii. 37. AC-CU'^A-tIvE, a. [L. accuse, to accuse.] 1. Accusatory. " An accusative age." Dering. 2. {Gram.) Noting the fourth case of Greek and Latin nouns, the case in which the force of the active verb terminates, corresponding to the objective case in English. AC-CiJ'ijA-TlVE, n. The fourth case of Greek and Latin nouns. Harris. AC-CU'§A-TIVE-LY, ad. As the accusative case. AC-CO-^A-TO'RI-AL, a. Accusatory. Ec. Rev. AO-CU-^A-TORI-AL-LY, ad. By way of accu- sation. ' [r.] ' * Ec. Rev. AC-CU'§A-T0-RY, a. Containing an accusation ; criminatory. " An accusatory libel." Aylijfe. t AC-cOijE', n. Accusation; accusal. By false accuse dotli level at my life. Shak. AC-CU§E' (^k-kuz'), V. a. [L. accuso, to call to account ; ad, to, and causa, cause or charge ; It. accusare ; Sp. cu-iisar ; Fr. accuser.} [i. ac- cuser ; pp. accusing, accused.] 1. To charge with a crime or an offence ; to inform against ; to impeach ; to arraign ; to charge. And they asked him, saying. Is it lawftil to heal on the Sab- bath days? that they might accuse him. Matt. xii. 10. 2. To blame ; to censure. Their thoughts the meanwhile accusing or else excusing one another. Mom. ii. 15. Your valor would their sloth too much accuse. Drydcn. Syn. — To accu!c. A-CER'JC, a. [L. acer, the maple.] {Chem.) ' Noting an acid obtained from the maple. P. Cyc. A^-p-ROSE' (129), a. [L. acus, a needle.] . 1. {Bot.) Sharp; pointed, like a needle \ or pine leaf; acerous. Loudon. \ 2. [L. acerosus ; acus, chaff.] Chaffy ; V, like chaff; acerose. '^ A^'5R-Ot;s, a. [L. acerosus ; a«<«, chaff.] 1. ChaflFy ; like chaff. Smart. 2. [L. acus, a needle.] {Bot.) Sharp ; point- ed like a needle ; acerose. A-CER'VAL, a. [L. acervalis, heaped up ; acer- vus, a heap.] Occurring in heaps, [r.] Clarke t A-CER'VATE, V. a. [L. acervo.] To heap up. Scott. t Ay-^R-VA'TION, n. Act of heaping together. Johnson. A9-?R-VOSE' (129), a. Full of heaps. Bailey. t A-CES'C?NCE, n. Acescency. A-CES'C?N-CY, n. [L. acescens, turning sour.] Act of turning sour ; moderate sourness ; acid- ity. " The milk having an acescency very prejudicial to the constitution." Wm. Jones A-CES'cpNT (j-sSs'^nt), a. Tending to sourness or acidity. Arbuthnot. AQ-E-TAB' U-Lt/M, n. [L.] 1. {Rom. Ant.) A vinegar cruet ; a cup. Fairholt 2. A measure equal to one eighth of a pint. 3. {Anat.) The cavity or socket of the hip joint : — a lobe of the placenta in ruminating animals. Dunglison. 4. {Zool.) A sucker of the cuttle-fish and other cephalopods. Brande. A-CE'TAL, n. [L. acetum, vinegar ; aceo, to be- come sour.] {Chem.) A colorless, inflammable liquid, convertible by slow combustion into acetic acid, and obtained by the action of spongy plat- inum upon the vapor of alcohol. Brande. A<^-?-TA'Rl-OUS, a. [L. acetaria, salad plants.] {Bot.) Belonging to vegetables that are fit for salad. Don. A9'5-TA-RY, n. [L. acetaria.'] 1. (Bot^ An acrid pulp found in some fruits. 2. A salad. Buchanan. A^'^-TATE [as'e-tat, K. Sm. CI. Crabb, Maunder, Dunglison; t^-so'm, P. Cyc], n. {Chem.) A salt formed of acetic acid and a base. Milier. A-CET'lC, a. [L. acetum, vinegar.] {Chem.) ' Noting an acid contained in vinegar. Brande. A-CET-J-FJ-CA'TIQN, n. The act of acetifying, the operation of making vinegar. Vie. A-CET'l-FY, V. a. [L. acetum, vinegar, znAfacio, ' to make.] [i. acetified ; pp. acetifyino, ACETIFIED.] To charge with acetic acid. Ure. A, E, f, O, U, Y, long; A, % I, 6, U, t, short; A, 5, 1, Q, y, Y, obscure; fArE, FAR, FAsT, fALL ; H^IR, HER; ACETIMETER Ac-E-TlM'e-T^R, n. [L. acetum, vineRar, and Or uiTPov, a measure.] An inHtrunient or ap- paratus for nicasuriuK the strength of vineRar and other acids ; acidinieter. Ure. Ac-E-TlM'p-TRY, »». (('hem.) The art of meas- uring the strength of acids. Ure. Af'5-TITE, n. (Chem.) The name formerly ap- plied to a saU formed of distilled vinegar and a base. Crabb. Ac-P-TOM'P-T^R, n. Acetimeter; acidimeter. — Sec AcKTiMETKU. Scudattiore. AC'P-TONE, n. [L. acetum, vinegar.] (Chem.) A very mobile, colorless, inflanimuble liquid, obtained by dry distillation from the acetates of the more powerful bases ; — also called pi/ro- acetic-spirU. RegiiauU. A<;-5-T0SE' (129), a. [Fr. ac^teux.] Acetous ; sour. Bailey. t A^-e-T^S'I-TY, n. The state of being acetose ; containing sourness. Bailey. A-CE'Tors [s-se'nis, W.J. Sm. R.; fts'f-tQs, K.], ' a. [L. acetum, vinegar.] 1. Having the quality of vinejjar ; sour. "Not any vinous, but an acetous spirit." Boyle. 2. (Chem.) Formerly applied to distilled vin- egar : — now applied to that degree of fermenta- tion which produces acetic acid, as distinguished from vinous fermentation, which produces al- cohol. irgluten.nuf^r.and water be mixed in certain proportions, and nmistrd by a proper degrof of heat, tiicy will pa«8intotlie i-fWHu frnnentation. and a Miiritunus liquor be tiie result. If gluten unduly abounda, or the heat be too atrong, or the pro- ce»« too long continued. It parses into the acetnut fermenta- tion, and vinegar i« formed. J-'raneit. A^'g-TVLE, n. [L. acetttm, vinegar, and Gr. vXri, matter.] (Chem.) A hypothetic radical of acetic compounds, composed of carbon and hydrogen. Brniide. A-CHiE'AN (s-ke'sin), a. ' Achaia or Acha;a. {Geog.) Relating to Mitjord. A-CHiE'AN, n. A native of Achxa ; a Greek. A-£HA'IAN (»-ka'y»n). "• ^n Acha;an ; a Greek. Campbell, ArUE (5k), n. [Gr. a;^of. — A. S. tree, occ] A continued pain ; aching. I'll raclc thee with old cramps, Fill all thy bones with ocAes. Shak. ACHE (ik), V. n. [A. S. acan, to ache. — Gr. ^x^, Sain.J [t. ACHED ; jo/>. aching, ached.] To e in pain ; to feel pain ; to be painful. Teeth are contrived to eat, not to ache. Paley. AjCH-5E-NE§E', n. sing. & pi. {Cfeog.) An inhab- itant, or the inhabitants, of Acheen. Earnshaw. AcH-pE-NE^E', a. Belonging to Acheen. Earnshaw. jf-€HK 'JV/- Om, n. [Gr. a, not, and X"'"^} to gape.] (Iht.) A small, dry, indchis- cent fruit, containing a single seed, as that of the buttercups. Gray. A-CHER'NfR, n. [Ar.] (Astron.) The name of a large star in the southern extremity of the constellation Eridanus. Crabb. AjCH'5-r6n, n. [Gr. i;^;of, pain, and 'p(u>v, flow- ing.] (Myth.) The name of a river in the in- fernal regions. Sad Acheron, of sorrow, black and deep. Milton. AjCII-?-rO'§IAN, a. Relating to Acherusia. Appleton. ACH'fR-SfiT, n. An ancient mensure of corn, supposed to be about eight bushels. Crabb. A-CHIEV'A-BLE (^-chev'^-bl), a. [See ACHIEVE.] That may be done or achieved ; practicable. To raise a dead man to lift doth not involve contradiction, and is therefore an otyect of power, and at least achieraljle by Omnipotence. Barruw. A-CIirEV'ANCE,n. Achievement. "Noble acts and achievances." [it.] Sir T. Elyot. A-CHIEVE' (ji-chcv'), V. a. [Fr. achever ; o, tp, and chef, head. — See Chief.] [». achieved ; pp. ACHIEVINO, achieved.] 1. To bring to a head or end ; to accomplish, as some great enterprise ; to perform ; to com- plete ; to finish. And now great deed* Had been achieved. Milton. 15 2. To obtain by effort ; to gcin ; to bring about. Experience is by imlustry achieveil. Shak. Syn. — !^u« Accomplish, (.'omplete. A-CII1EVE'M5\T, n. 1. Act of achieving; per- forniancu ; accomplishiueut ; as, " The achieve- ment of an enterprise." 2. An heroic deed ; a great exploit ; a feat. That titmoua, liard achieveiitent* stUl pursue. Spenier. 3. (Her.) An escutcheon, or ensign armo- rial. Dryden. Syn. — See Deed. A-CHIKV'^R, n. One who achieves. Shak. ACH-IL-LE 'A, n. [L. Achilles, who is said to have used it in curing the wounds of Telephus.] (Bot.) A genus of plants ; milfoil. P. Cyc. AjCH'ING, p. a. Suffering, or causing, pain. What peaceful hours I once enioyeUI How sweet their memory still! But they have left an athiny The world can never till. fold Cowfier. ACH'JNG (a'kitig), n. Continued pain ; uneasi- ness. "Painful girds and achings." Sottth. AjCH'I-RITE, n. (Min.) A silicate of copper; dioptase ; so named from Achir Maimed, the merchant by whom it was first introduced into Europe. Phillips. AcH-LA-MYD'f-OUS, a. [Gr. a priv. and x^"/"'<. ;i;>l(»/4tio5. a cloak.] (Bot.) Having neither calyx nor corolla, and consequently destitute of any floral covering. Brande. ACH'MITE, n. (Min.) A crystallized brownish mineral, composed of silica, peroxide of iron, and soda. — See Acmite. Dana. A'eilOR (tW(,r),n.; i)\. 4-0a6'RK!f. [Or. a^i^o, scurf.] (Med.) A species of herpes ; the scald- head ; a scaly eruption. Quincy. A 'CHRAs, n. [L. ; Gr. a^P&i, a wild pear-tree.] (Bot.) A genus of tropical fruit-bearing timber- trees ; the sapota. P. Cyc. AcH-RQ-MAT'JC (ak-ro-mat'jk), a. [Gr. o priv. and ;:^f)'c;-AwE(»-Bid'u-l«), n.p/. [L.] Medicinal springs impregnated with carbonic acid. Quincy. A-cIdT-lATR, r. o. [L. aeidulus, somewhat sour.] [«. ACIDULATED ; fp. ACIDfLATI.^O, ACiDi'LATED.] To imbue with acids in a slight degree. Arbuthnot. A-ClD-r-LA'TIO.\, n. [L.] (Chem.) Art or process of acidulating: — preservation of food by use of vinegar. Merle. A-cId'U-LOCs, a. L Somewhat acid ; sourish. " Dulcified from acidulous tincture." Burke. 2. Containing carbonic acid ; as, " Acidulous mineral waters. ' A^'l-FORM, a. [L. acus, a needle, and forma, form.] Needle-shaped. Clarke. Ay-l-NA'CEOrS (il»-?-n5'«hus), a. [L. n<-iwi«, a grape-stone.] Full of kernels. Maunder A(,;-1-NA<;;'J-f6R.M, a. [L. aeinaces, a cimeter, and forma, form.] (Bot.) Cimeter-shaped. P. Cyc. A-ClN'l-FORM, a. [L. acinus, a grape- stone, and forma, form.] Having the form of grapes. Smart. A^-l-NOSE' (129), » a. [L. acinut, a A^'l-NOCS, \ grape-stone.] Consisting of minute granular concretions : — noting iron ore found in clustered masses. Smart. AQ'1-JVifs, n.\ pi. Xp'f-ifl. [L.] L (Bot.) .\ bunch of "fleshy fruit, as of graocs.or a raspberry. /,i/i//i-y. 2. (Attat.) A gland or granular body at the termination of an artcrv : — pi. glands like the pancreas, arranged in clusters. Du$tglison. A(^-I-Pf:Jir'SF:R, n. (ZC/.) A genus of reptili.-in fishes, including thft sturgeon. Brande. A<7-|-(JR'9Y, n. [Gr. ixii, any pointed instrument, and ipyuf, work, action.] 1. A demonstration of surgical operations. Ogilrie. 2. A description of surgical instruments. Month. Rer. ACK'gR, n. 1. A ripple on the surface of the water. HaUiieett. 2. Fine mould. [Local, Eng.] Craven Dialect. t AC-K.NOW (»k-n»'), r. a. [L. afinosco, to rec- ognize.] To acknowledge. B. Jonson. AC-KNoWL'?D9E (»k-n»r?j), t. a. [L. ad, to. ' and k-notcledge.] [i. acknowledged ; pp. ao KNOW LEDOINO, ACKXOWLEDOBD.] 1. To own the knowledge of; to own in a par- ticuhir character ; to rectigniie. Tmst In the Lord with all thine hewt t in all thy wars mc kmwteilar him. I'rvr. Ui. 4, ft. None that ncbtowlctlgr God. or pmrldenc*. Their souls' eternity did ever doubc DaHm. 2. To admit to be true ; to grant ; to approve. For we wntr none other things unto you. than what ye r*»d or aclMO>rkdge ; and I trust jr» shaU aetnoicledy 'T^ *? '.. end. * **•■• *• •* 3. To confess, as a fault. Inrtwrnrlprffferfngrttninilollw*. I Ml*, 1 wiU eonft- mr ansnvsaions. P*- xxxu. i. transgressions. MIbN, sYR; MdVE, NOR, 86n ; bOlL, BOE, rOLE. — 9, 9, ?, I. soft; C, 6, £, |, hard; § a* «; \ as ja.— TU18, this. ACKNOWLEDGED 4. To own with gratitude. I thankfully «cfcno«7te\C-KNOWL'5D9ED (?ik-n81'ejd),p. a. Avowed; confessed; owned; recognized. AC-KN6wL'5D5J-5R, n. One who acknowledges. AC-KNO WL'5D^-InG (jk-nai'ej-tng), p. a. Mak- ing acknowledgment ; grateful. He has shown his hero acknowledging and ungrateful, com- passionate and hard-hearted. Dryden. AC-KN6WL'?D9-MENT (sik-nSrej-mSnt), n. 1. Act of acknowledging; admission of the truth of any fact or position ; concession ; con- fession. Hale. 2. ExpressioH of gratitude for a favor re- ceived. 3. (Law.) The declaration or avowal of one's signature, or of the validity of a document to which one's name is signed. — See Judgment. iC'ME, n. [Gr. aKnt'i.] pi. Ac'ME?. 1.' The height ; the summit ; the top ; highest point. " Its acme of human greatness." Burke. 2. {Med.) Crisis of a disease. Dunglison. Ac'MITE, n. [Or. iKpi, a point.] {Min.) A sili- cate of iron and soda ; — written also achmite, and so called from the form of its crystals. Z)«wa. ^C'JVE, or Ac'JVA, n. [Gr. axi'V, or axvn, any thing that comes off the surface.] {Med.) A small pimple or tubercle on the face. Dunglison. AC'O-LIN, n. {Ornith.) A kind of partridge in Cuba. Ogilvie. A-COLD', a. Cold. " Poor Tom 's flcoW." Shak. A-c6l'0-9Y. n. [Gr. uplied to what is moral or spiritual : acquisition is that which is acquired for the benefit of one's self or another, and is commonly applied to what is material. .Acquirement of knowledge or wis- dom ; attainment of excellence ; acquisition of wealth. AC-aUIR'gR, n. One who acquires. AC-aUIR'!NG, n. Acquirement. Naunton. t AC-aui'RY, »i. Acquirement. Barrow. fAc'aUI-^ITE (ak'w?-zlt), a. That is gained; Barrow. AC-aUI-§I"TION (ak-we-zlsh'un), n. [L. acqui- sitio-l 1. Act of acquiring; acquirement. South. 2. That which is acquired ; acquirement ; attainment. Srmft. Syn. — See Acquirement. AC-auI^'l-TIVE, rt. 1. That is acquired. "Not in his acquisitive, but in his native soil." [ii.] Wotton. 2. Disposed to acquire; acquiring; as, "An acquisitive disposition." AC-aui^'l-TlVE-LY, ad. By acquisition. Lilly. AC-au!.«!'l-TlVE-NESS, n. {Phren.) The love of acquiring property or possession. Combe- K, E, I, 0, U, Y, long; k, E, I, 6, C, t, short; A, 5, \, Q, \<, Y, obscure; fArE. FAR, fAsT, fALL; HEIR, HER; ACQUISITOR AC-auT§'l-TQR, n. One who makes acquisition, ■ or gains. [k.J liichardson. f j\C-Q,VliiT',n. [Low L.ac7M***/M»i.] Acquest. " New acquist of true experience." Milton. .\<;-aiJlT' (jk-kwit'), V. a. [L. ad, to, and quietus, quiet; Fr. ticquitter. — Uce QiiT.] U. AC- Ul ITTKU; pp. ACm ITTINO, ACQl ITI EI).] 1. To (lisciiarKe from an accusation ; to clear from imputation ; to set free ; to exonerate ; to absolve ; as, " To acquit a prisoner." The Lord will not at all acquit tlic wicked. AViA. 1. 3. 2. To clear from obligation ; to bear one's self well in the discharge of a duty or under- taking. I have, by the hleMingof God, overcome all difflcultie«, and aciiiiitlnl iiivnolCiif tlic debt wlilch I owed the public when I undertook thi« work. Dri/den. Syn. — See Absolve. t AC-aulT'MpNT, n. Acquittal. SotUh. AC-ai;lT'TAL, n. {Law.) A deliverance from a charge or accusation of an oH'cncc; a judicial discharge ; a verdict of Not guilty. Cowell. t AC-aUlT'TANCE, r. o. To acquit. Shak. AC-aulT'TAi\CE, M. A discharge from a debt; a receipt ; a written discharge from an engage- ment or debt ; quittance. The poorer eitizens were continually calling out for a law whicl\ ohould entitle them to a complete iiet/iiil lance, ui>on paying only a certain proportion of their debts. Adam Umitlt. tA-CKASK', or fA-CRAZE', V. a. To craze. " The duke was somewhat acrased." Grafton. Ac'RA-SY, M, \Gt. aKpnaia; a priv. and icpaaii, temperament.] {Med.) Excess; irregularity; intemperance. Cornish. A'CRE(a'ker),n. [Gr.aypot; Jj.atjcr. — Goth, a^-rs; A. S. freer, a field; Ger. acker; Old Fr. acre.] 1. Any open, unmeasured field; as, Castle Acre, Irest Acre, &c. Crabb. 2. A piece of land forty rods long and four broad ; 160 square perches or rods ; or 4840 square yards ; or 43,560 square feet. Acre fiifhl, {Law.) a sort of duel fuii^ht by single coiiibaiaiKs, Englidh and Scotcli, on the fruiitiers of tlieir kiiijidoins. H'klshaw. A'CRE-.A(^E (a'k5r-?ij), n. The number of acres in a piece of land : — measurement of land by tlie acre. Ed. Rev. A'CliED (a'kerd), p. a. Possessing acres. Ileatheote himself, and such large-«crerf men, Lords of fut Eshaiii or of Lincom Fen. Pope. Great barons and many-acred men. Sir W. Jones. A'CRE-DALE (a'ker-dal), n. Land in a common field, different parts of which are held by different proprietors. [Local, Eng.] Brockett. AC'RID, a. [Gr. uki], a point ; L. acer, sharp.] 1. Hot, biting, sharp or rough to the taste ; bitter; pungent. Arbuthnot. 2. Acrimonious. "Acrid humors." Reid. " Acrid temper." Cowper. A-CR!d'j-AN, m. [Gr. oKpii, a locust.] {Ent.) A family of orthopterous insects, having for its type the genus Acridium. lirande. A-CRTI)'|-TY, n. Quality of being acrid; a sharp, bitter, biting taste ; pungency. P. Cyc. Ji-CRlD'I-i}M, n. [L. ; Gr. aK(Ai, a locust.] {Ent.) A genus of insects of the locust family, having wings sloping like a roof, and legs construcl;ea for leaping; the grasshopper. Braiide. Ac'RID-NEss, n. Quality of beingacrid; acridity. AC-RJ-MO'NI-OOS, a. 1. Full of acrimony ; cor- rosive. " If gall cannot be rendered af';v»i07ii- oui, and bitter of itself." Ha7-rey. 2. Severe ; bitter ; sarcastic ; censorious. " Acrimonious contempt." Johnson. Au-RJ-m0'N|-o08-LY, ad. In an acrimonious manner ; severely. ' Ac-Rl-MO'Nl-OVS-NESS, n. Quality of being acrimonious ; severity. Toda. Ac'R|-MQ-NY, n. [L. acrimonia ; acer, sharp.] 1. Sharpness ; corrosivencss ; harshness. Those ntilkn [in certain planti] have all an acrimoui/, though one would think they should be lenitive. Jiacon. 2. Severity ; bitterness ; tartness ; asperity : — applied to languago, or to the temper of per- 17 I/Ike a lavyer, I am reartv to support the cause : and, if oc- casion be, with subtilty ami tfrtiiiuiii/. lUiliimluokr.. Syn. Acrimony duintleM a hitteriietiM of fccliiiK, wliicli iM npl to lie iiLtnireritod in the inannerM and laii- gunise. Jlcrimoiiy of feeliii); ; grrerilij of leiii|icr or .i{ ; icpot, extreme, and ».«. HavingsprouU. A-CROSS', prep. & ad. Athwart ; crosswise ; over from side to side ; as, " Across the street " ; " To go across.", " Their arms across." Dryden. A-CROS'T|C, n. [Gr. o«fpo{, extreme, and ffT<;^ot, a row or line.] 1. A Hebrew poem in which the several linea begin with the letters of the alphabet in regtr lar order. Hook 2. A poem in which the first, or the first and last, letters of the lines spell some name, title, or motto. " Anagrams, chronograms, acros- tics." Burton. A-CR6s'T|C, ) a. Relating to, or formed like, A-CR0s'T[-CAL, > an acrostic. Dryden. A-CROS'T|-CAL-LY, ad. In the manner of an acrostic. " Todd. AC-RO-Tg-LEO'TjC, a. [Gr. i-rpoj, extreme, and tcXlvt/j, end.] {Theol.) Noting an addition to a psalm or hymn, as a doxology. Ogilrie. AC'RO-TF.R, n. [Gr. ixpop, a point, a peak.] {Arch.) A little pedestal to support statues, &c — See AcKOTEKiuM. AC-RO-Tk'Rl-CJM, n. [L.] pi. XcKQ-Tki Ri-^. 1. {Arch.) Small pecfestals placed (m the mid- dle and two ends of pediments to support statues. — See Ant.k. Guilt. 2. {Anaf.) An extremity of the body, as the end of a finger. Crabb. AC-Rg-THYM'I-6jf,n. {Med.) [Low L. ; Gr. Sxpoi, extreme, and Ob/tof, thvme, or a warty ex- crescence, so called from its likeness to a bunch of thyme flowers.] A hard and rough w.trt, broad at the base and narrow at the top. Crabb. Act, r. n. [L. ago, actus ; It. wire ; Fr. agir.] [i. ACTED ; pp. ACTIXO, ACTED.] 1. To be engaged in carrying into effect a purpose or conception of the mind. IX-liberatc with caution, but act with drciclon. fMfoa. 2. To regulate one's habits or behavior ; to conduct one's self ; to behave. The druireof happiness, and the constraint il nuts upon ■■ to act fbr it, nolKxly accounts an abridgiiient ul liberty. Lackr. 3. To exert power or influence ; to operate ; as, " The mind acts upon the botly." To act up to, 10 conform to ; to altldu by. Act, V. a. 1. To perform ; to do ; to carry into execution. Few love to hear the sins they love to dclicata To act her earthy and alihorrrd comiiiand*. Slutk. 2. To represent as real ; to imitate ; to feign ; as, " To act a part on the stage." A kincriom (iir a stswe. princes to oH. Aud niuuarchs to lH-iii4il the swelling Mcne I 5ft